Apachehvac

ApacheHVACUserGuide
IESVirtualEnvironment6.3
ApacheHVACUserGuide6.3revA
Contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 WhatisApacheHVACandwheredoesitfitwithintheVirtualEnvironment?....................... 7
1.2 ApacheHVACInterfaceOverview.......................................................................................... 8
0H
1H
2H
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
VirtualEnvironmentMenuBar................................................................................................................... 8
ApacheHVACMenuBar.............................................................................................................................. 8
ApacheHVACToolbars................................................................................................................................ 8
ModelWorkspace....................................................................................................................................... 8
Mousecontrols........................................................................................................................................... 9
ViewToolbar............................................................................................................................................... 9
Componentbrowser................................................................................................................................... 9
3H
4H
5H
6H
7H
8H
9H
1.3 AComponentbasedApproachtoSystemSimulation......................................................... 11
1.4 SystemModelingFundamentals......................................................................................... 12
10H
11H
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Preparation............................................................................................................................................... 12
ConstructingSystems............................................................................................................................... 13
Roomcomponents.................................................................................................................................... 14
12H
13H
14H
2 HVACSystemComponents........................................................................................................ 16
15H
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Watersideplantequipmentandwaterloops........................................................................................... 16
Airsideplantequipmentandsystemcomponents................................................................................... 16
RoomunitszoneequipmentincludedonlywithinRoomcomponents................................................. 16
16H
17H
18H
2.2 HeatSources....................................................................................................................... 18
2.3 PartLoadHeatSource........................................................................................................ 19
19H
20H
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
Partloadheatsourcedefinition............................................................................................................... 20
CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power........................................................................................................... 21
Condenserheatrecovery.......................................................................................................................... 21
Pumppower............................................................................................................................................. 22
PartloadPerformance............................................................................................................................. 22
21H
22H
23H
24H
25H
2.4 HotWaterBoilers............................................................................................................... 23
26H
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
Hotwaterboilerdefinition....................................................................................................................... 24
CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power........................................................................................................... 25
Condenserheatrecovery.......................................................................................................................... 25
BoilerPerformance................................................................................................................................... 26
RatedCondition........................................................................................................................................ 31
DesignCondition....................................................................................................................................... 34
OperatingParameters.............................................................................................................................. 35
Pumps....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Pumpheatgaintohotwaterloop(fraction)............................................................................................ 39
27H
28H
29H
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
2.5 Airsourceheatpump......................................................................................................... 42
36H
2.5.1
2.5.2
Heatpumpsettings................................................................................................................................... 44
Heatpumpperformance.......................................................................................................................... 44
37H
38H
2.6 ChilledWaterLoops,HeatRejection,andChillerSequencing............................................. 45
39H
2.6.1
2.6.2
VE6.3
Chilledwaterloopdefinition.................................................................................................................... 49
ChilledWaterLooptab............................................................................................................................. 51
40H
41H
ApacheHVAC
2.6.3
2.6.4
HeatRejectiontab.................................................................................................................................... 54
ChillerSettab............................................................................................................................................ 60
42H
43H
2.7 PartLoadCurveChillers...................................................................................................... 62
44H
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
Partloadcurvechillerdefinition.............................................................................................................. 62
CondenserHeatRecovery........................................................................................................................ 64
Electricalpowerconsumptionforpumpsandfans.................................................................................. 65
COPTemperatureDependence................................................................................................................ 66
Partloadperformancedataforchillerandauxiliaryequipment............................................................. 66
45H
46H
47H
48H
49H
2.8 ElectricWatercooledChillers............................................................................................. 68
50H
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
Watercooledchillerdefinition................................................................................................................. 68
ChillerPerformance.................................................................................................................................. 69
RatedCondition........................................................................................................................................ 80
51H
52H
53H
54H
2.9 ElectricAircooledChillers.................................................................................................. 83
55H
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
Watercooledchillerdefinition................................................................................................................. 83
ChillerPerformance.................................................................................................................................. 85
RatedCondition........................................................................................................................................ 94
56H
57H
58H
59H
2.10DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types).......................................................................... 97
60H
2.10.1
Watersideeconomizersettingsdialog..................................................................................................... 99
61H
2.11DXCooling(types)............................................................................................................ 102
2.12UnitaryCoolingSystems(types)....................................................................................... 105
62H
63H
2.12.2
UnitaryCoolingSystemPerformanceData............................................................................................ 107
64H
2.13HeatingCoils..................................................................................................................... 110
2.14CoolingCoils..................................................................................................................... 111
65H
66H
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.14.4
2.14.5
2.14.6
2.14.7
2.14.8
Background............................................................................................................................................. 111
SimpleModel.......................................................................................................................................... 111
AdvancedModel..................................................................................................................................... 111
AutosizingMode..................................................................................................................................... 112
ManualMode......................................................................................................................................... 112
CoolingCoilDialogs................................................................................................................................ 113
DesignSizingParametersforSimpleCoilModel.................................................................................... 117
DesignSizingParametersforAdvancedCoilModel............................................................................... 118
67H
68H
69H
70H
71H
72H
73H
74H
2.15SprayChamber................................................................................................................. 123
75H
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
Reference................................................................................................................................................ 123
SprayEfficiency....................................................................................................................................... 123
CirculationPumpElectricalPower.......................................................................................................... 124
76H
77H
78H
2.16SteamHumidifiers............................................................................................................ 125
2.17HeatRecoveryDevices...................................................................................................... 126
2.18Fans.................................................................................................................................. 128
2.19MixingDamperSet........................................................................................................... 130
2.20ReturnAirDamperSet...................................................................................................... 137
2.21ControlledDivergentTJunction(splitterdamper)......................................................... 138
79H
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
2.22DuctworkHeatPickup..................................................................................................... 139
2.23DirectActingHeater/Cooler............................................................................................. 140
2.24HotWaterRadiators......................................................................................................... 142
85H
86H
87H
2.24.2
2.24.3
2.24.4
2.24.5
DistributionPumpConsumption............................................................................................................ 146
Material.................................................................................................................................................. 146
TotalRadiatorWeight............................................................................................................................. 146
WaterCapacity....................................................................................................................................... 146
88H
89H
90H
91H
2.25ChilledCeilings................................................................................................................. 147
3 Controllers............................................................................................................................... 151
3.1 WorkingwithcontrollersontheairsideHVACnetwork.................................................... 151
92H
93H
94H
3.1.1
3.1.2
On/Off,Deadband,andProportionalcontrol......................................................................................... 152
Multiplecontrolofsinglevariable.......................................................................................................... 152
95H
96H
3.2 Controlleroperation......................................................................................................... 153

3.3 Controllerparameters...................................................................................................... 154
97H
98H
3.3.1
3.3.2
Controlledvariables................................................................................................................................ 155
Sensedvariables..................................................................................................................................... 156
99H
100H
3.4 Controlsincombination................................................................................................... 158

101H
3.4.1
3.4.2
Multiplecontrollersatasinglenetworknode........................................................................................ 158
LinkingofcontrollersvialogicalANDandORconnections.................................................................... 159
102H
103H
3.5 Airflowcontrollers............................................................................................................ 159

3.6 Controllerparametersterminologyandgeneraldiscussion........................................... 159
104H
105H
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
TimeSwitchorOn/OffControl............................................................................................................... 159
Sensor(foron/offandproportionalcontrol)......................................................................................... 161
SetPoint(foron/offcontrol).................................................................................................................. 161
ProportionalControl............................................................................................................................... 162
ANDConnections.................................................................................................................................... 164
ORConnections...................................................................................................................................... 164
106H
107H
108H
109H
110H
111H
3.7 ControllerAlgorithm......................................................................................................... 164

3.8 Airflowcontrol................................................................................................................. 166
3.9 IndependentTimeSwitchController................................................................................ 167
3.10IndependentControllerwithSensor................................................................................. 169
112H
113H
114H
115H
3.10.1
Proportionalcontrolssequencing........................................................................................................... 172
116H
3.11IndependentDifferentialController.................................................................................. 174
3.12DependentTimeSwitchController................................................................................... 175
3.13DependentControllerwithSensor.................................................................................... 176
3.14DependentDifferentialController.................................................................................... 177
4 RoomUnitControllers............................................................................................................. 180
4.1 HotWaterRadiatorControl.............................................................................................. 181
117H
118H
119H
120H
121H
122H
4.1.2
4.1.3
On/offandsetpointcontrols................................................................................................................. 182
ProportionalControllerforHotWaterFlowRate.................................................................................. 183
123H
124H
4.2 ChilledCeilingControl...................................................................................................... 184

125H
4.2.2
VE6.3
On/offandsetpointcontrols................................................................................................................. 185
126H
ApacheHVAC
4.2.3
4.2.4
ProportionalControllerforColdWaterFlowRate................................................................................. 185
ProportionalTemperatureController..................................................................................................... 186
127H
128H
4.3 DirectActingRoomHeaterController............................................................................... 186

5 HVACWizard........................................................................................................................... 188
5.1 HVACWizardInterface..................................................................................................... 188
129H
130H
131H
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
HVACWizarddialog................................................................................................................................ 188
HVACWizard:CreateNewSystem......................................................................................................... 189
Page3oftheHVACWizard(CreateNewSystem).................................................................................. 190
HVACWizard:OpenRecentSystem....................................................................................................... 191
132H
133H
134H
135H
6 MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks...................................................................................... 192
6.1 CreatingaMultiplexOverview....................................................................................... 193
136H
137H
6.1.1
RulesforMultiplexesandcontrollerswithinthem................................................................................ 196
138H
6.2 CreateMultiplex............................................................................................................... 197

139H
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Description.............................................................................................................................................. 197
EditingMode........................................................................................................................................... 197
Layers...................................................................................................................................................... 198
PrincipalRooms...................................................................................................................................... 199
AssignfromRoomGroup........................................................................................................................ 201
140H
141H
142H
143H
144H
6.3 EditMultiplex................................................................................................................... 202

145H
6.3.1
6.3.2
MultiplexToolbar................................................................................................................................... 202
EditMultiplexDialog............................................................................................................................... 202
146H
147H
6.4 EditingComponentsandControllersinmultiplex............................................................. 203

148H
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
TabularEditing........................................................................................................................................ 203
TouchEdits............................................................................................................................................. 203
EditRoomComponentInstancesandRoomUnitControllers................................................................ 203
149H
150H
151H
6.5 TabularEditing................................................................................................................. 204

152H
6.5.2
PastetoDataTableusingtabulareditview........................................................................................... 206
153H
6.6 NodeNumbering.............................................................................................................. 208

6.7 DeleteMultiplex............................................................................................................... 209
7 SystemLoads,Ventilation,andAutosizing............................................................................... 210
7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 210
7.2 Zonelevelloadsandsizing............................................................................................... 210
7.3 Systemlevelloadsandsizing............................................................................................ 211
7.4 SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflownavigator............................................................... 212
154H
155H
156H
157H
158H
159H
160H
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
VE6.3
SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflowsummary.................................................................................... 212
Designsizingconditions.......................................................................................................................... 215
AcquirePrototypeSystems..................................................................................................................... 215
PrototypeSystemsSelectionandModification...................................................................................... 217
AssignSpacesorZonestoRoomComponents....................................................................................... 217
SystemSchedulesHoursofoperationandsetpoints.......................................................................... 218
RoomLoadsCalculations........................................................................................................................ 219
AccessLoadsDataspreadsheetsandASHRAE62.1Ventilation............................................................. 220
AHUSystemParameters......................................................................................................................... 222
161H
162H
163H
164H
165H
166H
167H
168H
169H
ApacheHVAC
7.4.10
7.4.11
7.4.12
7.4.13
AssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingData.................................................................................. 223
SystemandPlantLoadsCalculation....................................................................................................... 224
SystemandPlantEquipmentSizing........................................................................................................ 225
SystemandPlantSizingReport.............................................................................................................. 225
170H
171H
172H
173H
8 PrototypeHVACSystems......................................................................................................... 228
8.1 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Commonfeatures................................................. 229
8.2 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Systemtypesandconfigurations.......................... 230
8.3 Workingwithprototypesystems...................................................................................... 233
174H
175H
176H
177H
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
Loading,saving,andretrievingprototypesystems................................................................................ 233
Selecting,moving,copying,andnamingsystems................................................................................... 233
Modifyingpredefineprototypesystems............................................................................................... 233
178H
179H
180H
8.4 Commonelementsusedinpredefineprototypesystems................................................ 233

181H
8.4.1
8.4.2
Energyrecoveryandbypassdampersection......................................................................................... 233
VAVairflowcontrols............................................................................................................................... 236
182H
183H
8.5 Prototypesystems:Systemspecificdescriptionsandguidance........................................ 237

184H
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
8.5.9
8.5.10
PackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)........................................................................................... 237
PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)................................................................................................... 237
Singlezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)................................................................... 237
Singlezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)................................................................................................ 237
VAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler.......................................................................................... 237
VAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat............................................. 237
VAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler........................................................................... 237
VAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat.............................. 237
Dedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHWboiler........... 237
IndirectdirectevaporativecoolingversionofVAVreheatsystem5abovewithbackupDXcoolingand
zonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV)................................................................. 237
VAVreheat with differentialenthalpy economizer set up for the public areas of a hotel or similar
buildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualguest/residentroomsdrawingairfromanatriumzoneonthe
mainVAVsystem.................................................................................................................................... 237
Mixedmode natural ventilation and VAVreheat with zone temperature and zone CO2 overrides for
natventwhenitisinsufficient............................................................................................................... 237
Singlefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes.......................................................................... 237
Dualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes.................................................................................. 237
Underfloor air distribution with parallel fanpowered boxes for perimeter zones, leakage path, and
heatingmoderemixingofPFPbzones.................................................................................................. 237
UFAD/DV system as above, plus heat pipe or runaround coil in AHU for free reheat of subcooled
(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil......................................................................................... 238
Active chilled beams and DOAS for ventilation using electric watercooled chiller with waterside
economizerandcondenserheatrecovery;HWboilerandrecoveredheatforDOASandzonebaseboard
fintubeconvectors................................................................................................................................. 238
Radiantheatingandcoolingpanels(i.e.,fourpipesystem),plusDOASwithairsideenergyrecoveryand
DCV......................................................................................................................................................... 238
Radiant panels and DOAS as above with heat pipe or runaround coil in AHU for free reheat of sub
cooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil...................................................................... 238
185H
186H
187H
188H
189H
190H
191H
192H
193H
194H
8.5.11
195H
8.5.12
196H
8.5.13
8.5.14
8.5.15
197H
198H
199H
8.5.16
200H
8.5.17
201H
8.5.18
202H
8.5.19
203H
9 References............................................................................................................................... 239
10AppendixA.RulesforAirFlowSpecification............................................................................ 240
204H
205H
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
11AppendixB.HVACSystemsModelingGuidanceSpecifictoASHRAEStandard90.12007........ 242
206H
11.1.1
Baselinesystems2and4PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)andPackagedSingleZoneHeatPump
(PSZHP).................................................................................................................................................. 242
207H
12AppendixC.ModelingVRV/VRFsystems................................................................................. 252
208H
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
Introduction
0B
1.1 WhatisApacheHVACandwheredoesitfitwithintheVirtualEnvironment?
12B
ApacheHVAC is used for modeling heating, ventilating, and airconditioning (HVAC) systems, and falls
withintheVirtualEnvironmentsThermalapplicationcategory.
VirtualEnvironment
Thermalapplications
ApacheHVACview
TheApacheHVACsupportsthedetaileddefinition,configuration,control,andmodelingofHVACsystems.
ThesimulationprogramitselfisrunfromwithinApacheThermal.
ApacheHVAC is invoked as an adjunct to Apache Simulation by linking to a particular HVAC system file
whenthebuildingmodelsimulationisrun,asdescribedintheApacheUserGuide.
TherearetwodistinctmeansofspaceconditioningandHVACsimulationintheIESVirtualEnvironment,
andthesearesuitableforverydifferenttasks,levelsofanalysis,andstagesofdesign.
ApacheSystemsSimplifiedsystemmodelingforschematicdesignandcodecomplianceinApacheSim:
Fully autosized and ideally controlled systems condition spaces exactly to set points via pre
defined HVAC systemtype algorithms and minimal room, system, and plant inputs within
ApacheSim.ThissimplifiedHVACmodelingisfullyintegratedwiththethermal,solar,andbulk
airflow modeling at every simulation time step. However, because the systems are
approximated, it is far less representative of actual system equipment, configurations, and
controls.Thus,whileitmaybeveryusefulinearlydesignphasesandspaceloadsanalyses,this
type of modeling is normally not used in design development, documentation of energy
performance for the ASHRAE 90.1 performance rating method, thermal comfort studies, or
otherdetailedanalysis.
ApacheHVACDetailedHVACsystemsmodeling:
Detailed dynamic modeling of systems, equipment, and controls in ApacheHVAC is also fully
integrated with the thermal, solar, and bulkairflow modeling at every simulation time step.
Componentbased system models can be built from scratch or by modifying autosizable
prototypesystems,ortheprototypesystemscanbeusedintheirpredefinedconfiguration.
When ApacheHVAC is invoked, all spaces in the model that are assigned to a room component in the
activeApacheHVACsystematthetimeofsimulationwillbeservedbythatsystem.Solongasthisistrue,
theseroomswillnotbeservedbythesimplersystemsotherwisedefinedintheApacheSystemsdialog.
Similarly,Auxiliaryventilation,asdefinedintheAirExchangestaboftheThermalConditionstemplate,is
turnedoffautomaticallyforroomsservedbyanApacheHVACsystem.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
1.2 ApacheHVACInterfaceOverview
13B
TheApacheHVACviewconsistsofthefollowinginterfacefeatures:
1.2.1
VirtualEnvironmentMenuBar
59B
These menus provide functions used throughout the Virtual environment. Please refer to the Virtual
EnvironmentUserGuideforfurtherinformation.
1.2.2
ApacheHVACMenuBar
60B
ThesepulldownmenusprovidefunctionsspecifictotheApacheHVACview.
1.2.3
ApacheHVACToolbars
61B
The toolbars provide quick access to menu functions, selection of components and controllers to be
placed on the system schematic, creation and editing of system of multiplexes, and access to system
prototypes.Themultiplexingeditingtoolbarisactiveonlywhenamultiplexisselected.
1.2.4
VE6.3
ModelWorkspace
62B
ApacheHVAC
The model workspace displays the HVAC system airside schematic and provides a graphical means of
selecting,configuring,organizing,andeditingcomponentobjects.
1.2.5
Mousecontrols
63B
Theleftmousebuttonisusedforselectingandplacingcomponentandcontrollers.Whenplacingthese,
thecurrentselectionpersistsuntilcancelledbyclickingtherightmousebutton.Themousescrollwheel
canbeusedtozoominandoutofthesystemsview.Thepanfunctionaccessedprovidedbymovingthe
mousewhiledepressingthescrollwheel.
1.2.6
ViewToolbar
64B
This provides functions for manipulating the view of the system schematic, including zoom to HVAC
networkextents,window,in,out,pan,previous,andnext.
1.2.7
Componentbrowser
65B
Browsershow/hidetoolbarbutton.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
ThecomponentbrowserprovidesalistingofallcomponentsinthecurrentApacheHVACfile.Thiscanbe
usedtolocateand/orselectaparticulartypeofcomponentorcontrollerwithinalargeorcomplexHVAC
network. Selecting the component or controller within the browser causes it to be highlighted on the
network in the model space. The browser can also be useful in determining how many of a particular
componentorcontrollertypearepresent.
ItisnotnecessarytohidethecomponentbrowserformostHVACsystemnetworks,asthespeedofthis
has been significantly improved over earlier versions. When working on exceptionally large or complex
HVAC networks, if the opening of component and controller dialogs does begin to slow noticeably, the
componentbrowsercanbeturnedOFFbyclickingthebrowsershow/hidebuttononthetoolbar.Thiswill
furtherincreasethespeedwithwhichcomponentandcontrollerdialogsopen.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
10
1.3 AComponentbasedApproachtoSystemSimulation
Energy simulation programs have in the past provided models of only certain fixed system types (VAV,
induction,fancoils,etc).Inpractice,buildingsystemsdonotconformtotheserigidsystemtypes,andso
itwasnecessarytoacceptadegreeofcompromiseintherealismofthemodel.
Figure11:AmultizoneHVACnetworkinthiscasevariableairvolumewithindirectdirectevaporative
cooling, energy recovery, variation of static pressure with bypass of heat exchangers, duct heat gain,
return air plenums, controls for mixedmode operation with natural ventilation, and primary, transfer,
andexhaustairflowpathsavailabletoeachofthezonesinthelayeredmultiplexregion.
ApacheHVAChasbeendesignedtoimposeminimalrestrictionsontheuserindefiningthesystemmodel.
Theuserisofferedanumberofbasicblocks,eachdescribingagenerictypeofequipment(heatingcoil,
fan, humidifier, etc.). These basic blocks can be assembled as required to model an actual system
configuration,ratherthananidealizedsimplification.Thecomplexityofthemodelislimitedonlybythe
typesofblockavailableandsomebasicrulesconcerningtheirinterconnection.Withintheseconstraints,
itispossibletoassemblemodelsofmanydifferentsystemandcontrolconfigurationsandtoexplorethe
benefitsofvariationsonstandardsystemtypes.
Anitemofplantorcontrolcanbedescribedonce,andthencopiedorreferencedasmanytimesasmay
berequiredtodefinethesystem.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
11
1.4 SystemModelingFundamentals
14B
1.4.1
Preparation
66B
The speed, efficiency, and effectiveness with which an ApacheHVAC system can be set and all thermal
zonesassignedtoitissignificantlydependentupontheextenttowhichthemodelhasbeenappropriately
organized prior to doing so. Therefore, it is important to complete the following in ModelIt, before
attemptingtoassignroomsorzonestoanApacheHVACsystem:
VE6.3
Begin by using the Connect Spaces tool to couple any rooms in the model that will share a
common thermostat or related means of controlling space conditions (e.g., they will all be
served by a single VAV box). The resulting thermal zone will thus be represented as a single
Room component in ApacheHVAC. This will facilitate use of multiplexing, predefined
systems,andefficientsystemlayout,whileavoidingunnecessarycomplexity.
o Whenconnectingspaces,iftheywillbeseparatedbyphysicalpartitionsintheactual
building, these partitions should be retained, as their thermal mass and ability or
receive solar gain or other radiant, conductive, and convective heat transfer will
contributetotheaccuracyofthermalandenergymodeling.
o Ifanyofthezoneshasabsoluteinternalgains(WorBtu/h)ratherthaninternalgains
defined according to floor area (W/m2 or W/ft2), the absolute gains will have to be
manually added in the composite zone. However, if they are assigned per unit floor
area,noactionisrequired,asnofloorareawillbelost.
In addition to conditioned spaces, create geometry for any other spaces or zones that will
needtoberepresentedinApacheHVAC,suchasreturnairplenums(typicallyoneperflooror
as designed), underfloor air distribution (UFAD) supply plenums, thermally stratified zones,
radiantheatingorcoolingslabs,earthtubes,solarchimneys,etc.
ApacheHVAC
12
1.4.2
It is important to set up a Grouping Scheme in ModelIt that sorts thermal zones into groups
suchasSystem1,2,3,etc.orAHU1,2,3,etc.andotherspacetypes,suchasReturn air
plenums,Solarchimneysegments,Unconditionedzones,etc.
IfthemodelincludesUFADofthermaldisplacementventilation(DV),itisessentialtoensure
that the number and order of Stratified zones exactly matches the number and order of
corresponding Occupied zones in any one AHU group. Doing so will facilitate system
multiplexing,autosizing,andotherfundamentalaspectsofsystemmodeling.Iftherearesome
mixed (nonstratified zones) on the same system, either place them in a separate group of
occupiedzonesorcreatedummystratifiedzones(e.g.,aseriesofsmallsuperinsulatedboxes
with no internal gains) in the model that can fill out the list of stratified zones to make it
parallel the list of occupied zones on the same system. Occupied and Stratified should be in
separategroupswiththeAHUAssignmentscheme.
ConstructingSystems
67B
Systems are constructed by picking components from the toolbars. Most components take the form of
tiles that are placed on the diagram to build up a schematic of the system. Controllers can also be
drawn,togetherwithlinesindicatingtheassociatedsensorandcontrolpoints.Certaincomponents,such
asplantequipment,donotappearontheschematic,butareinsteadlinkedtoothercomponentsviatext
references.
Each component has a set of parameters characterizing its operation. Facilities for editing these
parameters are accessed by doubleclicking on the component or through the menus. Once placed,
groupsofcomponentsmaybeselected,deleted,moved,orcopiedusingfunctionsonthetoolbar.
Multiplexing,describedinsection6,providesanefficientmeansofassigninggroupsofspacestoasetof
room components and of replicating and editing HVAC components, controllers, and configurations
thereof.The associatedTabularEditviewsupportsefficientlyeditingandcheckingnumerousinputsfor
componentsandcontrollers.
Whendrawingschematicsitishelpfultokeepinmindthefollowingprinciples:
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
13
WhenfirstbuildinganHVACsystem,itisadvisabletokeepthesystemsimple.Thismakesit
easy to test the control principles involved. The system can later be expanded to introduce
additionalroomsandcontrolrefinements.
Set up the minimum number of flow controls necessary to define the flow throughout the
systemi.e., on all branches. In other words, airflow must be specified in all parts of the
system, except where the flow can be deduced from other specified flows by addition and
subtractionatjunctions.Specifyingmoreflowsthanarestrictlynecessaryisnotforbidden,but
alwaysensurethatthespecifiedflowsaremutuallyconsistent.Inmostcases,itwillbeeasier
toallowflowstobecalculatedwherevertheycanbe.
In the case a room, it is only necessary to specify either the supply or the extract flow. The
programwillthensettheotherflowontheassumptionofequalityofinflowandoutflow.In
specializedapplications,suchaswhenMacroFloisrunningintandemwithApacheHVAC,the
room inflowand outflow may be set to different values. Any imbalance between inflow and
outflowwillthenbepickedupbyMacroFlo(ifitisinuse),andthedifferencewillbemadeup
withflowsthroughopeningsinthebuilding.AnimbalancecanalsobemeaningfulifMacroFlo
isnotinuse.Forexample,ifmoreairissuppliedtoaroomthanisextracted,theexcesswillbe
assumedtobeventedtooutside.Forafullaccountoftherulesforairflowspecificationsee
AppendixA.
TheschematicmayincludemultipleSystemInletandSystemOutletcomponents.Thesecanbe
usedtorepresentboththeairinletandoutletofamechanicalsystemandotherpaths,suchas
exfiltrationinthecaseofapressurizedbuilding.
Mostcomponentsplacedontheairsidenetworkmusthaveappropriatecontrollersattached
inordertofunction.Seecomponentsectionsfordetails.
The Check network button will identify most errors in the schematic. It also numbers the
nodes of the network, providing a reference to the nodes that is useful when viewing
simulation results. To remove the node numbering, if desired, simply reopen the same
ApacheHVACfile.
DetailsofallequipmenttobeincludedinthesimulationareenteredinApacheHVAC.Theextentofdata
inputdependsonthescopeofthesimulation,whichisatthediscretionoftheuser.Forinstanceifitis
requiredtocalculatethenetenergyconsumptionofanLTHWheatingcoil,itwillbenecessarytospecifya
coil and a heat source to serve it. However, it will not be necessary to input the characteristics of the
LTHW system. In such a case the distribution losses of the LTHW system and pump power should be
enteredaszeroandtheheatsourceefficiencytakenas100%.
Notethatthedutyofequipmentforsimulationpurposescanbesetasthecomponentsareplacedorcan
be provided by the autosizing process. It is necessary only to specify a duty that equals or exceeds any
requirementsubsequentlycalledfor.
1.4.3
Roomcomponents
68B
Thereareanumberofimportantpointstonotewithregardtothearrangementofroomcomponentsin
theairsystemandthespecificationofsupplyairflowrates:
VE6.3
ARoomintheVEisany3Dspacethatistobemodeledasadistinctthermalzone.Thiscan
be multiple rooms combined in ModelIt as a thermal zone, a single room, or a subdivided
potion of room volume, such as a perimeter zone in an openplan space or the occupied or
stratified zone within a space served by displacement ventilation. The ApacheHVAC Room
componentcanalsorefertoaspacethatwouldnotorcouldnotbeoccupied,butwhichplays
ApacheHVAC
14
a role in the dynamic thermal interaction with HVAC systems. Examples include a returnair
plenum,anunderfloorairdistribution(UFAD)plenum,asegmentwithinanearthtube,aspace
within a vented doubleskin faade, or even a concrete slab that will be directly heated or
cooledbyahydronicloop.
Itispermissibletousethesameroomcomponentmorethanonceintheairsystemnetwork
description,suchaswhenmorethanonesystemsuppliesairtothesameroom.Forexample,
consider a case where room type A has separate air supplies for heating and cooling; there
mayonlybeoneactualroomtypeA,butwecanusetwointhesystemnetworkdescription
oneintheheatingbranchandoneinthecoolingbranch.Theresultisexactlythesameasif
youhadmixedtheheatingandcoolingsupplybranchestogetherthroughacombiningjunction
andsuppliedthismixedairtoasingleroomtypeA.Theuseofmultipleroomcomponentsin
thiswayreducestheneedforlargenumbersofmixinganddividingjunctions.
Oncethesystemairhasenteredaroomcomponent,theprogramassumesthattheairwithin
the room (or bounded thermal zone assigned to a room component) is fully mixed. It is not
possibletodifferentiatebetween,say,airenteringfromaceilingdiffuserandairenteringfrom
aperimeterunitoraflooroutlet.Youcan,ifyouwish,describeasingleroomasseveralroom
typesforthepurposesofthecomputersimulatione.g.,thecoreandperimeterzonesofan
openplanofficecouldbedescribedasseparateroomtypes.However,youshouldappreciate
thatthereareanumberofcomplexmechanismsofheattransferinvolvedinsuchasituation
(wind, stack, and induced air movement, radiant heat exchange, etc.) and the program can
onlyapproximatelyanalyzesomeofthese.
Some situations are best modeled by putting two room components in series. For example,
youmaywishtomodelabuildinginwhichthereturnairisextractedviatheceilingvoid.This
canbeachievedbydescribingtheoccupiedspaceandtheceilingvoidastwoseparateroom
typesandthenconnectingtheminseries.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
15
HVACSystemComponents
1B
Figure21:HVACcomponentstoolbar
ApacheHVACallows18generictypesofHVACcomponentstobemodeled.
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Watersideplantequipmentandwaterloops
69B
Heatsources:hotwaterboilers,heatpumps,furnaces,electricresistanceheat,etc.
Chilledwaterloopswithanassociatechillerset,condenserloop,andcoolingtower
Chillers:electricwatercooled,aircooledtypes;othersimilarwatercoolingsources
Watersideeconomizers(asadedicatedunitoramodeforwatercooledchillersystems)
Watersourceheatpumpsfortheupgradeofheatrecoveredfromacondenserloop
Directexpansion(DX)cooling(1to1relationshipwithacoilontheairsidenetwork)
Unitarycoolingsystems(completeunitisrepresentedbyacoilontheairsidenetwork)
Airsideplantequipmentandsystemcomponents
70B
Airsourceheatpumpscoupledtoabackupheatsource
Spraychamberhumidifiers
Steaminjectionhumidifiers
Airtoairheat/energy/enthalpyrecoverydevices
Ductworkcomponentswiththermalpropertiesformodelingheatgainorloss
Fans
Dampersetsincludingmixingdampersandcontrolledflowsplitters
Heatingcoils
Coolingcoils(simpleandadvancedmodelsforchilledwater,DX,WSE,andUCSsources)
Roomcomponents(canbeassignedanygeometricspaceinthemodel)
RoomunitszoneequipmentincludedonlywithinRoomcomponents
71B
Directactingheater/coolers
Radiatorsandsimilarterminalheatingdevices
Chilledceilingpanels,chilledbeams,andsimilarterminalcoolingdevices
The first set of these are defined mainly in plant equipment dialogs. Components in the middle set are
dealtwithmainlyontheairsidenetwork.Thelastset,roomunits,differfromotherHVACcomponentsin
that they are defined in terms of types but then located within a room component or thermal zone
(including in nonoccupied space or a heated or cooled slab zone) rather than on the airside network.
EnergyusedbyroomunitsisalsoaccountedforandreportedseparatelyfromairsideHVACheatingand
coolingcomponents.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
16
Dataenteredforfansrepresentsaspecialcaseinthatfansarenotcontrolleddirectlyandfancomponent
inputsareusedonlytocalculateconsequentialenergyconsumptionandeffectonairtemperature.The
value entered in a fan component does not determine airflow through the system. Rather, the fan
componentactslikeameterwithadefinedsetofperformancecharacteristics.Theairflowthroughthe
fanisdeterminedbyflowcontrollersonnetworkbranches.
Themodelingofplantcomponentsisquasisteadystateinthattheprogramdoesnotattempttomodel
transient behavior between simulation time steps. However, because time steps in ApacheSim are
typicallyonly610minutes,andcanbeaslittleas1minute,ifdesired,constantplantbehavioroveratime
step is an appropriate assumption. Furthermore, there is interaction between the HVAC system and
conditionedspaces(includingnaturalventilation,whenrunningMacroFlo)ateverysimulationtimestep.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
17
2.2 HeatSources
15B
ApacheHVACofferstwotypesofheatsource:apartloadcurveheatingplantmodel,whichmaybeused
torepresentaboiler,aheatpump,furnace,orsomeothertypeofheatingplant,andahotwaterboiler
model.BothmodelsareaccessedthroughtheHeatsourcestoolbariconshownbelow.Theheatsources
list in Figure 22 shows the current model type as part load curve heating plant. You can choose the
desiredmodeltypetobeaddedthroughtheTypetoadddropdownselection.
Toolbariconforheatsourceslist.
Figure22:Heatsourceslistforselecting,adding,copying,andremovingbothpartloadcurveandhot
waterboilerheatingplantmodels.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
18
2.3 PartLoadHeatSource
16B
The input parameters for the part load curve heating plant model are introduced next in this section.
Informationaboutthehotwaterboilermodelisintroducedinsection2.2.
Thepartloadcurveheatingplantmodelcanprovideheattoanycomponentsthatpresentaheatingload.
These range from baseboard heaters to heating coils and including steam humidifiers and absorption
chillers(viathepartloadcurvechillerdialog).Thepartloadcurveheatingplantcanactasabackupforan
airsourceheatpumportomeetremainingloadaftertheheatavailablefromacombinedheat&power
systemorcondenserheatrecovery(fromthepartloadcurvechiller,electricaircooledchiller,orelectric
watercooledchiller)hasbeenconsumed.
Theheatingloadcollectivelypresentedbytheradiators,heatingcoils,etc.assignedtoaparticularheat
sourcearesummedateachtimesteptosettherequiredinstantaneousoutputfromtheheatingplant.An
allowanceismadeforanypipeworkdistributionlossesthatarenotaccruingtothebuildinginterior.Part
loadefficiencycharacteristicsdetermineenergyconsumptionoftheplantequipment.
The partload heating plant module can operate in conjunction with (as backup for) an airsource heat
pump. The heat pump mode is selected by placing a heat pump component on the schematic and
selectingaheatingsourcefromthelistintheheatpumpdialog.
Note: if the load on a heating source is greater than the maximum load specified in the heating plant
definition,itwillsupplytheadditionalenergybuttheefficiencywillremainatthevalueenteredforfull
load.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
19
2.3.1
Partloadheatsourcedefinition
72B
Figure23:Partloadheatingplanteditingdialogshowingillustrativeinputs
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
20
2.3.1.1
Heatingsourcereference
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.Thereferenceislimitedto100characters.Itisforyourusewhen
selecting, organizing, and referencing any component or controllers within other component and
controllerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowsertree.Thesereferencescanbevaluableinorganizingand
navigating the system and when the system model is later reused on another project or passed on to
another modeler. Reference names should thus be informative with respect to differentiating similar
equipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.3.1.2
Heatingsourcetype
ChoosefromBoiler,HeatpumporOtherheatingplant.Allthesetypesaremodeledinthesameway,
buttheirsimulationresultsappearunderdifferentvariablesinVista.
2.3.1.3
Fuel
Specifythefuelused.
2.3.1.4
DistributionLosses
Enter the losses due to heat distribution as a percentage of heating load. For example, if distribution
lossesareenteredas5%andtheheatsourceisconnectedto10radiatorspresentingatotalheatingload
of 20kW, the distribution loss of 0.05 20 kW (1kW) is added to radiator heat demand to give a fuel
consumptionof21kWtheheatingplantefficiencyatthatload.
Thelossesdonotaccruetozonesinthebuilding.
2.3.1.5
Oversizingfactor
FollowingASHRAELoadsautosizing,thefactorbywhichtheheatingplantsizeisincreasedrelativetothe
peakcalculatedvalue.
2.3.2
CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power
73B
2.3.2.1
BackupforCH(C)P?
Tickthisboxtoindicatethatloadsservedbythisheatsourcewillbemetfirstbyavailableheatfroma
combinedheat&power(CHP)orcombinedheat,cooling,andpower(CHCP)system,ifpresentonehas
beendefinedwithintheCHPsectionoftheRenewablesdialogintheApacheThermalview.
2.3.2.2
CH(C)Psequenceranking
CH(C)P sequence ranking determines the sequence in which heat sources are switched in to meet any
remainingloadaftertheavailableCH(C)Pcapacityhasbeenused.Heatsourceswithlowervaluesofthis
parameter will be switched in before those with higher values (the former will normally be the most
efficient heat sources). If two heat sources have the same sequence ranking they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforbothsystems.
2.3.3
Condenserheatrecovery
74B
CondenserheatrecoveryisincludedinbothPartloadcurveandElectricwatercooledchillermodels.The
current model makes a userspecified percentage of thermal energy rejected to the condenser loop
availabletoaHeatsourcecomponent.Thispercentagerepresentssimpleheatexchangereffectiveness.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
21
The available fraction of condenser heat is then assigned (within the chiller dialog) to a receiving heat
sourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheatfirstwhenaloadispresent.
Thetemperaturefortherecoveredcondenserheatcanbeupgradedwithanelectricwatertowaterheat
pump.ThiswouldbeusedinthecasesotherthanpreheatofDHW,suchasservingwhenspaceheating
loads that require higher temperatures than normally available via a heat exchanger on the condenser
waterloop.AfuelcodeassignmentandCOPareprovidedfortheheatpump.
2.3.3.1
Usewatersourceheatpump?
Ifthewaterloopservedbytheheatingplantreceivesheatrecoveredfromachillercondenser,thisheat
maybeupgradedusingawatersourceheatpump.Specifythismodeofoperationbytickingthebox.
2.3.3.2
HeatpumpCOP
EntertheCOPofthewatersourceheatpumpthatcouplesthecondenserloopwiththehotwaterloop.
2.3.3.3
Fuel
Thefuelusedbythewatersourceheatpump.
2.3.4
Pumppower
75B
Enterthecirculationpumpelectricalpower.Thepumpisassumedtooperatewheneverthereisaheating
loadtobemetonthisheatsourcecircuit,irrespectiveofthesourceoftheheat(i.e.boiler,heatpumpor
recovered heat from chillers). The pump power pump is modulated by the pump usage percentages
definedinthepartloadtable.
2.3.5
2.3.5.1
PartloadPerformance
76B
Load
Enteruptotenloadvaluestodefinethepartloadefficiencycharacteristic.
Important:Thepartloadvaluesmustbeenteredinincreasing(ascending)orderfromtoptobottom.If
enteredinthereverseorder,onlythefirstvaluewithbeused.
2.3.5.2
Efficiency
Enter an efficiency value for each partload value. Linear interpolation is applied between the defined
points.
2.3.5.3
Pumpusage
Enter a pump usage percentage for each partload value. Linear interpolation is applied between the
definedpoints.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
22
2.4 HotWaterBoilers
Thehotwaterboilermodelcanprovideheattoanycomponentsthatpresentaheatingload.Theserange
from baseboard heaters to heating coils and even absorption chillers (via the partload curve chiller
dialog).Thehotwaterboilercanactasabackupforanairsourceheatpumportomeetremainingload
aftertheheatavailablefromacombinedheat&powersystemorcondenserheatrecovery(fromthepart
loadcurvechillerorelectricwatercooledchiller)hasbeenconsumed.
Theheatingloadcollectivelypresentedbytheradiators,heatingcoils,etc.assignedtoaparticularheat
sourcearesummedateachtimesteptosettherequiredinstantaneousoutputfromtheheatingplant.An
allowanceismadeforanypipeworkdistributionlossesthatarenotaccruingtothebuildinginterior.Part
loadefficiencycharacteristicsdetermineenergyconsumptionoftheplantequipment.
The hot water boiler module can operate in conjunction with (as backup for) an airsource heat pump.
The heat pump mode is selected by placing a heat pump component on the schematic and selecting a
heatingsourcefromthelistintheheatpumpdialog.
Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedboilerperformancecharacteristicsatratedconditionsalongwith
the boiler efficiency curve to determine boiler performance at design and offrated conditions, as
specifiedandsimulated,respectively.
Thehotwaterloopconfigurationisassumedtobeaprimaryonlysystem,poweredbyahotwaterpump
that can be either a variablespeed pump with VSD or a constantspeed pump riding the pump curve.
When the hot water loop is only served by hot water boiler (i.e., without an airsource heat pump or
CH(C)Palsosupplyingheattothesamehotwaterloop),thepumpisassumedtooperateinlinewiththe
boiler,subjecttotheconstraintthatthepumpwillstartcyclingbelowtheminimumflowrateitpermits.
Whentheboilerissharingthehotwatercircuitloadwithotherheatsuppliers(airsourceheatpumpor
CH(C)P),thepumpoperationwillbeindependentoftheboileron/offcyclingstatus.
Thehotwatercircuitflowratevariesinproportiontothecircuitheatingload(presentedbytheheating
coils, hot water radiators, etc. that the circuit serves), subject to the minimum flow rate the pump
permits. The design hot water pump power is calculated as the specific pump power multiplied by the
designhotwatercircuitflowrate.Itisthenmodifiedbythepumppowercurvetogettheoperatingpump
power.
Transferofhotwaterpumpheatgaintotheloopismodeledaccordingtoauserinputfractionforpump
andmotorheatgaintowaterloop.
Note: If the load on a hot water boiler or other heating source is greater than the maximum capacity
specifiedintheheatingplantdefinition,theplantmodelwillsupplytheadditionalenergy;however,the
efficiencywillremainatthevalueenteredforfullload.
Note:Asteamhumidifiercannotbeservedbyahotwaterboiler,asthehotwaterboilermodelincludes
pumping power and return water temperature, and these parameters would not be appropriate for
steam delivery. Steam humidifiers must therefore use a heat source defined via the partload curve
model.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
23
2.4.1
Hotwaterboilerdefinition
77B
Figure24:Hotwaterboilereditingdialog
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
24

2.4.1.1
Reference
2.4.1.2
Fuel
Enterthefueltypeusedbythehotwaterboiler.
2.4.1.3
DistributionLosses
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
0.0to20.0
0.0to75.0
Enterthelossesduetoheatdistributionaroundthesystemasapercentageofboilerheatdemand.The
lossesdonotaccruetospaceswithinthebuilding.
2.4.2
CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power
78B
2.4.2.1
BackupforCH(C)P?
Tickthisboxtoindicatethatloadsservedbythisheatsourcewillbemetfirstbyavailableheatfroma
combinedheat&power(CHP)orcombinedheat,cooling,andpower(CHCP)system,ifpresentonehas
beendefinedwithintheCHPsectionoftheRenewablesdialogintheApacheThermalview.
2.4.2.2
CH(C)Psequenceranking
CH(C)P sequence ranking determines the sequence in which heat sources are switched in to meet any
remainingloadaftertheavailableCH(C)Pcapacityhasbeenused.Heatsourceswithlowervaluesofthis
parameter will be switched in before those with higher values (the former will normally be the most
efficient heat sources). If two heat sources have the same sequence ranking they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforbothsystems.
2.4.3
Condenserheatrecovery
79B
CondenserheatrecoveryisincludedinbothPartloadcurveandElectricwatercooledchillermodels.The
current model makes a userspecified percentage of thermal energy rejected to the condenser loop
availabletoaHeatsourcecomponent.Thispercentagerepresentssimpleheatexchangereffectiveness.
The available fraction of condenser heat is then assigned (within the chiller dialog) to a receiving heat
sourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheatfirstwhenaloadispresent.
Thetemperaturefortherecoveredcondenserheatcanbeupgradedwithanelectricwatertowaterheat
pump.ThiswouldbeusedinthecasesotherthanpreheatofDHW,suchasservingwhenspaceheating
loads that require higher temperatures than normally available via a heat exchanger on the condenser
waterloop.AfuelcodeassignmentandCOPareprovidedfortheheatpump.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
25
2.4.3.1
Usewatersourceheatpump?
Ifthewaterloopservedbytheheatingplantreceivesheatrecoveredfromachillercondenser,thisheat
maybeupgradedusingawatersourceheatpump.Specifythismodeofoperationbytickingthebox.
2.4.3.2
HeatpumpCOP
EntertheCOPofthewatersourceheatpumpthatcouplesthecondenserloopwiththehotwaterloop.
2.4.3.3
Fuel
Thefuelusedbythewatersourceheatpump.
2.4.4
2.4.4.1
BoilerPerformance
80B
BoilerModelDescription
Clickingthisbuttontopopupasummaryofthehotwaterboilermodelasshownbelow:
Figure25:Hotwaterboilermodeldescription
2.4.4.2
RatedConditionisDesignCondition
Whenthisboxisticked,thedesignconditiondata(seedetailsintheDesignconditionsubtab)isaread
onlycopyofthecurrentratedconditiondata(seedetailsintheRatedconditionsubtab),includingany
unsavededitsyouhavemade.
2.4.4.3
2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?
If this checkbox is ticked, two identical staged boilers will be used in the hot water loop to which this
boilerisassigned.Itisassumedthatthetwoidenticalboilersarearrangedinparallelandthatthedesign
temperatureriseacrosseachboileriskeptasTbdes.Thedesignwaterflowrateinthemainhotwater
loopisthustwiceofthatdesignflowthrougheachboiler.Thedesignhotwaterpumppowerisbasedon
thedesignflowrateinthemainhotwaterloop.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
26
If this checkbox is ticked, you can also specify whether or not the boilers will share load equally when
bothboilersareon(seebelow).
2.4.4.4
Boilersshareloadequallywhenbothareon?
Thischeckboxonlydisplayswhenthe2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?checkboxisticked.
Ifthischeckboxisticked,itisassumedthattheboilersshareloadequallywhenbothboilersareon.Inthis
case,youcanalsospecifythepercentageofcombinedcapacityatwhichthesecondboilerswitcheson
(seebelow).
If this checkbox is unticked, the two identical boilers are assumed to operate in strict staging, i.e., the
firstboilerwillbeloadedtoitsfullcapacity,thesecondboilerswitchesontotaketheremainingloadthe
firstboilercannotmeet.
2.4.4.5
Percentageofcombinedcapacityatwhichsecondboilerswitcheson
This textbox only displays when the 2 identical staged boilers operating in parallel? checkbox and the
Boilers share load equally when both are on? checkbox are both ticked. Usually this will be 50%
(default),whichmeansthesecondboilerswitchesonwhenthefirstboilercannotmeettheload.Ifthe
second boiler is designed to switch on before the first boiler is fully loaded, you can specify any
percentage value between 0% and 50%. For example, if this parameter is specified as 40%, then the
secondboilerwillswitchonwhenthefirstboileris80%loaded.Andwhenbothboilersareon,theywill
sharethelooploadequally.
2.4.4.6
BoilerEfficiencyCurve,fEpt(p,Tlbt)
Theboilerefficiencycurvecurrentlyselected.UsetheSelectbuttontoselecttheappropriatecurvefrom
thesystemdatabase.
Predefinedefficiencycurves
Noncondensingboiler
Condensingboiler
Circa1975hightempboiler
Circa1983midtempboiler
Newerlowtempboiler
Thefirst,second,andlastofthepredefinedefficiencycurvesabovearethemostlikelytobeapplicable
formodernhotwaterboilers.Keepinmindthatthesecurvesdescribetherelativeperformanceviathe
shapeofthecurve,whereastheuserinputforEfficiencyattheratedconditionshiftstheentirecurve
upordown.
UsetheEditbuttontoeditthecurveparametersifneeded.TheEditbuttonwillpopupadialogdisplaying
theformulaandparametersofthecurve,allowingthecurveparameterstobeedited.Youareallowedto
editthecurvecoefficients,inadditiontotheapplicablerangesofthecurveindependentvariables.When
editingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyouunderstandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusage
inthemodelalgorithm.
Alsobecarefulthattheeditedcurvehasreasonableapplicablerangesfortheindependentvariables.A
performancecurveisonlyvalidwithinitsapplicableranges.Inthecasetheindependentvariablesareout
oftheapplicablerangesyouset,thevariablelimits(maximumorminimum)youspecifiedintheinputwill
beapplied.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
27
Figure 26: Select dialog for the hot water boiler efficiency curve (part load and water temp
dependence)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
28

Figure 27: Edit dialog for the hot water boiler efficiency curve (part load and water temperature
dependence)
Theboilerefficiencycurve(partloadandwatertempdependence)fEpt(p,Tlbt)isabicubicfunctionof
p=partloadratio
tlbt=TlbtTdatum
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
29
Where
Tlbt=hotwatersupply(leavingboiler)temperature
Tdatum=datumtemperature(0Cor0F),introducedfortheconvenienceofunitsconversionofthe
curvecoefficients.
And:
2
fEpt(p,Tlbt)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C30p +C01tlbt+C02tlbt +C03tlbt

2
+C11ptlbt+C21p tlbt+C12ptlbt )/Cnorm

where
C00,C10,C20,C30,C01,C02,C03,C11,C21,andC12arethecurvecoefficients
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefEpt(1,Tlbtrat)=1
Tlbtrat=ratedhotwatersupply(leavingboiler)temperature.
The boiler efficiency curve is evaluated for each time step during the simulation. The curve value is
multipliedbytheratedefficiency(Erat)togettheoperatingefficiency(E)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthe
specificpartloadratiopandTlbttemperature:
E=EratfEpt(p,Tlbt)
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthepartloadratioequals1.0andtheTlbttemperatureisat
ratedcondition.
Anoteontheapplicablerangeofpartloadratiop:
The minimum p is used by the program as the minimum partload ratio for continuous operation,
underwhichtheboilerstartscyclingonandoff.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasign
ofboilerundersizing.
Also note that the bicubic form of the boiler efficiency curve can be used in simplified forms. For
example, to use it in a biquadratic form, simply specify C30, C03, C21, and C12 to be zero. To use it in a
quadraticlinearform,simplyspecifyC30,C03,C02,andC12tobezero.
2.4.4.7
ParasiticPower,Wp
Thisistheboilerparasiticpoweratfullload.Itisautomaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovided
parasiticElectricInputRatioandtheboilerdesignheatingcapacity,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
30
Theparasiticpowerrepresentstheparasiticelectricpowerconsumedbyforceddraftfans,fuelpumps,
stokers,orotherelectricaldevicesassociatedwiththeboiler.Foranaturaldraftgasfiredboiler,Wpmay
be zero or close to zero. This parasitic power is consumed whenever the boiler is operating, and the
modelassumesthatthisparasiticpowerdoesnotcontributetoheatingthewater.
ParasiticElectricInputRatio,Wp/Qdes
2.4.4.8
Enter the ratio between the boiler design parasitic power consumption and the boiler design heating
capacity.Thisisusedtoderivetheboilerdesignparasiticpowerconsumptionbytheprogram.
2.4.5
RatedCondition
81B
Rated condition and Design condition are provided for your flexibility in specifying hot water boiler
data.
Theratedconditionisthebasisforthecalculationofboilercharacteristicsatsimulationtime.Therated
condition is usually the condition at which the boiler characteristics are specified by a manufacturer.
However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition,inwhichcasetheuserselectsRated=Design.
Thedesignconditionistheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakboilerload(butwillbeentered
manuallyinthefirstphase).
A user wishing to use catalogue boiler data enters a capacity and efficiency at the rated condition and
readsoffthederivedcapacityandefficiencyatthedesigncondition.(Notethemodeltreatsthecapacity
as a constant, so the design capacity will always equal the rated capacity. Design efficiency may be
differentfromratedefficiencyiftheuserspecifiesadesignhotwatersupplytemperaturethatisdifferent
fromtheratedhotwatersupplytemperature.)
A user wishing to size a boiler based on a design load enters a capacity and efficiency at the rated
condition, and then adjusts the efficiency to produce the desired derived efficiency at the design
condition(allowingforamarginofoversizing).(Designcapacitywillalwaysequaltheratedcapacity.)
IftheratedconditionanddesignconditionareoneandthesametheuserticksRatedconditionisdesign
condition,whichmakesthedesignconditionadynamiccopyoftheratedcondition.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
31

Figure28:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingratedconditionsubtab
2.4.5.1
HotWaterSupplyTemperature,Tlbtrat
Entertheratedhotwatersupplytemperature(leavingboilerwatertemperature).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
32
2.4.5.2
HotWaterFlowRate,Vbrat,Vbrat/Qrat,Tbrat
Entertheratedhotwaterflowrate.Vbrat,Vbrat/Qrat,and Tbratarethreedifferentoptionsforspecifying
ratedhotwaterflowrate.CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofTbrat(thedifferencebetweentheratedhot
water supply and return temperatures). The other two options (Vbrat and the ratio between rated hot
waterflowrate(Vbrat)andratedheatingcapacity(Qrat))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambased
onthespecifiedTbratandcannotbeedited.
2.4.5.3
HeatingCapacity,Qrat
Entertheratedheatingcapacity.
2.4.5.4
Boilerefficiency,Erat
Enter the rated Boiler efficiency. The boiler efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) is the efficiency
relativetothehigherheatingvalue(HHV)offuelatapartloadratioof1.0andtheratedhotwatersupply
temperature (leaving boiler). Manufacturers typically specify the efficiency of a boiler using the higher
heatingvalueofthefuel.Fortherarecasewhenamanufacturers(orparticulardataset)boilerefficiency
is based on the lower heating value (LHV) of the fuel, multiply the thermal efficiency by the lowerto
higher heating value ratio. For example, assume a fuels lower and higher heating values are
approximately 45,450 and 50,000 kJ/kg, respectively. For a manufacturers thermal efficiency rating of
0.90 (based on the LHV), the nominal thermal efficiency entered here is 0.82 (i.e. 0.9 multiplied by
45,450/50,000).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
33
2.4.6
DesignCondition
82B
Figure29:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingdesignconditionsubtab
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
34
ThedesignconditiondataintheDesignConditionsubtab(asdescribedbelow)willbeareadonly(un
editable)copyofthecurrentratedconditiondatawhentheRatedconditionisDesignconditionboxis
ticked,includinganyunsavededitsyouhavemadeintheRatedConditionsubtab.
HotWaterSupplyTemperature,Tlbtdes
2.4.6.1
Enterthedesignhotwatersupplytemperature(leavingboilerwatertemperature).
2.4.6.2
HotWaterFlowRate,Vbdes,Vbdes/Qdes,Tbdes
Enter the design hot water flow rate. Vbdes, Vbdes/Qdes, and Tbdes are three different options for
specifyingdesignhotwaterflowrate.CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofTbdes(thedifferencebetween
thedesignhotwatersupplyandreturntemperatures).Theothertwooptions(VbdesandVbdes/Qdes(the
ratio between design hot water flow rate (Vbdes) and design heating capacity (Qdes).) are automatically
derivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecifiedTbdesandcannotbeedited.
Note:IfthereisanairsourceheatpumporCH(C)Pplantattachedtotheboilerloop,youshouldcalculate
whatproportionofthetotalloadtheboilertakesatthepeakcondition(whichishardforthesoftwareto
determine automatically) and reduce Tbdes by this factor. (In general, Tbdes is the temperature rise
acrosstheboiler,notthewaterloop.)
HeatingCapacity,Qdes
2.4.6.3
Thedesignheatingcapacityisalwaysacopyofheatingcapacityatratedconditionanddoesnotneedto
beedited.
2.4.6.4
Boilerefficiency,Edes
The boiler design efficiency is automatically derived by the program using other design and rated
conditiondataprovidedanddoesnotneedtobeedited.
2.4.7
2.4.7.1
OperatingParameters
83B
HotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPointType
Threeoptionsareavailableforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype:Constant,Timed,orReset.
2.4.7.2
ConstantHotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPoint
WhenConstantisselectedforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype,thisfieldisautomaticallyset
bytheprogramasthehotwatersupplytemperatureatdesigncondition,whichhasbeenenteredinthe
Designconditionsubtab.
2.4.7.3
TimedHotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPointProfile
WhenTimedisselectedforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype,selecttheabsoluteprofiletobe
appliedtothehotwatersupplytemperaturesetpoint,whicharedefinedthroughtheAPProfacility(the
ProfilesDatabase).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
35

Figure210:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingoperatingparameterssubtab
2.4.7.4
HotWaterSupplyTemperatureResetType
When Reset is selected for hot water supply temperature set point type, select the hot water supply
temperatureresettype.Currentlyonlyoneoptionisprovided: Outdoorairtemperaturereset.When
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
36
Outdoorairtemperatureresettypeisselected,whichisthedefault,youalsoneedtospecifythreemore
resetparameters:
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimit
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimit
Hotwatersupplytemperatureatorabovehighlimit
The fourth parameter (Hot water supply temperature at or below low limit) required by Outdoor air
temperature reset type is automatically set by the program as the hot water supply temperature at
designcondition.
2.4.7.5
OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureLowLimit
WhenhotwatersupplytemperatureresettypeisselectedasOutdoorairtemperaturereset,enterthe
outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.4.7.6
HotWaterSupplyTemperatureatorbelowLowLimit
When hot water supply temperature reset type is selected as Outdoor air temperature reset, this
parameterisautomaticallysetbytheprogramasthehotwatersupplytemperatureatdesigncondition
anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.4.7.7
OutdoorDryBulbTemperatureHighLimit
outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.4.7.8
HotWaterSupplyTemperatureatoraboveHighLimit
hotwatersupplytemperatureatorabovetheoutdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythe
reset.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
37
2.4.8
Pumps
84B
Figure211:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowinghotwaterpumpstab
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
38
2.4.8.1
HotWaterPumpSpecificPower
Enter the hot water pump specific power, expressed in W/(l/s) in SI units (or W/gpm in IP units). The
defaultvalue(19W/gpm)isbasedonthedesignhotwaterpumpspecificpowerasspecifiedinASHRAE
90.1G3.1.3.5.
Hotwaterpumppowerwillbecalculatedonthebasisofvariableflow,withhotwatercircuitflowrate
varyinginproportiontothecircuitheatingload(assignedbytheheatingcoils,hotwaterradiators,etc.).
The design hot water circuit flow rate is calculated using the boiler design heating capacity (Qdes), the
boilerdesignhotwatertemperaturechange, Tbdesandtheinformationonboilerconfiguration(whether
2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?isselected).
Thedesignhotwaterpumppoweriscalculatedasthespecificpumppowermultipliedbythedesignhot
watercircuitflowrate.Itisthenmodifiedbythepumppowercurvetogettheoperatingpumppower.
2.4.9
Pumpheatgaintohotwaterloop(fraction)
85B
Enterthehotwaterpumpmotorefficiencyfactor,whichisthefractionofthemotorpowerthatendsup
in the hot water. Its value is multiplied by the hot water pump power to get the hot water pump heat
gain,whichisdeductedfromtheheatingloadoftheboiler.
2.4.9.1
HotWaterPumpPerformanceCurve,fPv(v)
The hot water pump power curve currently selected. Use the Select button to select the appropriate
curve from the system database. Use the Edit button to edit the curve parameters if you like. The Edit
button will pop up a dialog displaying the formula and parameters of the curve, allowing the curve
parameters to be edited. You are allowed to edit the curve coefficients, in addition to the applicable
rangesofthecurveindependentvariables.Wheneditingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyou
understandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusageinthemodelalgorithm.
beapplied.
ThehotwaterpumppowercurvefPv(v)isacubicfunctionof
v=V/Ve
where
V=pumpvolumetricflowrate.
Ve=designpumpvolumetricflowrate.
And:
2
fPv(v)=(C0+C1v+C2v +C3v )/Cnorm

where
C0,C1,C2andC3arethecurvecoefficients
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
39
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefPv(1)=1
Thehotwaterpumppowercurveisevaluatedforeachtimestepduringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueis
multiplied by the design hot water pump power to get the operating pump power of the current time
step,forthecurrentfractionofpumpvolumetricflowrate.
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthepumpvolumetricflowrateequalsdesignpumpvolumetric
flowrate(v=1.0).
Figure212:Selectdialogforthehotwaterpumppowercurve
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
40
Figure213:Editdialogforthehotwaterpumppowercurve
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
41
2.5 Airsourceheatpump
Theairsourceheatpump(ASHP)canbetheprimaryheatsourceforanyheatingcoilorradiator.
The AHSP component is placed on the airside network. As its capacity will vary with the source
temperature,abackupheatsourcemustfirstbedefined(see Figure22)andthenassignedwithin the
ASHPdialog.WhileavailableASHPcapacitywillbeusedfirst,coilsandradiatorsareassignedtothehot
waterboilersorpartloadcurveheatsourcethathasbeensetasthebackup.
209H
Toolbariconforplacementofaheatpump.
Heatpumpcomponent.
Theheatpumpshouldbeplacedattheappropriatelocationinthenetwork(typicallythefreshairinlet)to
determinethetemperatureoftheheatsource.Notethattheairsourceheatpumpdoesnotinfluencethe
temperatureofairatthenodetowhichitisconnectedi.e.,aninfinitesourceofvaryingtemperature,
such as the outdoor environment, is assumed. The source temperature determines the variation of the
COPandthemaximumoutputofthedeviceatanygivensimulationtimestep.
Figure214:AirsourceheatpumpdialogwithillustrativeinputsprovidedbydefaultfortheASHPinthe
predefinedpackagedsinglezoneheatpump(04PSZHP)system.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
42
Figure215:AirsourceheatpumpperformanceassociatedwithillustrativeinputsinFig.214
Figure216:GraphicrepresentationoftheillustrativeinputsinFig.214
Figures214,15,and16aboveshowillustrativeinputsfortheASHPdialogandtherelationshipbetween
theseandtheToincludeboththechangeinperformancewithoutdoortemperatureandthereducedCOP
atpartload,simulationresultswereusedtodeterminethattheloadplacedupontheASHPaftersizing
wouldbe100%at32F,withsupplementalheatfromthebackupheatsourceincreasinglyrequiredbelow
thattemperatureand,above32F,heatingloadgraduallydiminishingto40%atanoutdoortemperature
of62F.ThisinformationwasusedtodeterminethepartloadCOPcurve(dashedline)inFigure215.To
facilitateinsertionoftheautosizedcapacity(baseduponthewinterheatingdesigndayconditionsforthe
project location) in the row associated with the ARI testing condition (47 F) used to determine the
equipmentcapacityandCOP,thecurvesareintentionallytruncatedtoendat47F.
TheinputsintheASHPdialogcouldbeextendedtowarmertemperaturesifneeded.Becausethedialog
accepts just 10 rows of data, the spacing between data points would need to be somehow altered to
accommodatethis.Becausethemodeluseslinearinterpolation between thedata points provided,and
theCOPandcapacitycurvesarebothrelativelyflatbetweenabout17and32F,thiswouldbethebest
regionofthecurvetoberepresentedbyareduceddensityofdatapoints.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
43
2.5.1
Heatpumpsettings
86B
2.5.1.1
Reference
2.5.1.2
Backupheatsource
Abackupheatsourcemustfirstbedefined(see Figure22)andthenassignedhere.Itisgoodpracticeto
includeaheatpumpdesignation,suchasASHP01+HWboilerbackupinthenameofthebackupheat
source, as this is what you will select in the heating coil or radiator dialog in order to connect to a
particularASHP.Notethatthroughversion6.3,theASHPcapacitywillbeusedfirst,andonlythenwillthe
remainingloadbemetbyanyrecoveredcondenserheatfromachillerorCHPresourceassociatedwith
the backup heat source (this may change in version 6.4 in order to support modeling of VRV system s
whereinthecoolingandheatingfunctionsinmultiplezonesshareacommoncondenserloop).
210H
2.5.1.3
MinimumSourceTemperature
Theheatpumpisassumedtoswitchoffcompletelywhenthesourcetemperaturedropsbelowthisvalue.
Abovethisvalue,theheatpumpisassumedtomeetasmuchoftheloadasitcan,withtheheatsource
beingbroughtintotopupthisdemandifrequired.
2.5.2
2.5.2.1
Heatpumpperformance
87B
SourceTemperature
This line of information describes the variation in the performance of the heat pump as the source
temperaturevaries.Enterthesourcetemperature.Uptotenpointsmaybeusedtodefinethevariation
ofperformancewithsourcetemperature.Enterthepointsinascendingorderofsourcetemperature.
2.5.2.2
HeatPumpCOP
Enter the coefficient of performance of the heat pump at the corresponding source temperature. This
value is the useful heat output divided by the total fuel energy consumption associated with the
operationofthisdevice(excludingelectricalconsumptionofanydistributionpumpsincludedinheating
plantcomponents).
2.5.2.3
Output
Enterthemaximumheatpumpoutputatthecorrespondingsourcetemperature.Ifthedemandforheat
outputexceedsthisvaluethentheheatsourceisusedtomakeuptheextrademand.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
44
2.6 ChilledWaterLoops,HeatRejection,andChillerSequencing
17B
Thechilledwaterlooptoolprovidesaccesstoselection,editing, andaddingorremovingnamedchilled
waterloops.Eachindividualchilledwaterloopdialogthenprovidesinputsfortofollowing:
primaryandsecondarychilledwaterloopsandoptiontousejustoneofthese
chillers and other similar cooling sources (adding, sequencing, and editing of cooling
equipmentontheprimarychilledwaterloop)
heatrejection loop (for watercooled chillers) with cooling tower and options for waterside
economizerandcondenserheatrecovery
Achilledwaterloopisassociatedwithachillersetcomprisinganynumberofchillers,whichcaninclude
anycombinationofthreedifferenttypes:
electricwatercooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
electricaircooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
partloadcurvechiller(flexiblegenericinputs;canrepresentanydeviceusedtocoolwatervia
amatrixofloaddependentdataforCOPandassociatedusageofpumps,heatrejectionfans,
etc.,withtheoptionofaddingCOPvaluesforuptofouroutdoorDBTorWBTconditions)
Eachchillerorsimilarpieceofwatercoolingequipmentisdefinedinthecontextofachilledwaterloop.
Thusnochillerispermittedtoservemorethanoneprimarychilledwaterloop.Chillerscanbeduplicated
usingtheCopybuttonwithinachillersetandanImportfacilityisprovidedforcopyingadefinedchiller
fromonechilledwaterlooptoanother.
An optional condenser water loop is associated with each primary chilled water loop. This includes a
cooling tower model and is required only when the chiller set includes an electric watercooled chiller.
Aircooledchillersuseonlythedesigntemperatures(DBTandWBT)forheatrejection.Heatrejectionfor
the generic partloadcurve chiller type is described by the user via any combination of COP values,
pumppower,andfanpower(alloranyofwhichcanbeincludedinacompositeCOP)inthedialogforthat
typeofequipment.
Coolingcoilsandchilledceilingsareassignedachilledwaterloopratherthanachiller.Whilethestandard
configuration uses a primaryplussecondary loop configuration, the primary loop can be eliminated by
zeroingoutitspumppowersuchthatthesystemismodeledasaprimaryonlyconfigurationusingthe
secondaryloop.
During simulation, chillers within a chiller set are switched in according to a userspecified sequence.
During autosizing, sequenced chillers and the associated heat rejection plant and water flow rates are
sized on the basis of userspecified percentages of the peak design load. When electricwatercooled
chillers are included, and thus there is an associated cooling tower, the chiller set may operate in
watersideeconomizermode.
Thechilledwaterloopcomponentisaccessedthroughthetoolbariconshownbelow.
ToolbariconforChilledwaterloops.
ClickingthistoolbariconopensuptheChilledwaterloopsdialog(showninFigure217),whichmanages
asetofchilledwaterloops.Achilledwaterloopmaybeadded,edited,removedorcopiedthroughthe
correspondingbuttonsinthisdialog.Doubleclickingonanexistingchilledwaterloop(orclickingtheEdit
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
45
buttonafterselectionofanexistingchilledwaterloop)opensuptheChilledwaterloopdialog(shownin
Figure218),wherechilledwaterloopparametersmaybeedited.
TheChilledwaterloopdialogcurrentlyhasthreetabs:
Chilledwaterlooptab:Thistabmanagesthepropertiesofthechilledwaterloop.
Heat rejection tab: This tab manages information used for heat rejection. An optional
condenser water loop for use by electric watercooled chillers and (optionally) a waterside
economizercanbedefinedinthistab.
Chillersettab:Thistabmanagesalistofchillers(achillerset),whichmaybeeditedwithchiller
dialogs(seesection2.5,2.6and2.7).Chillersequencingranksundervariablepartloadranges
arealsodefinedinthistab,togetherwithchillerautosizingcapacityweightings.
Currentlyifacondenserwaterloophasbeendefinedforachilledwaterloop,atleastoneelectricwater
cooled chiller must also be defined for the same chilled water loop. Electric watercooled chillers
belongingtothesamechillersetshareacommoncondenserwaterloopandcoolingtower.Thecooling
towermodelusedisthesameasthatusedfortheWaterSideEconomizermodel,whichisbasedonthe
Merkeltheory.
Forthecondenserwaterloop,acondenserwaterpumpisassumedtobeonthesupplysideofthecooling
tower.
Whencondenserwaterflowrateisdifferentfromtheratedcondenserwaterflowrate,anadjustmentis
made to the entering condenser water temperature used by the program to solve for the chiller
performanceintheiterationprocess.Theadjustmentismadebasedonthefollowingprinciple:
Settheeffectiveenteringcondenserwatertemperaturetothevaluewhich,forthegivenrate
ofheatrejection,wouldproducethesamecondenserwaterleavingtemperatureasachiller
operatingwiththeratedcondenserwaterflowrate.
Thechilledwaterloopconfigurationisassumedtobeaprimary/secondarysystem,servedbyaprimary
circuitchilledwaterpumpandasecondarycircuitchilledwaterpump.
Bothcondenserwaterpumpandprimarycircuitchilledwaterpumpareassumedtooperateinlinewith
thechiller.Thecondenserwaterflowrateandprimarycircuitchilledwaterflowrateareassumedtobe
constant(atthedesignvalues)whenthechillerison.Theyaremultipliedbythecorrespondingspecific
pump power to get the condenser water pump power and the primary chilled water pump power
respectively.
The secondary circuit chilled water pump is assumed to operate in line with the chiller, subject to the
constraintthatthepumpwillstartcyclingbelowtheminimumflowrateitpermits.Requiredchilledwater
flowratesforsimplecoolingcoilsandchilledceilingsvaryinproportiontotheircoolingloads.Required
chilledwaterflowrateforadvancedcoolingcoilsaredeterminedbythedetailedheattransfercalculation
of the advanced cooling coil model. Required chilled water flow rates from all cooling coils and chilled
ceilings served by a chilled water loop are summed to get the required secondary circuit chilled water
flowrate,subjecttotheminimumpumpflowratethepumppermits.Thedesignsecondarychilledwater
pump power is calculated as the secondary specific pump power multiplied by the design secondary
chilledwaterflowrate(assumedequaltodesignprimarychilledwaterflowrate).Itisthenmodifiedby
thesecondarycircuitpumppowercurvetogettheoperatingsecondarypumppower.
Distributionlossesfromthepipeworkareconsideredasauserspecifiedpercentageofthechilledwater
loopload.Inaddition,chilledwaterandcondenserwaterpumpheatgainsaremodeledbypumpmotor
efficiencyfactors.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
46
Condenser heat recovery is included in the current model as a simple userspecified percentage of the
thermalenergyrejectedtothecondenserloop.Thispercentagerepresentsheatexchangereffectiveness.
Theavailablecondenserheatisthenassignedtoareceivingheatsourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheat
first when a load is present. The user has the options to upgrade the hotwater temperature for the
recoveredheatonthereceiving(HWloop)endwithanelectricwatertowaterheatpumpforusewith
typicalspaceheatingloads.
Figure217:Chilledwaterloopsdialog(shownwithdefaultandillustrativeloopsincludedwiththepre
definedsystemsinVE6.3)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
47
Tlct
Secondary pump
PLC 2
Tldb
gl
EWC 2
T2
Towb
Tect
EAC 1
Condenser
water pump
EAC 2
Condenser water loop

Key:
Primary pump
Advanced coil
EWC 1
Simple coil
Cooling
tower
Ve
Vc
Chilled ceiling
L T1
Tlet
PLC 1
Tedb
ge
Chillers
water
Chilled water loop
air
Figure 218: Chilled water loop configuration drawn with a chiller set that includes all three types of
chiller models (partloadcurve; electric watercooled; electric aircooled): only the electric water
cooledtypeiscoupletothecondenserwaterloopandcoolingtowermodel.See2.4.11PrimaryCircuit
ChilledWaterSpecificPumpPowerformodelingsystemshavingonlyaprimarychilledwaterloopno
secondaryloop.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
48
2.6.1
Chilledwaterloopdefinition
88B
Figure219:Chilledwaterloopeditingdialog(shownwiththeChilledwaterlooptabactive)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
49
Figure220:ChilledwaterlooptabintheChilledwaterloopdialog(shownwithinputsforanillustrative
loopconfigurationasincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3)
2.6.1.1
ReferencenameforChilledWaterLoop
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.Itisforyourusewhenselecting,organizing,andreferencingany
componentorcontrollerswithinothercomponentandcontrollerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowser
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
50
tree. These references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system
modelislaterreusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.Referencenamesshouldthus
beinformativewithrespecttodifferentiatingsimilarequipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.6.2
ChilledWaterLooptab
89B
The Chiller water loop tab facilitates the definition of the chilled water temperatures and chilled water
pumps,togetherwiththedistributionlossesandoversizingfactorforthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.2.1
DistributionLosses
Enter the chilled water loop distribution lossesi.e., the loss due to distribution of cooling from the
coolingplantequipmenttopointofuseasapercentageofcoolingdemand.Thelossenteredhereisnot
recoupedinthebuilding.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
2.6.2.2
0.0to20.0
0.0to75.0
OversizingFactor
Thisistheoversizingfactorthatwillbeusedintheautosizingofthiscomponent.Duringautosizingthe
capacitywillbesettothepeakloadmultipliedbytheoversizingfactor.
2.6.2.3
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureResetType
Selectthechilledwatersupplytemperatureresettype.Currentlytwooptionsareprovided:Noresetor
Outdoor air temperature reset. When Outdoor air temperature reset type is selected, which is the
default,youalsoneedtospecifyfourmoreresetparameters:
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimit
Chilledwatersupplytemperatureatorbelowlowlimit
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimit
Chilledwatersupplytemperatureatorabovehighlimit
WhenNoresetisselected,youneedonlyspecifytheconstantdesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.
2.6.2.4
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature
Enterthedesignchilledwatersupplytemperature(leavingevaporatorwatertemperature)ifthechilled
water supply temperature reset type is selected as No reset. When Chilled water supply temperature
resettypeisselectedasOutdoorairtemperaturereset,thisfieldbecomesinactive.
2.6.2.5
OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureLowLimit
WhenchilledwatersupplytemperatureresettypeisselectedasOutdoorairtemperaturereset,enterthe
outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.6.2.6
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureatorbelowLowLimit
chilledwatersupplytemperaturetobeusedbytheresetatorbelowtheoutdoordrybulbtemperature
lowlimit.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
51
2.6.2.7
OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureHighLimit
outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.6.2.8
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureatoraboveHighLimit
chilledwatersupplytemperaturetobeusedbytheresetatorabovetheoutdoordrybulbtemperature
highlimit.
2.6.2.9
DesignChilledWaterLoopTemperatureDifference(Tedes)
Enter the design chilled water loop temperature difference (Tedes)i.e., the difference between the
designchilledwatersupplyandreturntemperatures.
2.6.2.10 PrimaryCircuitChilledWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Entertheprimarycircuitchilledwaterspecificpumppoweratratedspeed,expressedinW/(l/s)inSIunits
(orW/gpminIPunits).
Primarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowerwillbecalculatedonthebasisofconstantflow(whenthechiller
operates). The model will be based on a specific pump power parameter, with a default value of 4.4
W/gpm. The default value is based on the total chilled water specific pump power (22 W/gpm) as
specified in ASHRAE 90.1 G3.1.3.10 and assuming a 20:80 split between the primary and secondary
circuits.
Theprimarycircuitchilledwaterloopflowratewillbecalculatedfromthedesigncoolingcapacity(Qdes)
andthedesignchilledwatertemperaturechange(Tedes)ofthechilledwaterloop.
Primaryonly vs. Primary + Secondary loop configurations: To model a primaryonly configuration with
VSDpump,ratherthanthepresetprimary+secondarychilledwaterloopconfiguration(forversion6.3
through6.4),firstsettheprimaryspecificpumppowertozero.SelecttheVSDcurveforthesecondary
pumpandsetthespecificpumppowerforthesecondaryloopasappropriatefortheprimarylooppump.
Thissimplyremovestheprimarypumpfromthesystemandallowsthesecondarypumptoserveasthe
primarypumpwithVSDintheactualsystem.If,ontheotherhand,youweretoincludeaspecificpower
input for the primary pump and set the secondary pump specific power to zero, there would be no
opportunity to use the VSD, as the primary pump is assumed (for version 6.3 through 6.4) to run at
constantspeedwheneverthechilleroperates.
2.6.2.11 PrimaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Entertheprimarycircuitchilledwaterpumpheatgaintochilledwaterloop,whichisthefractionofthe
motorpowerthatendsupintheChilledwater.Itsvalueismultipliedbytheprimarycircuitchilledwater
pumppowertogettheprimarycircuitchilledwaterpumpheatgain,whichisaddedtothecoolingloadof
thechilledwaterloop.
2.6.2.12 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Enterthesecondarycircuitchilledwaterspecificpumppoweratratedspeed,expressedinW/(l/s)inSI
units(orW/gpminIPunits).Thedefaultvalue(17.6W/gpm)isbasedonthetotalchilledwaterspecific
pumppower(22W/gpm)asspecifiedinASHRAE90.1G3.1.3.10andassuminga20:80splitbetweenthe
primaryandsecondarycircuits.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
52
Secondary circuit chilled water pump power will be calculated on the basis of variable flow. Required
chilled water flow rates for simple cooling coils and chilled ceilings vary in proportion to their cooling
loads, assuming a constant operating deltaT (through the cooling coils and chilled ceilings). Required
chilledwaterflowrateforadvancedcoolingcoilsaredeterminedbythedetailedheattransfercalculation
of the advanced cooling coil model. Required chilled water flow rates from all cooling coils and chilled
ceilings served by a chilled water loop are summed to get the required secondary circuit chilled water
flowrate,subjecttotheminimumpumpflowratethepumppermits.
Thedesignsecondarycircuitchilledwaterloopflowrateisassumedequaltothedesignprimarycircuit
chilled water loop flow rate, which is calculated from the design cooling capacity (Qdes) and the design
chilledwatertemperaturechangeTedes.
The design secondary chilled water pump power is calculated as the secondary specific pump power
multiplied by the design secondary chilled water flow rate. It is then modified by the secondary circuit
pumppowercurvetogettheoperatingsecondarypumppower.
2.6.2.13 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Enterthesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumpheatgaintochilledwaterloop,whichisthefractionofthe
motor power that ends up in the Chilled water. Its value is multiplied by the secondary circuit chilled
water pump power to get the secondary circuit chilled water pump heat gain, which is added to the
coolingloadofthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.2.14 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpPowerCurve,fPv(v)
Thesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurvecurrentlyselected.UsetheSelectbuttontoselect
theappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.UsetheEditbuttontoeditthecurveparametersifyou
like.TheEditbuttonwillpopupadialogdisplayingtheformulaandparametersofthecurve,allowingthe
curveparameterstobeedited.Youareallowedtoeditthecurvecoefficients,inadditiontotheapplicable
rangesofthecurveindependentvariables.Wheneditingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyou
understandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusageinthemodelalgorithm.
beapplied.
ThesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurvefPv(v)isacubicfunctionof
v=V/Ve
where
V=pumpvolumetricflowrate.
Ve=designpumpvolumetricflowrate.
And:
2
fPv(v)=(C0+C1v+C2v +C3v )/Cnorm
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
53
where
C0,C1,C2andC3arethecurvecoefficients
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefPv(1)=1
Thesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurveisevaluatedforeachiterationofthechilledwater
loop, for each time step during the simulation. The curve value is multiplied by the design secondary
chilledwaterpumppowertogettheoperatingsecondarypumppowerofthecurrenttimestep,forthe
currentfractionofpumpvolumetricflowrate.Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whentheoperating
pumpvolumetricflowrateequalsratedpumpvolumetricflowrate(v=1.0).
Figure221:Editdialogforthesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurve(valuesforconstant
speedpumpareshown)
2.6.3
HeatRejectiontab
90B
The Heat rejection tab (Figure 222 above) facilitates the definition of the design outdoor drybulb and
wetbulbtemperaturesfortheheatrejectionandforsettingtheparametersofacondenserwaterloop.
The design conditions for heat rejection are used for all electric aircooled and watercooled chiller
modelsandassociatedcoolingtowers.Thecondenserwaterloopinthistabfunctionsforallwatercooled
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
54
chillersintheattachedchillersetandincludescondenserwatertemperatures,coolingtower,condenser
waterpump,condenserhearrecovery,andwatersideeconomizer.Thecondenserwaterloopisrequired
whenanelectricwatercooledchillermodelisincludedinthechillerset.
Figure 222: Heat rejection tab on Chilled water loop dialog (shown with inputs for an illustrative loop
configurationasincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
55
2.6.3.1
DesignOutdoorDrybulbTemperature
Enterthedesignoutdoordrybulbtemperature.
Thisparameterisautosizable.Whenthisparameterisautosized,itsvalueinthefieldanditsautosizing
labelAbecomered.
2.6.3.2
DesignOutdoorWetbulbTemperature
Enter the design outdoor wetbulb temperature for the cooling tower. This parameter is autosizable.
Whenthisparameterisautosized,itsvalueinthefieldanditsautosizinglabelAbecomered.
2.6.3.3
UseCondenserWaterLoop(Watercooled)?
Whenthischeckboxisnotticked,whichisthedefault,allparametersregardingthecondenserwaterloop
areinactive.Whenthischeckboxisticked,allparametersregardingthecondenserwaterloopbecomes
active.Currently,ifthisboxisticked,theremustbeatleastoneElectricWatercooled(EW)chillerdefined
forthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.3.4
DesignCondenserEnteringWaterTemperature,Tectdes
Enterthedesigncondenserenteringwatertemperature.
2.6.3.5
DesignCondenserWaterTemperatureDifferenceTcdes
Enter the design condenser water temperature difference Tcdes (the difference between the design
condenserwaterleavingandenteringtemperatures).
2.6.3.6
EnteringCondenserWaterTemperatureSetPoint
Entering condenser water temperature set point could either be set up as a constant or an absolute
profile.Notethatusingafixedenteringcondenserwatertemperaturesetpointmeansthecoolingtower
serving the condenser is controlled by the traditional way of trying to maintain a constant condenser
watersupplytemperature.Thetimedprofileoptionallowstheflexibilityofusingothercontrolstrategies
forthecoolingtower.Youmaywanttoexperimentwithacontrolstrategythat,forexample,maintainsa
constanttemperaturedifferencebetweenthecondenserwatersupplytemperatureandtheambientwet
bulbtemperature(constantapproach).
2.6.3.7
CoolingTowerDesignApproach
This is the difference between the cooling tower leaving water temperature (T2) and the outdoor wet
bulb temperature (towb) at the design condition. The design approach of the cooling tower is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovidedchilledwaterloopdesigndataandcondenser
waterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.8
CoolingTowerDesignRange
Thisisthedifferencebetweenthecoolingtowerenteringwatertemperature(T1)andthecoolingtower
leaving water temperature (T2) at the design condition. The design range of the cooling tower is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovidedchilledwaterloopdesigndataandcondenser
waterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
56
2.6.3.9
CoolingTowerDesignHeatRejection,Qhrdes
Thisistheheatrejectionloadonthecoolingtoweratdesigncondition.Thedesignheatrejectionloadof
thecoolingtowerisautomaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovidedchilledwaterloopdesign
dataandcondenserwaterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.10 CoolingTowerFanPower,Wfan
Enterthepowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatfullspeed.
2.6.3.11 CoolingTowerFanElectricInputRatio,Wfan/Qhrdes
This is the ratio between the design fan power consumption and the design heat rejection load of the
coolingtower.Itisautomaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovidedcoolingtowerfanpowerand
thederivedcoolingtowerdesignheatrejectionload,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.12 CoolingTowerFancontrol
Selectthefancontroltypeofthecoolingtower.Threetypesoffancontrolareavailable:Onespeedfan,
Twospeed fan and VSD fan. When Twospeed fan is selected, you also need to specify two more
parameters(seebelow):LowspeedfanflowfractionandLowspeedfanpowerfraction.
2.6.3.13 LowspeedFanFlowFraction
Enterthefractionofthedesignflowthatthecoolingtowerfandeliverswhenrunningatlowspeed.This
parameteronlyneedstobespecifiedwhenFancontroltypeisselectedasTwospeedfan.
2.6.3.14 LowspeedFanPowerFraction
Enterthepowerconsumedbythecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatlowspeed,expressedasafraction
ofthecoolingtowerdesignfanpower.ThisparameteronlyneedstobespecifiedwhenFancontroltype
isselectedasTwospeedfan.Generally,thelowspeedpowerfractionwillbealesservaluethanthelow
speedflowfraction.Forexample,ifthelowspeedflowfractionwere0.50,thelowspeedpowerfraction
wouldtypically(dependingonfancurves,motorperformance,etc.)beontheorderof0.30.
2.6.3.15 CondenserWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Enter the condenser water specific pump power at rated speed, expressed in W/(l/s) in SI units (or
W/gpminIPunits).
Condenserwaterpumppowerwillbecalculatedonthebasisofconstantflow(whenthechilleroperates).
The model will be based on a specific pump power parameter, with a default value of 19 W/gpm as
specifiedinASHRAE90.1G3.1.3.11.
Thecondenserwaterloopflowratewillbecalculatedfromvaluesofcondenserwaterheatrejectionload
andcondenserwatertemperaturerangethroughthecondenseratthedesigncondition.
2.6.3.16 CondenserWaterPumpHeatGaintoCondenserWaterLoop(fraction)
Enter the condenser water pump heat gain to the condenser water loop, which is the fraction of the
pumpmotorpowerthatendsupinthecondenserwater.Itsvalueismultipliedbythecondenserwater
pumppowertogetthecondenserwaterpumpheatgain,whichisaddedtotheheatrejectionloadofthe
coolingtower.(Condenserwaterpumpisassumedtobeonthesupplysideofthecoolingtower.)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
57
2.6.3.17 CondenserHeatRecovery(%)
Thisisthepercentageoftheheatrejectedtothecondenserwaterloopthatcanberecoveredtoaheat
source circuit. You can specify any Condenser Heat Recovery (CHR) percentage between 0% and 100%.
When the specified CHR percentage is nonzero, it is also necessary to specify the CHR Recipient (see
below),whichwillbetheheatsourcecircuitthatreceivestherecoveredheat.Ifheatrecoveryfromthe
chillercondensercircuitisnotrequired,leavetheCHRpercentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientwillbe
grayedout.
Theamountofheatrecoveredatanygiventimeisgivenby:
Heat Recovered =
(Ql + Qc ) p
100
Where,Qlistheloadonthechilledwaterloop,Qcisthecompressorpowerandpispercentagerecovery.
2.6.3.18 CondenserHeatRecoveryRecipient
This is the heat source circuit that receives the condenser heat recovered from the chiller condenser
circuit.WhenthespecifiedCHRpercentage(seeabove)isnonzero,thisparameterisactiveandneedsto
be specified. Choices available in the dropdown list will be the heat source circuits that have been
definedinthesystem.Ifheatrecoveryfromthechillercondensercircuitisnotrequired,leavetheCHR
percentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientwillbegrayedout.
Ifoneheatsourcecircuitisspecifiedtobetherecipientofcondenserheatrecoveryfrommultiplechiller
condenser circuits, the condenser heat recovered from those chiller condenser circuits will be
accumulatedforthisheatsourcecircuit.
2.6.3.19 UseWatersideEconomizerWhenitcanMeettheLoadinFull?
When this checkbox is ticked, the chilled water loop will operate in waterside economizer mode if the
watersideeconomizeralonecancoverthetotalchilledwaterloopload.Otherwise,thechillersdefined
for the chilled water loop will take the loop load. When it is operating, the waterside economizer is
assumedtousethesamecondenserwaterloopparametersdefinedforthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.3.20 WatersideEconomizerHeatExchangerEffectiveness
The effectiveness of the waterside economizer heat exchanger is defined with respect to whichever
connectedwaterloophaslowerflow.
Ifthechilledwaterloopservingthecoilsloophaslowerflow,theeffectivenessiscoil,definedby
T1coil=T2coil+coil(T2T2coil)
Ifthecoolingtowerloophasrelativelylowerflow,theeffectivenessistower,definedby
T1=T2+tower(T2coilT2)
Here
T1isthetowerenteringwatertemperature
T2isthetowerleavingwatertemperature
T1coilisthecoilenteringwatertemperature
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
58
T2coilisthecoilleavingwatertemperature
coil and tower are in the ratio of the flows in the coil and cooling tower loops. The heat exchange
effectivenessparameteristhusthesmallerofthesetwoeffectivenessvalues.
Figure 223: Chiller set tab in Chilled water loop dialog (showing an illustrative example of three
sequencedwatercooledchillersoftwosizes,asincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
59
2.6.4
ChillerSettab
91B
TheChillersettabfacilitatesthedefinitionofthechillersservingthechilledwaterloop.Chillerscanbe
added,edited,copiedandremovedfromtheexistingchillerlist(showninthefirstcolumnofthechiller
sequencing table, see below) using the corresponding buttons. Chillers can also be imported from an
existingchilledwaterloopusingtheImportbutton.
Achillersequencingtableisprovidedtosettheorderinwhichchillersareturnedonwithinanyparticular
loadrangeandtosettherelativeweightingofautosizedcapacities.Tickboxesareprovidedtoactivateup
to5loadrangesforsequencingandthecellswithwhitebackgroundcanbeeditedbydoubleclicking.The
cellscontainingchillernamesintheChillerlistcolumnprovideaccesstoeditingindividualchillers.
Note that there must be a condenser water loop defined for the chilled water loop before an electric
watercooledchillercanbeaddedorimported.
2.6.4.1
ChillerModelTypetoAdd
Selection made in this combo list determines the model type of the chiller to be added by clicking the
chillerAddbutton.Currentlythreemodeltypesareavailable:partloadcurvechiller,electricwatercooled
chillerorelectricaircooledchiller.
The chiller set can include any number of chillers or similar cooling sources defined using one of three
models,andthesetcanincludeanycombinationofthethreedifferentmodeltypes:
2.6.4.2
electricwatercooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
electricaircooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
partloadcurvechiller(flexiblegenericinputs;canrepresentanydeviceusedtocoolwatervia
amatrixofloaddependentdataforCOPandassociatedusageofpumps,heatrejectionfans,
etc.,withtheoptionofaddingCOPvaluesforuptofouroutdoorDBTorWBTconditions)
ChillerList
Thechillerlistcolumnliststhechillersandsimilarcoolingsourcesinthechillersetforthecurrentchilled
waterloop.Toopentheeditdialogforthatchiller,doubleclickachillernameonthelistorselectachiller
andclicktheEditbutton.
2.6.4.3
ChillerType
Thechillertypecolumnliststhetypesofthechillersdefinedforthechilledwaterloop.Thechillertypes
are determined automatically by the program depending on the chiller model type selection when the
chillersareadded.
Currently there are three chiller model types available: part load curve chiller, electric Watercooled
chiller,andelectricaircooledchiller.
2.6.4.4
PartLoadRange(upto%)
Thepartloadrange(%)valuescanbeedited,withtheexceptionoftheendvalue(100%).Partloadrange
values must always be nondecreasing from left to right. The number of part load ranges is currently
limitedtoamaximumof5.
2.6.4.5
ChillerSequenceRank
Chillersequenceranksareenteredinthebodyofthetable,foreachchillerandforeachpartloadrange.
Theseareintegersintherange(0,99)definingtheorderinwhichthechillerswillbesequencedduring
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
60
simulation.Withinaspecificpartloadrange,chillerswithlowersequencerankwillbesequencedinfirst.
Atleastonechillershouldhaveanonzerosequencingrankineverycolumn.
Whenmultiplechillersarespecifiedtohavethesamesequencerankforapartloadrange,thechillerswill
be sequenced in together in that part load range, and will share the loop load in proportion to their
designcapacities.
Within any range (except the last), if all the specified chillers are operating at maximum output, it is
automaticallymovedtothenextrange.
For version 6.3, the cooling capacity of chillers is used to determine the top end of the performance
curves (scaling the curves accordingly), but does not constrain output: any load exceeding the total
availablecapacityat100%ofthedesignsizingcoolingloadwillbemetbytheequipmentsequencedON
in the 100% column using the performance values associated with the closest available point on the
curves. In other words, the performance under a given set of conditions will be held constant as the
capacityexceedthemaximumthatwasdeterminedorsetforsizingpurposes.Inthiscontext,constrainof
capacityisdeterminedatthecoolingcoilorchilledceiling.However,insubsequentversionsthecapacity
ofchillersandsimilarcoolingsourcescanbeconstrained,suchthatthecoolingdevicesservedbythem
canbemodeledascollectivelyfallingshortofaddressingthetotalofallcoincidentloads.Thisisusefulin
modelinglowenergysystems,suchascoolingsystemswithacoolingtowerbynochiller,designedtobe
justcapableofmeetingthefullloadunderparticulardesignconditions,butnotallanticipatedconditions.
2.6.4.6
ChillerAutosizingCapacityWeighting
Chillerautosizingcapacityweightingisacolumnofvaluesindicatingtherelativeproportionoftheload
that each chiller will take during autosizing. If the rightmost sequence rank is zero for any chiller, the
corresponding autosizing capacity weighting will be set automatically to zero. Any chiller with a zero
autosizingcapacityweightingwillnotbeautosized.TheDistributeas%buttonnormalizestheautosizing
capacityweightingssothattheysumto100.WhenalltheautosizingweightingsarezerotheDistribute
as%buttonwillbedisabled.ItisnotobligatorytousetheDistributeas%buttonasthevalueswillbe
normalizedautomaticallywhenapplied.
2.6.4.7
ActiveSequenceColumns
Undereachpartloadrangecolumnofthechillersequencingtable(exceptthe100%column),thereisa
checkboxindicatingthecurrentstatusofthecolumn.Thesecheckboxescanonlybetickedintheorderof
righttoleft,anduntickedfromlefttoright.
Foranewchilledwaterloop,thefirst3checkboxes(underthe1stthreecolumnsfromtheleft)areinitially
grayedoutandthecheckboximmediatelytotheleftoftherightmostpartloadrangecolumn(the4thone)
willhaveanenabledstate.
When a check box is ticked, it will populate the column immediately above it with the data from the
column to the right of it, thereby rendering the column immediately above it editable. Furthermore, a
checkboxunderacolumntotheleftofthischeckboxwillbeenabledsimultaneously.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
61
2.7 PartLoadCurveChillers
CurrentlytherearethreechillermodelsimplementedinApacheHVAC:apartloadcurvechiller,anelectric
watercooledchiller,andanelectricaircooledchiller.AllthreeareaccessedthroughtheChillersettabof
anassociatedchilledwaterloop.Whenaddingchillerstotheset,thechillermodeltypeisdeterminedby
theChillermodeltypetoaddselectionintheChillersettaboftheChilledwaterloopdialog.Thesetcan
includeanycombinationofthethreetypes.
Figure224:ChillersettabofChillerwaterloopdialogshownwithtwosequencedPartloadcurvechiller
modelsandcurrenttypetoaddsettopartloadcurve.
2.7.1
Partloadcurvechillerdefinition
92B
Thepartloadcurvechillermodelusesamatrixofgenericinputsthatcanrepresentaverybroadrangeof
possiblewatercoolingequipment.ItcomprisesamatrixofloaddependentdataforCOPandassociated
usageofpumps,heatrejectionfans,etc.,withtheoptionofaddingCOPvaluesforuptofourrangesof
outdoorDBTorWBTconditions.ItalsocanbeusedtomodelaheatdrivenAbsorptionchiller.
The input parameters for the Part load curve chiller model are described in this section. The electric
watercooledandaircooledchillermodelsaredescribedinsections2.6and2.7,respectively.
Thepartloadcurvechillermodelissimilartotheanalogousheatsourcemodel,butwiththeadditionof
outdoortemperaturedependentCOPsandgreaterdetailinthedescriptionofenergyuseforassociated
pumps, fans, and so forth. In addition, basic modeling of condenser heat recovery (CHR) via double
bundlecondensersorsimilarhasbeenprovidedbyallowingaportionoftheheatrejectedfromthechiller
tobemadeavailableforuseonadesignatedheatsourcecircuit.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
62
Figure 225: Part load curve chiller editing dialog showing an illustrative example for which the cooling
towerfanandcondenserwaterpumppowerareembeddedintheCOPvaluesforeachrangeofloadand
outdoorwetbulbtemperatureandcondenserheatrecoveryisalsoused.
Importantnotes:Allpumpand/orfanpowerenteredinthepartloadcurvechillerdialogisindependent
of the loop pump and cooling tower energy calculated according to parameters set in the associated
chilledwaterloopdialogi.e.,pumppowerandheatrejectionfanpowerenteredinthepartloadcurve
chillerdialogisinadditiontothatcalculatedbasedonsimilarparametersinthechilledwaterloopdialog.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
63
Figure 226: Part load curve chiller editing dialog showing tick box for absorption chiller and associated
selectionofadrivingheatsourceinplaceoffuelcodeorelectricity.
2.7.1.1
Reference
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.Itisforyourusewhenselecting,organizing,andreferencingany
componentorcontrollerswithinothercomponentandcontrollerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowser
tree. These references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system
modelislaterreusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.Referencenamesshouldthus
beinformativewithrespecttodifferentiatingsimilarequipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.7.1.2
Fuel
Theenergysourceusedbythechillercompressor.Fortheelectricchillers,thisshouldbeeitherthemore
generic Electricity source or Cooling, which is an electrical enduse designation that is mapped to
CoolingelectricityinthereportsfortheASHRAE90.1PerformanceRatingMethod(seesection8:Pre
Defined Prototype HVAC Systems and the separate user guide for the PRM Navigator). When the
AbsorptionChiller?boxisticked,theFuelselectionwillbereplacedwithaHeatsourceselection.
2.7.1.3
AbsorptionChiller?
The part load curve chiller can be used to model an absorption chiller. To enable this option, tick the
Absorption Chiller? checkbox. The Condenser Heat Recovery (%) parameter is then removed and the
FuelselectionisreplacedwiththeabsorptionchillerHeatsourceselection.Therequiredenergyinput
totheabsorptionchillerwillbepassedasloadtothedesignatedheatsource.
2.7.1.4
Heatsource
When the Absorption Chiller? checkbox is ticked, the Fuel selection is replaced with the absorption
chillerHeatsourceselection.Youneedtoselecttheheatsourcefortheabsorptionchillerinthiscase.
Therequiredenergyinputtotheabsorptionchillerwillbepassedasloadtothedesignatedheatsource.
2.7.2
2.7.2.1
CondenserHeatRecovery
93B
CondenserHeatRecovery(%)
Thisisthepercentageoftherejectedheatthatcanberecoveredtoaheatsourcecircuit.Youcanspecify
anyCondenserHeatRecoverypercentagebetween0%and100%.
When the specified CHR percentage is nonzero, it is also necessary to specify the CHR Recipient (see
below),whichwillbetheheatsourcecircuitthatreceivestherecoveredheat.Ifheatrecoveryfromthe
chillercondensercircuitisnotrequired,leavetheCHRpercentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientcombo
boxwillbereplacedwiththeAbsorptionChiller?checkbox(seebelow).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
64
Theamountofheatrecoveredatanygiventimeisgivenby:
Heat Recovered =
(Ql + Qc ) p
100
Where,Qlistheloadonthechiller,Qcisthecompressorpowerandpispercentagerecovery.
The Condenser Heat Recovery (%) parameter is hidden when the Absorption Chiller? checkbox is
ticked.Condenserheatrecoveryisnotavailablewhenmodelinganabsorptionchiller.
2.7.2.2
CondenserHeatRecoveryRecipient
This is the heat source circuit or loop that receives the recovered condenser heat. When the specified
CHRpercentageissettoanonzerovalue,thisparameterreplacestheAbsorptionChiller?checkboxand
mustthenbespecified.Thedropdownlistallowsselectionofheatsourcesorhotwaterloopsthathave
been defined in the system. If heat recovery from the condenser is not required, leave the CHR
percentagesettozero;CHRRecipientselectionwillbereplacedbytheAbsorptionChiller?checkbox.
Ifmultiplechillersreferenceoneheatsourcecircuitastherecipientofcondenserheatrecovery,theheat
recoveredfromthosechillerswillbeaccumulatedforthisheatsourcecircuitorhotwaterloop.
2.7.3
Electricalpowerconsumptionforpumpsandfans
94B
2.7.3.1
ChilledWaterCirculationPumps
Enter the maximum rate of electrical consumption of the chilled water circulation pumps. These are
assumedtooperatewheneverthereisademandforchilledwaterfromthiscoolingsource.Pumppower
canbevariedwithcoolingloadbyenteringpercentagevaluesinthetableofpartloadperformancedata.
The maximum power input for chilled water pumps is a generic input that could represent any
electrical device with either constant power or power varying with cooling load; however, the energy
consumedinthiscasewithbereportedinthedistributionpumpscategory.
WarningLimits(kW) 0.0to15.0
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to9999.0
2.7.3.2
CondenserWaterPumps
Enterthemaximumrateofelectricalconsumptionofthecondenserwaterpumps.Theseareassumedto
operate whenever there is a demand for chilled water from this cooling source. Pump power can be
varied with cooling load by entering percentage values in the table of partload performance data. The
inputforcondenserwaterpumpscouldbeusedtorepresentanypoweredheatrejectiondevicewith
either constant power or power varying with cooling load; the energy consumed in this case with be
reportedintheheatrejectionfans/pumps.
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to9999.0
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
65
2.7.3.3
CoolingTowerFans
Enter the maximum rate of electrical consumption of the cooling tower or condenser fans. These are
assumedtooperatewheneverthereisademandforchilledwaterfromthiscoolingsource.Fanpower
canbevariedwithcoolingloadbyenteringpercentagevaluesinthetableofpartloadperformancedata.
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to9999.0
2.7.4
COPTemperatureDependence
95B
2.7.4.1
OutsidetemperatureforCOPdata
Use the dropdown selector to indicate if you will be entering temperature dependent COP values and
whetherthesewillbeassociatedwithoutdoordrybulborwetbulbtemperatures.
2.7.4.2
NumberofTemperatureDependentCOPs
UsethedropdownselectortoindicateifyouwillbeenteringCOPvaluesfor1,2,3,or4outdoordrybulb
orwetbulbtemperatures.
2.7.4.3
TemperaturesT1T4forTemperatureDependentCOPs
Enter 1 to 4 outdoor drybulb or wetbulb temperatures for which you intend to include Temperature
DependentCOPsintheperformancetablebelow.
2.7.5
Partloadperformancedataforchillerandauxiliaryequipment
96B
2.7.5.1
ChillerPartLoadOutput
EnterthechilleroutputandpartloadvaluesinkWorkBtu/hasappropriate.Theoutputvaluesmustbe
enteredinascendingorder(forexample,startingwith100atthefirstortoprowandendingwith900at
thebottom)sothatallvalueswillbeused.
Up to twenty data points (rows in the data table or matrix) may be used to define the variation of
performance with partload. Enter the points in ascending order of partload. Use the Add, Insert, and
Removebuttonsatthebottomtochangethenumberofrowsinthedatatable.
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to99999.0
2.7.5.2
ChillerWaterPumpUsage
Enterthepercentageuseofthechilledwaterdistributionpumpsthatcoincideswiththeoutputspecified
inChillerPartLoadOutput.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
VE6.3
0.0to100.0
0.0to100.0
ApacheHVAC
66
2.7.5.3
CondenserWaterPumpUsage
Enter the percentage use of the condenser water pumps that coincides with the output specified in
ChillerPartLoadOutput.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
2.7.5.4
0.0to100.0
0.0to100.0
CoolingTowerFansUsage
Enter the percentage use of the cooling tower or condenser fans which coincides with the output
specifiedinChillerPartLoadOutput.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
2.7.5.5
0.0to100.0
0.0to100.0
PartloadandTemperatureDependentCOPs
Enterthecoefficientofperformanceassociatedwiththepartloadoutputvalueoneachrow.Ifyouhave
selectedoptionsaboveandenteredDBTorWBTvaluesfortemperaturedependenceoftheCOPs,enter
theCOPvaluesassociatedwitheachtemperature(T1T4)intheappropriatecolumns.
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.25to10.0
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
67
2.8 ElectricWatercooledChillers
The electric watercooled chiller model simulates the performance of an electric chiller cooled by
condenserwaterfromanopencoolingtower.Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedchillerperformance
characteristicsatratedconditionsalongwiththreeperformancecurvesforcoolingcapacityandefficiency
todeterminechillerperformanceatoffratedconditions.
Thethreechillerperformancecurvesusedare:
2.8.1
2.8.1.1
Chillercoolingcapacity(watertemperaturedependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(watertempdependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve
Watercooledchillerdefinition
97B
Reference
Enter a description of the component. Reference names should be informative with respect to
differentiating similar equipment. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
equipment within other component and controller dialogs and in the component browser tree. These
referencescanbevaluableinorganizingandnavigatingthesystemandwhenthesystemmodelislater
reusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.
2.8.1.2
Fuel
Selectthefuelorenergysourceusedbythechillercompressortodeterminethecategoryforreporting
energyconsumptionresults.Forscratchbuiltsystemmodels,thisshouldnormallybesettoElectricity
fortheelectricchillers.ItwillbepresettoCoolingasanenergyendusecategory(consistentwithLEED
EAcredit1submittalrequirements)whenworkingwiththepredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystems,
as provided by the Prototype Systems Library, System Prototypes & Sizing facility, or the ASHRAE 90.1
PRMworkflownavigator.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
68
Figure227:Electricwatercooledchillerdialog
2.8.2
2.8.2.1
ChillerPerformance
98B
ChillerModelDescription
Clicking this button provides a summary of the electric watercooled chiller model variables as shown
below:
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
69
Figure228:Electricwatercooledchillermodeldescription
2.8.2.2
Whenthisboxisticked,theratedconditiondata(seedetailsintheRatedconditionsubtab)isareadonly
copy of the current design condition data (see details in the Design condition subtab), including any
2.8.2.3
CoolingCapacityCurve,fCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)
Thisfieldindicatesthecurrentlyselectedperformancecurveforchillercapacityasafunctionofleaving
evaporatortemperatureandenteringcondensertemperatureforaparticularchillerequipmenttype.Use
theSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
70
Figure229:Electricwatercooledchillerdialogshowingdropdownselectionforcoolingcapacitycurve.
2.8.2.4
EditCoolingCapacityCurve,fCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)
The Edit button opens a dialog displaying the formula and parameters of the curve, allowing the curve
parameterstobeedited,ifneeded.However,thisisrecommendedforadvancedusersonlyandrequires
both sufficient data from a manufacturer and an appropriate tool, such as MatLab, for generating the
properfitcurvecoefficients.Formostusers,selectingarepresentativecurveforthechillertypeandthen
enteringappropriateperformancecharacteristics(COP,coolingcapacity,supplytemperature,etc.)inthe
ratedanddesignconditionstabswillbemostappropriate.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
71
Wheneditingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyouunderstandthemeaningofthecurveandits
usage in the model algorithm. The edited curve should have reasonable ranges for the independent
variables, as a given performance curve is only valid within its applicable ranges. If the independent
variablesareoutofthesetapplicableranges,thevariablelimits(maximumorminimum)specifiedinthe
inputdialogwillbeapplied.
Figure230:Editdialogforthecoolingcapacitycurveofelectricwatercooledchiller
ThecoolingcapacitycurvefCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)isabiquadraticfunctionof
tlet=TletTdatum
tect=TectTdatum
where
Tect=enteringcondenserwatertemperature.
Tlet=chilledwatersupply(leavingevaporator)temperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
72
curvecoefficients.
And:
fCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)=(C00+C10tlet+C20tlet2+C01tect+C02tect2+C11tlettect)/Cnorm
where
C00,C10,C20,C01,C02andC11arethecurvecoefficients
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefCAPtt(Tletrat,Tectrat)=1
Tectrat=ratedenteringcondenserwatertemperature.
Tletrat=ratedchilledwatersupply(leavingevaporator)temperature.
The cooling capacity curve is evaluated at each iteration of the chiller performance, for each time step
duringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedcoolingcapacity(Qrat)togettheavailable
(fullload)coolingcapacity(Qcap)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificTectandTlettemperatures:
Qcap=QratfCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthetemperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.8.2.5
EIR(WaterTempDependence)Curve,fEIRtt(Tlet,Tect)
This field indicates the currently selected performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a
functionofleavingevaporatortemperatureandenteringcondensertemperatureforaparticularchiller
type.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
2.8.2.6
EditEIR(WaterTempDependence)Curve,fEIRtt(Tlet,Tect)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
73
Figure231:EditdialogfortheEIR(watertemperaturedependence)curveofelectricwatercooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(watertemperaturedependence)curvefEIRtt(Tlet,Tect)isabiquadraticfunctionof
tlet=TletTdatum
tect=TectTdatum
where
curvecoefficients.
And:
fEIRtt(Tlet,Tect)=(C00+C10tlet+C20tlet2+C01tect+C02tect2+C11tlettect)/Cnorm
where
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
74
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefEIRtt(Tletrat,Tectrat)=1
The chiller EIR (water temperature dependence) curve is evaluated for each iteration of the chiller
performance,foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/
COPrat,whereCOPratistheratedcoefficientofperformance)togetthefullloadEIRofthecurrenttime
step, for the specific Tect and Tlet temperatures. The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the
temperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.8.2.7
EIR(Partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve,fEIRpt(p,TectTlet)
This field indicates the chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) partload dependence curve currently selected.
This is the performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a function of partload fraction,
entering condenser temperature, and leaving evaporator temperature for a particular chiller type. Use
theSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
2.8.2.8
EditEIR(Partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve,fEIRpt(p,TectTlet)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
75
Figure 232: Edit dialog for the EIR (partload and water temperature dependence) curve of electric
watercooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curvefEIRpt(p,t)isabiquadraticfunctionof
p=Q/Qcap
t=TectTlet
where
p=partloadfraction
Q=coolingload
Qcap=available(fullload)coolingcapacity
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
76
And:
2
fEIRpt(p,t)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C01t+C02t +C11pt)/Cnorm

where
C00,C10,C20,C01,C02andC11arethecurvecoefficients,
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefEIRpt(1,TectratTletrat)=1
ThechillerEIR(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedineachiterationofthe
chillerperformance,foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueismultipliedbytherated
EIR (= 1/ COPrat, where COPrat is the rated coefficient of performance) and the EIR (water temperature
dependence)curvevaluetogettheEIRofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificTectandTlettemperatures
andthespecificpartloadratioatwhichthechillerisoperating:
EIR=fEIRtt(Tlet,Tect)fEIRpt(p,TectTlet)/(pCOPrat)
The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 and the temperatures are at
ratedconditions.
Theminimumpisusedbytheprogramastheminimumunloadingratio,wherethechillercapacitycanno
longerbereducedbynormalunloadingmechanismandthechillermustbefalseloadedtomeetsmaller
coolingloads.Atypicalfalseloadingstrategyishotgasbypass.Ifthisisthefalseloadingstrategyusedby
thechiller,theminimumpisthepartloadratioatwhichhotgasbypassstarts.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasignof
chillerundersizing.
2.8.2.9
MinimumPartloadRatioforContinuousOperation
This is the minimum partload ratio at which the chiller can operate continuously. When the partload
ratioisbelowthispoint,thechillerwillcycleonandoff.
2.8.2.10 CompressorHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Thisisthefractionofcompressorelectricenergyconsumptionthatmustberejectedbythecondenser.
Heatrejectedbythechillercondenserincludestheheattransferredintheevaporatorplusaportionorall
of the compressor energy consumption. For electric chillers with hermetic compressors, all compressor
energyconsumptionisrejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbe1.0.For
chillers with semihermetic or open compressors, only a portion of the compressor energy used is
rejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbelessthan1.0.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
77
2.8.3
DesignCondition
99B
Figure 233: Electric watercooled chiller dialog showing design condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisticked.Whenthisisunticked,theinputsforCoolingcapacityandCOPareno
longereditedhere,butareeditableintheRatedconditiontab.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
78
2.8.3.1
EnteringCondenserWaterTemperature,Tectdes
Thedesignenteringcondenserwatertemperatureisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog
(intheHeatrejectiontab)andisdisplayedhereasaderivedparameter.
2.8.3.2
CondenserWaterFlowRate,Vc,Vc/Qdes,Tcdes
Vc, Vc/Qdes, and Tcdes are three different options for specifying design condenser water flow rate.
CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofTcdes(thedifferencebetweenthedesigncondenserwaterleavingand
entering temperatures). It is specified in the associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Heat rejection
tab) and is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (Vc and Vc/Qdes (the ratio
between design condenser water flow rate (Vc) and design cooling capacity (Qdes).) are automatically
derivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecifiedTcdesandcannotbeedited.
2.8.3.3
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature,Tletdes
Thedesignchilledwater supplytemperature(leavingevaporatorwatertemperature)isspecifiedin the

associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Chilled water loop tab) and is displayed here as a derived
parameter.
2.8.3.4
ChilledWaterFlowRate,Ve,Ve/Qdes,Tedes
Ve,Ve/QdesandTedesarethreedifferentoptionsforspecifyingdesignchilledwaterflowrate.Currentlyit
is specified in terms of Tedes (the difference between the design chilled water return and supply
temperatures).Itisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(intheChilledwaterlooptab)and
is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (Ve and Ve/Qdes (the ratio between
design chilled water flow rate (Ve) and design cooling capacity (Qdes).) are automatically derived by the
programbasedonthespecifiedTedesandcannotbeedited.
2.8.3.5
CoolingCapacity,Qdes
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design cooling capacity is automatically
derivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnotneedtobe
edited.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoolingcapacity.
labelAbecomegreen.
2.8.3.6
CoefficientofPerformance,COPdes
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design coefficient of performance is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnot
need to be edited. When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, enter the design coefficient of
performance.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
79
2.8.4
RatedCondition
100B
RatedconditionandDesignconditionareprovidedforyourflexibilityinspecifyingchillerdata.
Theratedconditionisthebasisforthecalculationofchillercharacteristicsatsimulationtime.Therated
conditionisusuallytheratedorARIconditioni.e.theconditionatwhichthechillercharacteristicsare
specifiedbyamanufacturer.However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition.
ThedefaultratedconditiondataarebasedonthestandardARIconditions(ARIStandard550/5902003):
o
o
44 F leaving chilledwater temperature, 85 F entering condenser water temperature, 2.4 gpm/ton
evaporator water flow rate, 3.0 gpm/ton condenser water flow rate. Here /ton means per ton of
refrigerationdeliveredtothechilledwater.
Thedesignconditionistheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakchillerload.
AuserwishingtousecataloguechillerdataentersacapacityandCOPattheratedconditionandreadsoff
thederivedcapacityandCOPatthedesigncondition.
AuserwishingtosizeachillerbasedonadesignloadentersacapacityandCOPattheratedcondition,
thenadjuststhecapacitytoproducethedesiredderivedcapacityatthedesigncondition(allowingfora
marginofoversizing).
Iftheratedconditionanddesignconditionareoneandthesame,theuserticksthecheckboxofRated
condition is design condition, which makes the rated condition data a dynamic copy of the design
conditiondata.
The derivations of chiller capacity and COP are done using the userentered performance curves and
otherdata.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
80
Figure 234: Electric watercooled chiller dialog showing Rated condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisnotticked.ThewhitefieldsintheRatedconditiontabareeditablewhennot
setequaltothedesignconditions.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
81
2.8.4.1
EnteringCondenserWaterTemperature,Tectrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedenteringcondenserwatertemperatureisa
dynamic copy of the design entering condenser water temperature. When Rated condition is design
conditionisnotticked,entertheratedenteringcondenserwatertemperature.
2.8.4.2
CondenserWaterFlowRate,Vcrat,Vcrat/Qrat,Tcrat
Vcrat, Vcrat/Qrat, and Tcrat are three different options for specifying rated condenser water flow rate.
Currentlyitisspecifiedintermsoftheratiobetweenratedcondenserwaterflowrate(Vcrat)andrated
cooling capacity (Qrat). The other two options (Vcrat and Tcrat (the difference between the rated
condenserwaterleavingandenteringtemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedon
thespecifiedVcrat/Qratandcannotbeedited.
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated condenser water flow rate is a dynamic
copyofthedesigncondenserwaterflowrate.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,
entertheratedcondenserwaterflowrate.
2.8.4.3
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature,Tletrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwatersupplytemperature(leaving
evaporatorwatertemperature)isadynamiccopyofthedesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.When
Ratedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedchilledwatersupplytemperature.
2.8.4.4
ChilledWaterFlowRate,Verat,Verat/Qrat,Terat
Verat, Verat/Qrat, and Terat are three different options for specifying rated chilled water flow rate.
Currently it is specified in terms of the ratio between rated chilled water flow rate (Verat) and rated
coolingcapacity(Qrat).Theothertwooptions(VeratandTerat(thedifferencebetweentheratedchilled
waterreturnandsupplytemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecified
Verat/Qratandcannotbeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwaterflowrateisadynamiccopyof
the design chilled water flow rate. When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the
ratedchilledwaterflowrate.
2.8.4.5
CoolingCapacity,Qrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedcoolingcapacityisadynamiccopyofthe
designcoolingcapacity.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcooling
capacity.
2.8.4.6
CoefficientofPerformance,COPrat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated coefficient of performance is a dynamic
copyofthedesigncoefficientofperformance.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,
entertheratedcoefficientofperformance.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
82
2.9 ElectricAircooledChillers
18B
Theelectricaircooledchillermodelsimulatestheperformanceofanelectricchillercooledbyoutdoorair.
Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedchillerperformancecharacteristicsatratedconditionsalongwith
three performance curves for cooling capacity and efficiency to determine chiller performance at off
ratedconditions.
Thethreechillerperformancecurvesusedare:
Chillercoolingcapacity(temperaturedependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(tempdependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(partload(andtemperature)dependence)curve
EnergyconsumptionbycondenserfansisincludedinthechillersElectricInputRatio(EIR)andassociated
performancecurves.AcondenserfanElectricInputRatio(EIRfan),representingtheratioofcondenserfan
power consumption to the total chiller power consumption, is used to split the energy consumption
calculatedbytheperformancecurvesintothecondenserfanpowerconsumptionandchillercompressor
energyconsumption.
2.9.1
2.9.1.1
Watercooledchillerdefinition
101B
Reference
Enter a description of the component. Reference names should be informative with respect to
differentiating similar equipment. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
equipment within other component and controller dialogs and in the component browser tree. These
referencescanbevaluableinorganizingandnavigatingthesystemandwhenthesystemmodelislater
reusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.
2.9.1.2
Fuel
Selectthefuelorenergysourceusedbythechillercompressortodeterminethecategoryforreporting
energyconsumptionresults.Forscratchbuiltsystemmodels,thisshouldnormallybesettoElectricity
fortheelectricchillers.ItwillbepresettoCoolingasanenergyendusecategory(consistentwithLEED
EAcredit1submittalrequirements)whenworkingwiththepredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystems,
as provided by the Prototype Systems Library, System Prototypes & Sizing facility, or the ASHRAE 90.1
PRMworkflownavigator.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
83
Figure235:Electricaircooledchillerdialog
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
84
2.9.2
2.9.2.1
ChillerPerformance
102B
ChillerModelDescription
Clicking this button provides a summary of the electric watercooled chiller model variables as shown
below:
Figure236:Electricaircooledchillermodeldescription
2.9.2.2
Whenthisboxisticked,theratedconditiondata(seedetailsintheRatedconditionsubtab)isareadonly
copy of the current design condition data (see details in the Design condition subtab), including any
2.9.2.3
CoolingCapacityCurve,fCAPtt(Tlet,Todb)
Thisfieldindicatesthecurrentlyselectedperformancecurveforchillercapacityasafunctionofleaving
evaporator water temperature and outdoor air drybulb temperature for a particular chiller equipment
type.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
85
Figure237:Electricaircooledchillerdialogshowingdropdownselectionforcoolingcapacitycurve.
2.9.2.4
EditCoolingCapacityCurve,fCAPtt(Tlet,Todb)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
86
Figure238:Editdialogforthecoolingcapacitycurveofelectricaircooledchiller
ThecoolingcapacitycurvefCAPtt(Tlet,Todb)isabiquadraticfunctionof
tlet=TletTdatum
todb=TodbTdatum
where
Todb=outdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
87
curvecoefficients.
And:
fCAPtt(Tlet,Todb)=(C00+C10tlet+C20tlet2+C01todb+C02todb2+C11tlettodb)/Cnorm
where
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefCAPtt(Tletrat,Todbrat)=1
Todbrat=ratedoutdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
The cooling capacity curve is evaluated at each iteration of the chiller performance, for each time step
duringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedcoolingcapacity(Qrat)togettheavailable
(fullload)coolingcapacity(Qcap)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificTodbandTlettemperatures:
Qcap=QratfCAPtt(Tlet,Todb)
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthetemperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.9.2.5
EIR(TempDependence)Curve,fEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)
This field indicates the currently selected performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a
function of leaving evaporator temperature and outdoor drybulb temperature (for condenser heat
rejection) for a particular chiller type. Use the Select button to choose the appropriate curve from the
systemdatabase.
2.9.2.6
EditEIR(TempDependence)Curve,fEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
88
Figure239:EditdialogfortheEIR(temperaturedependence)curveofelectricaircooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(temperaturedependence)curvefEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)isabiquadraticfunctionof
tlet=TletTdatum
todb=TodbTdatum
where
curvecoefficients.
And:
fEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)=(C00+C10tlet+C20tlet2+C01todb+C02todb2+C11tlettodb)/Cnorm
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
89
where
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefEIRtt(Tletrat,Todbrat)=1
ThechillerEIR(temperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedforeachiterationofthechillerperformance,
foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/COPrat,where
COPrat is the rated coefficient of performance) to get the fullload EIR of the current time step, for the
specificTodbandTlettemperatures.Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthetemperaturesareat
ratedconditions.
2.9.2.7
EIR(PartloadDependence)curve,fEIRpt(p,TodbTlet)
This field indicates the chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) partload dependence curve currently selected.
This is the performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a function of partload fraction,
outdoor drybulb air temperature, and supply (leaving evaporator) water temperature for a particular
chillertype.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthedatabase.
2.9.2.8
EditEIR(Partloadandtemperaturedependence)curve,fEIRpt(p,TodbTlet)
ThechillerEIR(partloadandtemperaturedependence)curvefEIRpt(p,t)isabiquadraticfunctionof
p=Q/Qcap
t=TodbTlet
where
p=partloadfraction
Q=coolingload
Qcap=available(fullload)coolingcapacity
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
90
Figure240:EditdialogfortheEIR(partloadandtemperaturedependence)curveofelectricaircooled
chiller
And:
2
fEIRpt(p,t)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C01t+C02t +C11pt)/Cnorm

where
C00,C10,C20,C01,C02andC11arethecurvecoefficients,
Cnormisadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakefEIRpt(1,TodbratTletrat)=1
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
91
ThechillerEIR(partloadandtemperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedineachiterationofthechiller
performance,foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/
COPrat, where COPrat is the rated coefficient of performance) and the EIR (temperature dependence)
curve value to get the EIR of the current time step, for the specific Todb and Tlet temperatures and the
specificpartloadratioatwhichthechillerisoperating:
EIR=fEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)fEIRpt(p,TodbTlet)/(pCOPrat)
The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 and the temperatures are at
ratedconditions.
Theminimumpisusedbytheprogramastheminimumunloadingratio,wherethechillercapacitycanno
longerbereducedbynormalunloadingmechanismandthechillermustbefalseloadedtomeetsmaller
coolingloads.Atypicalfalseloadingstrategyishotgasbypass.Ifthisisthefalseloadingstrategyusedby
thechiller,theminimumpisthepartloadratioatwhichhotgasbypassstarts.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasignof
chillerundersizing.
2.9.2.9
MinimumPartloadRatioforContinuousOperation
This is the minimum partload ratio at which the chiller can operate continuously. When the partload
ratioisbelowthispoint,thechillerwillcycleonandoff.
2.9.2.10 CompressorHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Thisisthefractionofcompressorelectricenergyconsumptionthatmustberejectedbythecondenser.
Heatrejectedbythechillercondenserincludestheheattransferredintheevaporatorplusaportionorall
of the compressor energy consumption. For electric chillers with hermetic compressors, all compressor
energyconsumptionisrejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbe1.0.For
chillers with semihermetic or open compressors, only a portion of the compressor energy used is
rejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbelessthan1.0.
2.9.2.11 CondenserFanPower,Wfan
Enterthecondenserfanpowerconsumption.Forapplicationwithoutcondenserfans(condenserscooled
by natural convection or wind), set this parameter to zero. Note that this input is used to change the
calculated Condenser Fan EIR, the EIR value will be used to resize this input if and when the chiller
capacityischangedmanuallyorbyautosizing.
2.9.2.12 CondenserFanElectricInputRatio,EIRfan
Thisistheratioofthecondenserfanpowerconsumptiontothetotalchillerpowerconsumption,whichis
computedfromthechillerperformancecurves.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
92
2.9.3
DesignCondition
103B
Figure 241: Electric aircooled chiller dialog showing design condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisticked.Whenthisisunticked,theinputsforCoolingcapacityandCOPareno
longereditedhere,butareeditableintheRatedconditiontab.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
93
2.9.3.1
Outdoorairdrybulbtemperature,Todbdes
Thedesignoutdoorairdrybulbtemperatureisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(inthe
Heatrejectiontab)andisdisplayedhereasaderivedparameter.
labelAbecomegreen.
2.9.3.2
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature,Tletdes
Thedesignchilledwater supplytemperature(leavingevaporatorwatertemperature)isspecifiedin the

associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Chilled water loop tab) and is displayed here as a derived
parameter.
2.9.3.3
ChilledWaterFlowRate,Ve,Ve/Qdes,Tedes
Ve,Ve/QdesandTedesarethreedifferentoptionsforspecifyingdesignchilledwaterflowrate.Currentlyit
is specified in terms of Tedes (the difference between the design chilled water return and supply
temperatures).Itisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(intheChilledwaterlooptab)and
is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (Ve and Ve/Qdes (the ratio between
design chilled water flow rate (Ve) and design cooling capacity (Qdes).) are automatically derived by the
programbasedonthespecifiedTedesandcannotbeedited.
CoolingCapacity,Qdes
2.9.3.4
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design cooling capacity is automatically
derivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnotneedtobe
edited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoolingcapacity.
labelAbecomegreen.
CoefficientofPerformance,COPdes
2.9.3.5
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design coefficient of performance is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnot
needtobeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoefficientofperformance.
2.9.4
RatedCondition
104B
RatedconditionandDesignconditionareprovidedforflexibilityinspecifyingchillerdata.
Theratedconditionisthebasisforthecalculationofchillercharacteristicsatsimulationtime.Therated
conditionisusuallytheratedorARIconditioni.e.theconditionatwhichthechillercharacteristicsare
specifiedbyamanufacturer.However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition.
ThedefaultratedconditiondataarebasedonthestandardARIconditions(ARIStandard550/5902003):
o
o
44 Fleavingchilledwatertemperature,95 Foutdoorairdrybulbtemperature,2.4gpm/tonevaporator
waterflowrate.Here/tonmeanspertonofrefrigerationdeliveredtothechilledwater.
Thedesigncondition,ontheotherhand,istheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakchillerload.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
94
Figure242:ElectricaircooledchillerdialogshowingRatedconditiontabwhenRatedconditionisDesign
condition tick box is not ticked. The white fields in the Rated condition tab are editable when not set
equaltothedesignconditions.
AuserwishingtousecataloguechillerdataentersacapacityandCOPattheratedconditionandreadsoff
thederivedcapacityandCOPatthedesigncondition.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
95
AuserwishingtosizeachillerbasedonadesignloadentersacapacityandCOPattheratedcondition,
thenadjuststhecapacitytoproducethedesiredderivedcapacityatthedesigncondition(allowingfora
marginofoversizing).
Iftheratedconditionanddesignconditionareoneandthesame,theuserticksthecheckboxofRated
condition is design condition, which makes the rated condition data a dynamic copy of the design
conditiondata.
The derivations of chiller capacity and COP are done using the userentered performance curves and
otherdata.
2.9.4.1
Outdoorairdrybulbtemperature,Todbrat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated outdoor air dry bulb temperature is a
dynamiccopyofthedesignoutdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the rated outdoor air dry bulb
temperature.
2.9.4.2
ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature,Tletrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwatersupplytemperature(leaving
evaporatorwatertemperature)isadynamiccopyofthedesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the rated chilled water supply
temperature.
2.9.4.3
ChilledWaterFlowRate,Verat,Verat/Qrat,Terat
Verat, Verat/Qrat, and Terat are three different options for specifying rated chilled water flow rate.
Currently it is specified in terms of the ratio between rated chilled water flow rate (Verat) and rated
coolingcapacity(Qrat).Theothertwooptions(VeratandTerat(thedifferencebetweentheratedchilled
waterreturnandsupplytemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecified
Verat/Qratandcannotbeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwaterflowrateisadynamiccopyof
thedesignchilledwaterflowrate.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedchilledwaterflowrate.
2.9.4.4
CoolingCapacity,Qrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedcoolingcapacityisadynamiccopyofthe
designcoolingcapacity.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcoolingcapacity.
2.9.4.5
CoefficientofPerformance,COPrat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated coefficient of performance is a dynamic
copyofthedesigncoefficientofperformance.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcoefficientofperformance.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
96
2.10 DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types)
ToolbariconforWatersideEconomizers(types)list.
This facility allows you to define the characteristics of one or more dedicated waterside economizers
directlycoupledtoasinglecoolingcoil.Thistypeofwatersideeconomizer(WSE)canbeassociatedwitha
backupchillerandispresentlylimitedtorunningonlywhenitcanmeettheloadinfull.
ThisdedicatedWSEisdistinctfromandcompletelyindependentoftheWSEmodeavailableontheHeat
rejectiontabforwatercooledchillersorchillersetsaccessedintheChilledwaterloopsdialog.
The waterside economizer consists of a chilled water loop serving the cooling coil, and a cooling tower
linkedtothechilledwaterloopviaaheatexchanger(seediagram).Thereisapumpinthecoolingtower
water loop and a twospeed fan in the cooling tower. The cooling supplied by the cooling tower is
controlledbycyclingthefanbetweentheoff,lowspeedandfullspeedsettings.
The waterside economizer operates when it can meet the coil cooling load in full (the parameter
controllingthisaspectofoperationiscurrentlyforcedtotrue).Whenthewatersideeconomizerisunable
tothemeetthecoilloadinfullitwillredirectthecoolingloadtothebackupchiller,ifoneisspecified.
Otherwise,nocoolingoccurs.
The capacity of the cooling coil will be limited by the capacity of the waterside economizer. A further
capacitylimitationmaybeplacedonthecoolingcoilusingthecoolingcoilsMaximumDutyparameter.
The waterside economizers (WSE) entities defined here are types, rather than instances. When a single
WSEtypeisassignedtomanycoolingcoils,anadditionalinstanceoftheWSEiscreatedforeachcooling
coiltowhichthetypeisassigned.Inthisrespect,watersideeconomizersdifferfromchillers.
Asofversion6.1,awatersideeconomizertypecanreadilybesettoduplicatethecoolingtowerdefinedin
a selected backup watercooled chiller. When the cooling tower as WSE can no longer meet the entire
loadpresentedbythecoil,thefullloadonthecoilwillbepassedtothebackupwatercooledchiller,with
thechillerthenusingthesametowermodelandperformanceparametersforcondenserheatrejection.
TheWSEperformancewillbeconsistentwiththatofthetowerusedforchillerheatrejectionsolongas
there is only one coil assigned to that WSE type. If additional coils are assigned to the same WSE type,
thesecanstillshareasinglebackupchiller,buttheeffectwillbeasthoughadditionalcopiesofthesame
coolingtowerareavailable(oneforeachcoil)solongastheloadonanyparticularcoilcanbemetbyan
instanceoftheWSE.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
97

Figure243:DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types)list
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
98
2.10.1 Watersideeconomizersettingsdialog
105B
Figure244:DedicatedWatersideeconomizer(types)editingdialog.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
99
Cooling tower
G
T2
T1
towb
Heat exchanger
mcoil
Key:
T1coil
T2coil
water
air
Cooling coil
tedb
tldb
ge
gl
Figure245:Watersideeconomizerconfiguration
2.10.1.1 Reference
2.10.1.2 Designcoolingtowerapproach
The difference between the cooling tower leaving water temperature (T2) and the outside wet bulb
temperature(towb)atthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.3 Designcoolingtowerrange
Thedifferencebetweenthecoolingtowerenteringwatertemperature(T1)andthecoolingtowerleaving
watertemperature(T2)atthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.4 Designoutsidewetbulbtemperature
Theoutsidewetbulbtemperatureatthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.5 Designcoolingtowerload
Theloadonthecoolingtower(andcoolingcoil)atthedesigncondition.Thisisusedtosizethewaterflow
ratesinthesystem.Appropriatesizingisessentialforaccuraterepresentationofthecoolingtower.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
100
2.10.1.6 Heatexchangereffectiveness
The effectiveness of the heat exchanger. This is defined with respect to the water loop with the lower
flow.
Ifthecoilloophasthelowerflow,theeffectivenessiscoil,definedby
T1coil=T2coil+coil(T2T2coil)
Ifthetowerloophasthelowerflow,theeffectivenessistower,definedby
T1=T2+tower(T2coilT2)
Here
T1isthetowerenteringwatertemperature
T2isthetowerleavingwatertemperature
T1coilisthecoilenteringwatertemperature
T2coilisthecoilleavingwatertemperature
coilandtowerareintheratiooftheflowsinthecoilandtowerloops.Theheatexchangeeffectiveness
parameteristhusthesmallerofthesetwoeffectivenesses.
2.10.1.7 CoolingcoildesignwaterdeltaT
Thedifferencebetweenthecoolingcoilleavingandenteringwatertemperatures(Tcoil2 andTcoil1)atthe
designcondition.This,togetherwiththedesigncoolingtowerload,isusedtosizethecoolingcoilwater
flow.
2.10.1.8 Coolingtowerdesignfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatfullspeed.
2.10.1.9 Lowspeedfanflowfraction
Thefractionofthedesignflowthatthecoolingtowerfandeliverswhenrunningatlowspeed.
2.10.1.10 Lowspeedfanpowerfraction
Thepowerconsumedbythecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatlowspeed,expressedasafractionofthe
coolingtowerdesignfanpower.
2.10.1.11 Designpumppower
Thedesignpowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerpump.Thepumpoperateswhenthesystemdelivers
cooling.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
101
2.10.1.12 Economizeroperatesonlywhenitcanmeettheloadinfull?
Whenthisboxistickedtheeconomizerisswitchedoffifitcannotmeetthecoilloadinfull.Thissettingis
currentlyforcedtotrue.
2.10.1.13 Backupchiller
Usethissettingtospecifyachillerprovidingbackuptothewatersideeconomizer.Iftheeconomizerhas
switchedoffbecauseitcannotmeetthefullload,andnobackupchillerisspecified,nocoolingoccurs.
2.11 DXCooling(types)
19B
ToolbariconforDXCooling(types)list.
ThisfacilitysupportsdefiningtheperformancecharacteristicsofoneormoreDXcoolingsources.
Theentitiesdefinedherearetypes.AsingleDXcoolingtypemaybeassignedtomanycoolingcoils.Atthe
timeofsimulationinstanceofthetypeisautomaticallycreatedforeachcoolingcoiltowhichthetypeis
assigned.InthisrespectDXcoolingcomponentsdifferfromchillers.
TheDXcoolingmodelsimulatestherefrigerantsideofaDXcoolingsystem.TheDXcoolingairside(the
coolingcoilorevaporator)ismodeledwiththecurrent(simple)ApacheHVACcoolingcoilmodel,usingthe
totalavailableDXcoolingcapacitycalculatedbytheDXcoolingmodel.Thismodelusesdefaultoruser
defined DX cooling performance characteristics at rated conditions and three performance curves to
determineDXcoolingperformanceatoffratedconditions.
ThethreeDXcoolingperformancecurvesare:
VE6.3
DXcoolingcapacity(temperaturedependence)curve
DXcoolingelectricinputratio(EIR)(tempdependence)curve
DXcoolingelectricinputratio(EIR)(partloaddependence)curve
ApacheHVAC
102
Figure246:DXCoolingeditdialog
The DX cooling model includes the compressor and outdoor (condenser) fan power and thus energy
consumption.Ifthecondensertypeissettobeevaporativelycooled,theDXCoolingmodelalsoaccounts
forspraypumppowerandenergyconsumption.Itdoesnotincludetheindoor(supply)fanpower.Supply
fansforDXcoolingsystemsmustbemodeledseparatelyusingtheApacheHVACfancomponent.
TheDXcoolingmodelcoversbothaircooledandevaporativecooledcondensers.Energyconsumptionby
condenser fans (and spray pumps if evaporativecooled) is included in the DX units Electric Input Ratio
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
103
(EIR) and associated performance curves. A condenser fan (and spray pump) Electric Input Ratio
(EIRfan/pump), representing the ratio of condenser fan power consumption to the total DX unit power
consumption,isusedtosplitthecalculatedenergyconsumptionintoseparateresultsforcompressorvs.
condenserfan(andspraypump).
AstheDXCoolingisaType,eachconnectedcoilgeneratesanothercopyoftheselectedtypeatthetime
ofsimulation.Iftheboxisticked(asitisbydefault)toallowthecoilcapacitytooverridetheRatedand
Design cooling capacity of the Type, the performance curves are scaled for each instance such that the
Rated/Designcapacityinthetypewill besetequal totheusersetorautosizedvaluein thecoildialog.
Therefore, the key bits of information in the Types dialog are really the curve selection and the COP
values, as the capacity is essentially scalable. This is particularly desirable when using a number of
autosizedcoils.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
104
2.12 UnitaryCoolingSystems(types)
20B
ToolbariconforUnitaryCoolingSystems(types)list.
Thisfacilitysupportsdefiningthecharacteristicsofoneormoreunitaryairconditioningsystems.
The entities defined here are types, rather than instances. A single unitary cooling system type may be
assigned to many cooling coils, and an instance of the component is automatically created for each
coolingcoiltowhichthetypeisassigned.Inthisrespectunitarycoolingsystemsdifferfromchillers.
Figure247:Unitarycoolingsystem(types)list
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
105

Figure248:Unitarycoolingsystem(types)editingdialog.
Theunitarycoolingsystemisaunitarysplitvaporcompressioncyclecoolingsystemservingonezone.It
consists of an outdoor aircooled condensing unit, a compressor and an indoor evaporator coil. On the
outdoorsidethereisaheatrejectionfanandontheindoorsideasupplyfan,whichisdownstreamofthe
evaporatorcoil.Thesystemdoesnotincorporateafreshairsupplyanditdoesnotprovideheating.
Ontheschematicaunitarycoolingsystemshouldbesetupbyplacingacoolingcoilinaloopcirculating
airthrougharoomandassigningasuitableunitarycoolingsystemtypetothecoolingcoil.Thesupplyfan
will then be placed automatically in the duct following the cooling coil, but it is not shown on the
schematic.
Intheintendedmodeofoperationthecompressorandbothfanscycletomaintainthedesiredroomset
point. While the system is on it delivers cooling at a rate determined by the outside air dry bulb
temperatureandtheconditionoftheairenteringtheevaporatorcoil.Thiscontrolregimeshouldbeset
upinApacheHVACbysettinganunattainablylowtemperaturesetpointforthecoolingcoil(forexample
0C)andmodulatingthecoilairflowonaproportionalbandinresponsetoroomtemperature.Theairflow
throughthecoilwillthenbeatimeaverage,whichisachievedintherealsystembyon/offcycling.
Other control regimes are possible, but deviation from the intended mode of operation may invalidate
theperformancemaponwhichthealgorithmdepends.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
106
ThedefaultdataforthiscomponentistakenfromASHRAE1402004[1],whichspecifiesaseriesoftests
forbuildingenergysimulationprograms.ThedatausedisfromTable26dofthestandard,wherethedata
isexpressedinIPunits.
2.12.1.1 Reference
2.12.1.2 Compressorfuelcode
Thefuelusedbythecompressor.ThiswillnormallybeElectricity,butotherfuels,suchasMiscellaneous
A,maysometimesbeappropriate.
2.12.1.3 Airflowrate
The flow rate through the evaporator coil under design conditions. The flow through the coil during
simulationmustbenogreaterthanthis.Whenitisless,theflowreductionisassumedtobeachievedon
atimeaveragebycyclingthefanoperation.
2.12.1.4 Scaleperformanceparameterswithdesignairflowrate?
If this box is ticked any change to the design airflow rate will cause all the performance parameters
expressed in power units to be scaled in proportion. This allows the performance of a similar unit of a
differentsizetobemodeledtoagoodapproximation.
2.12.2 UnitaryCoolingSystemPerformanceData
106B
This data defines a performance map describing the performance of the system under varying external
andoncoilconditions.Thevaluesmaybeeditedinthetable,andthenumberofrowsandcolumnsmay
beeditedusingtheAddandRemovebuttons.
2.12.2.1 ODB
Valuesofoutsidedrybulbtemperature
2.12.2.2 EWB
Values of evaporator coil entering (thermodynamic) wet bulb temperature at which the system
performanceisspecified.
2.12.2.3 Enteringdrybulbtemperature
Valuesofevaporatorcoilenteringdrybulbtemperatureatwhichthesystemperformanceisspecified.
2.12.2.4 GrossTotalCapacity
The total (sensible plus latent) cooling output of the evaporator coil when the system is operating at
capacity (that is, at design supply airflow)underconditionswhentheevaporatorcoiliswet. This is
referredtoasgrosstotalcapacitybecauseitisoffsetbythesupplyairfangain.Thisvaluedoesnotapply
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
107
whentheevaporatorcoilisdry,andinthiscasethegrosssensiblecapacityisequaltothegrosssensible
capacity.Adrycoilisindicatedbythefigureforgrosssensiblecapacitybeinggreaterthanthefigurefor
grosstotalcapacity.Ingeneral,interpolationoftheperformancemapisrequiredtodeterminewhether
thecoiliswetordry.Thisinterpolationisdoneautomaticallybythesimulationalgorithm.
2.12.2.5 GrossSensibleCapacity
Thesensiblecoolingoutputoftheevaporatorcoilwhenthesystemisoperatingatcapacity(designsupply
airflow).Aswithgrosstotalcapacity,thetermgrossisappliedbecausethecoolingeffectisoffsetbythe
supplyairfangain.
2.12.2.6 CompressorPower
Thepowerrequiredtodrivethecompressorwhenthesystemisoperatingatcapacity.
2.12.2.7 Useextrapolation?
If this box is ticked, which is the recommended setting, the program will extrapolate the performance
parameters gross total capacity, gross sensible capacity and compressor power when the operating
conditionliesoutsidetheboundsoftheperformancemap.Theextrapolationisappliedusingdatafrom
thecelloftheperformancemapthatliesclosesttotheoperatingcondition.Iftheboxisnottickedthe
performanceparametersaresettothoseatthenearestpointoftheperformancemap.
2.12.2.8 Heatrejectionfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionoftheoutdoorheatrejectionfan.Thisisaccountedforassystemelectricity.
2.12.2.9 Supplyfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionoftheindoorsupplyairfan.Alltheheatfromthesupplyfanisassumedtoenter
theairstream.Thisisaccountedforassystemelectricity.
2.12.2.10 LowloadCOPrdegradationfactor
Atpartload,whenthesupplyfaniscycling,thereisadegradationofsystemefficiency.Thisismodeled
usingadegradationfactorappliedtotherefrigerationcoefficientofperformance,COPr,definedby
COPr=(grosstotalcoilload)/(compressorpower)
Atpartload,COPrisreducedbyaloaddependentmultiplicativeCOPrdegradationfactor,CDF:
COPr=COPrfull*CDF
whereCOPrfullisthevalueofCOPratfullload(foragivenoutsideandoncoilcondition).
CDFisassumedtobealinearfunctionofpartloadratio,PLR:
CDF=CDF0+(1CDF0)*PLR
wherePLRisdefinedas
VE6.3
PLR=(grosstotalcoilload)/(grosstotalcoilcapacity)
ApacheHVAC
108
and CDF0 is a dimensionless constant with a value in the range (0,1) the low load COPr degradation
factor.
TheCOPrdegradationfactoralsohasaneffecton fanpowerconsumptionandsupplyairfangain.This
effect is modeled by assuming that the COPr degradation is due to a startup period preceding each
operational period, during which the evaporator coil attains its equilibrium value and effectively
contributesnothingtocooling.Duringthisstartupperiodthecompressor,andboththesupplyandheat
rejectionfans,areassumedtobeon.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
109
2.13 HeatingCoils
Toolbariconforplacementofaheatingcoil.
Heatingcoilcomponent.
2.13.1.1 Reference
Figure249:Heatingcoildialog
2.13.1.2 HeatSource
Eachheatingcoilspecifiedinthenetworkmustbeconnectedtoaheatsourcefromtheheatsourceslist.
2.13.1.3 MaximumDuty
Enter the maximum duty of the heater coils. The program will limit the output from the coil to this
maximum capacity, even if the controls are calling for more. In cases where there is no proportional
control,theoutputwillbesettothisvaluewhenevertheon/offcontrolofthecoilison.
WarningLimits(kW)
ErrorLimits(kW)
VE6.3
0.5to250.0
0.01to9999.0
ApacheHVAC
110
2.14 CoolingCoils
21B
Toolbariconforplacementofacoolingcoil.
Coolingcoilcomponent.
2.14.1 Background
107B
ApacheHVACprovidestwolevelsofcoolingcoilmodelsforuseinHVACsystems.ASimplecoolingcoil
modelusesasimplifiedapproachtodeterminingcoilheattransfercharacteristicsandassumesconstant
watersidetemperaturechangethroughthecoil.AnAdvancedmodelmoreexplicitlymodelsbothairside
andwatersideheattransferprovidingamoredetailedandaccuratecalculationofcoilheattransferand
corresponding airside/waterside properties. This includes modeling the coil in for dry (sensible), wet
(latent),andpartialdry/wetconditions.TheAdvancedmodelprovidesthenecessarymodelingdetailto
support explicit waterside modeling contained in Chilled Water Loop configurations. The Advanced
modelalsoprovidesmoredetailedcoilspecificationmethodssothatcoilsmaybebettersizedorselected
from manufacturer data for specific HVAC system configurations. This facilitates more accurate
determinationcoildesignandoffdesignperformance.
Both Simple and Advanced cooling coil models are accessed through the cooling coil icon tool bar icon
andthecoolingcoildialog.AHVACsystemconfigurationcancontainbothSimpleandAdvancedmodes,
however,multiplexedsystemsmustonlycontainmodelsofthesametype(i.e.,allSimpleORallAdvanced
models).
Simple models can be served by Chilled Water Loops, Unitary cooling systems, Waterside economizers,
andDXcoolingsystems.AdvancedmodelscanonlybeservedbyChilledWaterLoopssystems.
2.14.2 SimpleModel
108B
TheSimplemodelisthedefaultcoolingcoilmodel.TheSimplemodelonlyrequiresatmostthreeinput
valuestosetthecoilperformance:Contactfactor,Coolingcapacity,andOversizingfactor.TheSimpleis
recommendedearlyinthedesignprocesswhendetailedcoildataorperformanceisnotrequired.
2.14.3 AdvancedModel
109B
The Advanced model is more detailed and accurate characterization of the heat transfer process of a
coolingcoil.TheAdvancedmodelusesmoredetailedcoildesignparameterspecificationandenhanced
heattransfermodelingcapability.OneofthefeaturesoftheAdvancedmodelistheabilitytodesign(i.e.,
size) the cooling coil for the specific HVAC system application. In this context, size refers to
determining the coil heat transfer characteristics at a design point. With these design point
characteristics, the cooling coil can then be more accurately modeled at both design and offdesign
operatingconditions.Toprovideuserflexibilitytwosizingmethods(modes)areavailable:Autosizingand
Manual.
Inthefirstmode,Autosizing,theuserspecifiesthecoilContactfactor(similartotheSimplemodel)and
thenmayinvoketheSystemSizingprocesstodeterminetheremainingairsideparametersnecessaryto
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
111
sizethecoil.Inthesecondmode,Manualsizing,theuserspecifiesbothairside/watersideconditions(and
thecoilContactfactorisdeterminedfromtheseparameters).Notethatforbothsizingmodes,although
coilcontactfactorisspecificordeterminedatthedesignpoint,inthesimulationcontactfactorwillvary
ascoiloperatingconditionschange.Thisabilitytomodelcoiloffdesignperformanceisakeyfeatureof
theAdvancedcoilmodel.Moredetailsonthetwosizingmodesisprovidedbelow.
An Advanced model dialog facilitates the two design sizing approaches by immediately sizing the
coolingcoilforthecurrentstateofdesignsizinginputs.Typicaldefaultcoildesignvaluesareprovidedfor
bothAutosizingandManualmodes. Editingadesignparameter willautomaticallyand instantlyresize
thecoil,andthenewsizingparametersimmediatelydisplayed.ASizingstatusmessageboxindicatesthe
state of the sizing process including error conditions resulting from outofrange or inconsistent input
parameters.
For each sizing mode, there are a set of derived parameters that are calculated upon user edit of any
designparameter.Forexample,inAutosizemodetheusersets(orcanrelyonSystemSizingdata)the
entering airflow, entering air dry and wetbulb temperatures, the leaving dry bulb temperature, and
contact factor. The resulting leaving air wetbulb temperature, chilled water loop flow, and cooling
capacityareinstantlycalculatedanddisplayed.If,forexample,theresultingcoolingcapacityistoolow,
theusermightincreasetheairmassflowormodifythecontactfactortoachievegreatercooling.
InManualmode,theuserhasfullcapabilitytosetallthedesignparametersontheairsideandwaterside
ofthecoil.Fromthesedesignparameters,theresultingcoilcontactfactor,chilledwaterflowrate,and
coolingcapacityarecalculatedanddisplayed.Again,ifforexample,thecoolingcapacityistoolow,the
usermightinputahigherairmassflow.
Switching between the two design sizing modes is simply done by selecting the desired sizing mode
button. The default dialogue mode is to only show the design parameter set for the selected mode,
however, the user can display both modes data by specifying the Display mode to both. Finally, the
usercanholdautosizedvalueswhentheyswitchtoManualmode.
2.14.4 AutosizingMode
110B
The Autosizing mode is designed to give the ease of specifying a single cooling coil design parameter
coupledwiththeSystemSizingfeaturetocompletetherequireddesigninputsfortheAdvancedcoil.In
Autosizingmode,theusersetsthecoilContactfactor,theninvokestheSystemSizingprocesstopopulate
the remainder of the airside parameters. These parameters, combined with the input Contact factor,
complete the design point specification for the cooling coil. In addition, prior to or after System Sizing
datahasbeenobtained,theusermayalsochangeanyoftheautosizedparameters(orContactfactor)at
anypointtosetanewcoildesignpoint.
2.14.5 ManualMode
111B
IncontrasttoAutosizingmode,Manualsizingmodeallowstheusertoinputallthenecessaryairsideand
watersideconditionsthatsetthecoolingcoildesignpoint.Manualmodehastwobasicapproaches.One
is to allow input of a manufacturer specified (i.e., catalogue) cooling coil. In this case, the cooling coil
usedintheHVACsystemmodelwillcorrespondtoanactualphysicalcoil.NotetheManualsizingdesign
parameters correspond to those typically found in manufacturer data sheets to facilitate this
specification. The second approach is to allow the user to design their own cooling coil in order to
understandtheimpactofthedesignparametersontheoverallsystem.Withtheinteractivefunctionality
oftheAdvancedmodeldialog,thisinformationisgivenimmediatelytotheuser.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
112
2.14.6 CoolingCoilDialogs
112B
Therearetwocoolingcoildialogs,eachspecifictothetypeofcoilmodeldesired.TheSimplecoilmodel
is the default when selecting a cooling coil from the toolbar. The Simple coil model dialogs are shown
belowcorrespondingtothetypesofsystemsthatservethecoil.
Figure250:Simplecoolingcoilmodeldialogwithcoilservedbychilledwaterloop
Figure 251: Simple cooling coil dialog with coil served by a dedicated waterside economizer (this is
distinctfromtheWSEmodeavailableforchillersetsincludingwatercooledchillersonachilledwater
loop)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
113

Figure252:Simplecoolingcoildialog(coilservedbyDXcooling)
Figure253:Simplecoolingcoilmodeldialog(coilservedbyunitarycoolingsystem)
TheusermayselecttheAdvancedcoilmodelfromtheSimplemodeldialog.Onceselected,theAdvanced
model dialog will open automatically upon selecting the particular coil. The Advanced model dialog is
shownbelowforbothAutosizingandManualsizingmodes.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
114

Figure254:Advancedmodelcoolingcoildialog:Autosizingmode(notethatthedisplayformatsettingat
thebottomofthedialogallowsforbothmodestobeshownatonce,ifdesired).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
115

Figure255:Advancedmodelcoolingcoildialog:Manualsizingmode(notethatthedisplayformatsetting
atthebottomofthedialogallowsforbothmodestobeshownatonce,ifdesired).
TheupperportionofboththeSimpleandAdvancedmodeldialogscontaininformationforspecifyingthe
reference name, coil model type, and system type serving the coil. The lower section of the dialog
contains the Design sizing parameters appropriate for each model type. Detailed descriptions of these
parametersareprovidedbelow.
2.14.6.1 Reference
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
116
2.14.6.2 CoilModeltype
CoilmodeltypemaybeeitherSimpleorAdvanced.
2.14.6.3 Systemtype
Selectasystemservingthecoilfromthoseavailableonthelist.
2.14.6.4 Systemname
SelectadefinedsystemoftheSystemtypespecified.
2.14.7 DesignSizingParametersforSimpleCoilModel
113B
2.14.7.1 CoilContactFactor(ifcoilservedbyChilledWaterLoop,Watersideeconomizer,orDX)
DefaultValue
TypicalValues
ErrorLimits
0.91CWL,0.85DX
0.70to0.95
0.01to1.0
Thecontactfactorisusedtodescribethewayairflowsoverthecoil,andisusedtocalculatethebalance
of sensible to latent heat removal of the air passing over the coil. The contact factor specifies what
proportionofthetotalairflowiscontactedbythecoilandsofollowsanidealpsychrometricprocessof
coolingalongaconstantmoisturecontentlineuntilthesaturationcurveismet,andthenfollowingthe
saturation line. The balance of the airflow is assumed to be unaffected by the cooling coil but is then
mixedwiththecooledairuponleavingthecoil.
Typicalvaluesofcontactfactorareintherange0.70.95.Foragivenflowrate,highercontactfactorswill
tendtobeassociatedwithcoilsthateitherhavemorerowsoffinsoralargerfacearea,andthuslower
facevelocity.Ahighercontactfactorhastheadvantageofachievingthedesiredleavingairtemperature
(LAT) with relatively warmer water from the chiller. As the contact factor is reduced, the required coil
temperature, and thus also water temperature, is lower, which has implications for chiller operating
efficiency and chilledwater reset controls. On the other hand, a low contact factor also has the same
effectasintentionallybypassingsomeoftheairaroundthecoilsothatthecoolingcoilcanbeoperatedat
averylowtemperatureformaximumdehumidification,andthenmixingthebypassfractionwiththevery
dryairoffthecoiltogetafinalLAT.Whilethebypassairisobviouslyalsomorehumid,thenetresultwill
be a lower leaving wetbulb temperature (WBT) for the same drybulb LATi.e., greater wetbulb
depression. This can be readily seen in ApacheHVAC system simulation results for higher and lower
coolingcoilcontactfactorsinahumidclimate.
2.14.7.2 Coolingcapacity(ifcoilservedbyChilledwaterloop,watersideeconomizer,orDX)
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
200.00kW
0.50to250.00kW
0.05to1000.00kW
682.43kBTU/h
1.71to853.04kBTU/h
0.17to3412.14kBTU/h
Enter the maximum duty of the cooling coils. The simulation will limit the output from the coil to this
maximum capacity, even if the controls are calling for more. In cases where there is no proportional
control,theoutputdevicewillbesettothisvaluewhenevertheon/offcontrolofthecoilison.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
117
2.14.7.3 Oversizingfactor(allsystemtypes)
Specifythefactorbywhichthecoolingcoilcapacityisincreasedrelativetothepeakcalculatedvalue.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
1.15
1.00to1.50
0.00to5.00
2.14.7.4 Unitarysystem(ifcoilservedbyunitarycoolingsystem)
When a unitary cooling system model is assigned to the cooling coil, this model includes a supply fan
downstream of the cooling coil that is not shown on the schematic. The parameters of this fan are
definedinthepropertiesoftheunitarycoolingsystem.SeeUnitaryCoolingSystemssection.
2.14.8 DesignSizingParametersforAdvancedCoilModel
114B
2.14.8.1 Sizingstatus
TheSizingstatusmessageboxprovidesinformationonthestateofthecoilsizingprocess.Thisincludes
error messages for outofrange or inconsistent design parameters. A summary of the Sizing status
messagesisprovidedbelow.
CoolingCoilAdvancedModel
SizingStatusSummary
SizingMode
Autosizing
Status
Manual
Comment
Status
Comment
Requiredinputvalues
havebeenentered.
ReadyforManualSizing
Requiredinputvalueshave
beenentered.
Autosizingcomplete
Coilhasbeensizedusing
autosizedparameters.
Calculationsuccessful
Coilhasbeensizedwithinput
values.
NotPossible:
EnteringWBTtoo
low
EnteringairWB
temperatureistoolow
forthecorresponding
enteringDBtemperature
NotPossible:Entering
WBTtoolow
EnteringairWBtemperature
istoolowforthe
correspondingenteringDB
temperature
NotPossible:Leaving
WBTtoolow
LeavingairWBtemperatureis
toolowforthecorresponding
leavingDBtemperature
EnteringairWB
temperatureisgreater
thantheenteringairDB
temperature
WBT>EnteringDBT
EnteringairWBtemperature
isgreaterthantheenteringair
DBtemperature
NotPossible:Leaving
WBT>LeavingDBT
LeavingairWBtemperatureis
greaterthantheleavingairDB
temperature
ReadyforAutosizing
NotPossible:
EnteringWBT>
EnteringDBT
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
118
NotPossible:
EnteringDBT<
LeavingCWL
temperature
EnteringairDB
temperaturemustbe
lowerthantheleaving
ChilledWaterLoop
temperature
DBT<LeavingCWL
temperature
EnteringairDBtemperature
mustbelowerthanthe
leavingChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:
LeavingDBT<
EnteringCWL
temperature
LeavingairDB
temperaturemustbe
lowerthantheentering
ChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:Leaving
DBT<EnteringCWL
temperature
LeavingairDBtemperature
mustbelowerthanthe
enteringChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:
Conditionsnot
consistentwith
inputContact
factor
Theinputairside
conditionswillnotyield
acoolingprocess
consistentwiththeinput
Contactfactor.
NotPossible:
Conditionsnot
feasibleforcooling
onlyprocess
Theinputairsideconditions
arenotfeasibleforacooling
onlyprocess,i.e.,theexiting
airwouldhavetobeheatedto
reachthedesiredcombination
ofDBT/WBT.
2.14.8.2 Airflowrate
Air flow rate is the volumetric air flow entering the coil. Air flow rate must be specified in both
Autosizing/Manualmodes.InAutozingmode,peakairflowratecanbedeterminedbytheSystemSizing
process. When an autosized air flow rate is displayed, the value will be indicated in green with a A.
However, air flow rate still be edited from the autosized values (the value will return to black with
corresponding A). Note that this air flow rate is only used in for determining the coil heat transfer
parameters and not used by any flow controllers associated with the HVAC system on which the coil
resides.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
9438.95l/s
94.39to14158.42l/s
0.00to474500.00l/s
20000.00CFM
200to30000CFM
0.00to1,000,000.00CFM
2.14.8.3 Enteringairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperatures
Entering air dry (DB) and wetbulb (WB) temperatures are the air stream conditions entering the coil.
ThesetemperaturesmustbespecifiedinbothAutosizing/Manualmodes.InAutozingmode,peakdesign
values for these temperatures can be determined by the System Sizing process. When autosized
temperaturesaredisplayed,thevaluewillbeindicatedingreenwithaA.However,thetemperatures
canstillbeeditedfromtheautosizedvalues(thevalueswillreturntoblackwithcorrespondingA).
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
26.67C
15.00to50.00C
0.00to100.00C
80.00F
60.00to120.00F
32.00to212.00F
2.14.8.4 Leavingairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperatures
Leavingairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperaturesaretheconditionsoftheairsteamexitingthecoil.
Leaving air DB temperature must be specified in both Autosizing/Manual modes. In Autosizing mode,
required leaving air DB temperature to meet the system load can be determined by the System Sizing
process. When an autosized temperature is displayed, the value will be indicated in green with a A.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
119
However,thetemperaturecanstillbeeditedfrom theautosizedvalues(thevalueswillreturn toblack

withcorrespondingA).
In Autosize mode, the leaving air WB temperature is calculated from other entered parameters (i..e.,
Contactfactor)andnoneditable.InManualmode,leavingairWBtemperaturemustbespecified.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
19.44C
5.00to40.00C
0.00to100.00C
67.00F
40.00to100.00F
32.00to212.00F
2.14.8.5 CoilContactFactor
The coil Contact factor is as described in Section 2.10.3.5. In Autosizing mode, Contact factor is a user
input. In Manual mode, Contact factor is calculated from the specified airside parameters. In Manual
mode, if the user specifies a set of airside parameters that require a process not achievable by cooling
alone (i.e., reheat would be needed to achieve the air leaving conditions), the Contact factor will
indicatedasNotFeasible.
DefaultValue
TypicalValues
ErrorLimits
0.91
0.70to0.95
0.01to1.0
2.14.8.6 Chilledwaterloopsupplytemperature
Chilled water loop supply temperature is the design chilled water temperature entering the coil. In
Autosizemode,thisvalueislinkedtothecorrespondingChilledwaterloopsupplytemperature(seeCWL
section xxx) serving the coil and noneditable. In Manual mode, this value is editable, however, the
editedvalueislocaltothecoolingcoilanddoesnotaffectthecorrespondingChilledwaterloopspecified
value.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
6.67C
2.00to18.00C
0.00to100.00C
44.00F
34.00to62.00F
32.00to212.00F
2.14.8.7 Chilledwaterloopdeltatemperature
Chilledwaterloopsupplydeltatemperatureisthedesignchilledwatertemperaturerisethroughthecoil.
In Autosize mode, this value is linked to the corresponding Chilled water loop delta temperature (see
Chilled Water Loop section 2.4.10) serving the coil and noneditable. In Manual mode, this value is
editable, however, the edited value is local to the cooling coil and does not affect the corresponding
Chilledwaterloopspecifiedvalue.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
6.67K
4.00to8.00K
0.00to16.67K
12.00F
8.00to14.00F
0.00to30.00F
2.14.8.8 Chilledwaterloopflowrate
Chilledwaterloopflowrateisthedesignchilledwaterflowrateservingthecoil.Thisvalueiscalculated
from the other coil design sizing parameters. Note that this value is adjusted by the Oversizing factor
specified. In the simulation, the necessary chilled water flow rate is determined by the coil model to
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
120
meettherelevantcontrolrequirements.However,thesimulationwilllimitthechilledwaterflowrateto
thecoilatthisvalueeveniftheassociatedcontrolrequirementsaregreater.
2.14.8.9 Coolingcapacity
Coolingcapacityisthedesignheattransfercapacityofthecoil.Thisvalueiscalculatedfromtheother
coildesignsizingparameters.NotethatthisvalueisadjustedbytheOversizingfactorspecified.
2.14.8.10 Oversizingfactor
The factor by which the coil design values chilled water flow rate and cooling capacity are increased
relativetotheautosizedvalues.Airsideparameters(flowrate,enteringairDBtemperature,enteringair
WBtemperature,leavingairDBtemperature,andleavingairWBtemperature)areNOTadjustedbythe
oversizingfactor.
Thecoildesignheattransferwiththeoversizingfactoris:
m
m
,
,
Oversizing factor
TheoversizingfactorisonlypertinenttotheAutosizingmodetoallowtheusertooversizethecoilfrom
anautosizeddesignvalues.FortheManualsizingmode,nooversizingfactorisnecessarysincethecoil
designparameterscanbesetdirectlytoconsideradditionalcapacityifdesired.
DefaultValues
TypicalRange
ErrorLimits
1.15
1.00to1.50
0.00to5.00
2.14.8.11 HoldAutosizingParameters?
The Hold autosizing parameters? tick box is provided so that if switching between Autosizing and
Manualsizingmodes,thecurrentsetofautosizedvalueswillbeheld.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
121
2.14.8.12 AdvancedModelDesignParametersSummary
TheAdvancedmodeldesignparametersforAutosizeandManualsizingmodesaresummarizedbelow.
CoolingCoilAdvancedModel
DesignParametersSummary
SizingMode
CoilDesign
Parameter
Autosizing
Status
Airflowrate
AutosizedValue
Editable
EnteringairDB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
EnteringairWB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
LeavingairDB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
LeavingairWB
temperature
DerivedValue
NonEditable
Manual
Comment
Editablebefore/after
SystemSizing
Editablebefore/after
SystemSizing
Dialoguewillcheck
forerrorsand
consistency
Status
UserInput
Editable
Comment
UserInput
Editable
UserInput
Editable
Dialoguewillcheckfor
errorsandconsistency
UserInput
Editable
UserInput
Editable
Dialoguewillcheck
forerrorsand
consistency
Contactfactor
UserInput
Editable
Chilledwatersupply
temperature
FromCWL
NonEditable
Chilledwaterloop
deltaT
FromCWL
NonEditable
Chilledwaterflow
rate
DerivedValue
NonEditable
DerivedValue
NonEditable
Coolingcapacity
DerivedValue
NonEditable
DerivedValue
NonEditable
Oversizingfactor
UserInput
Editable
UserInput
Editable
Holdautosizing
parameters?
UserSelected
DerivedValue
Noneditable
UserInput
Editable
Editablebuteditsare
limitedtothecoilmodel
only,i.e.,donotalterthe
CWLvaluesenteredinthe
CWLdialog.Dialoguewill
checkforerrorsand
consistency
UserInput
Editable
Autosizedparameters
willbeheldasthe
userswitches
betweenAutosizeand
Manualsizingmodes.
NotApplicable
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
122
2.15 SprayChamber
22B
The spray chamber is assumed to follow an adiabatic saturation process with fixed efficiency. The
efficiency defines the ratio between the actual moisture takeup of the air relative to the maximum
possible(i.e.fromoncoilairconditiontothesaturatedconditionatthesameenthalpy).Thiscanalsobe
thoughtofassaturationeffectiveness,orhowclosetheunitisabletocometoprovidingfullysaturated
air.
Toolbariconforplacementofaspraychamber.
Spraychambercomponent.
Notethatsprayhumidifierseitherrunwildorareoff,i.e.itisnotpossibletocontrolmoistureinputoroff
coilconditions.
2.15.1 Reference
115B
Figure256:Spraychamberdialog
2.15.2 SprayEfficiency
116B
Thespraychamberisassumedtofollowanadiabaticsaturationprocess.Theefficiencydefinestheratio
betweentheactualmoisturetakeupoftheairpassingthroughtheunitrelativetothemaximumpossible
(i.e.,fromonairconditiontothesaturatedconditionatthesameenthalpy).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
123
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
50.0to100.0
5.0to100.0
2.15.3 CirculationPumpElectricalPower
117B
Thespraydeviceitselfwillconsumeenergy,aswellasaffectingtheaircondition.Forexample,thespray
chambermaywellhaveacirculatingpump,whosepowerconsumptionshouldbespecified.Thispumpis
assumedtobeoperatingwhenthehumidifierisoperating.
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to99.0
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
124
2.16 SteamHumidifiers
Steamhumidifiersmayreceiveheatinputeitherfromaremoteheatsourceorbylocalelectricheating.
Condensationinthedownstreamductmaybepreventedbyspecifyingamaximumdownstreamrelative
humidity.
Toolbariconforplacementofasteamhumidifier.
Steamhumidifiercomponent.
2.16.1.1 Reference
Figure257:Steamhumidifierdialog
2.16.1.2 MaximumOutput
Enterthemaximumrateofmoistureinputfromthesteamhumidifierstotheairstream.
WarningLimits(kg/s)
ErrorLimits(kg/s)
VE6.3
0.005to1.0
0.001to5.0
ApacheHVAC
125
2.16.1.3 TotalEfficiency
Enterthetotalefficiencyofthesteamhumidifiers.Thisparameterisusedtorelatethetotalheatinputto
theairstreamtotheenergyusedtogeneratethatinput(i.e.itisusedtotaketheenergyinputtotheair
streambacktoaprimaryenergyconsumption.)
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
65.0to100.0
20.0to100.0
2.16.1.4 MaximumRelativeHumidity
In actual applications, steam injection is normally limited to avoid the risk of condensation in the
downstreamduct.ThisRHhighlimitcutoutvalueshouldbeenteredhere.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
70.0to95.0
50.0to100.0
2.16.1.5 SteamHumidifierHeatSource
A steam humidifier may be supplied with steam from a heat source. If this is the case then enter the
referenceoftheheatsource.Ifyoudonotselectaheatsourcethehumidifieruseslocalelectricheating.
2.17 HeatRecoveryDevices
23B
Inordertoenablearangeofdifferentdevicetypestobemodeled,afairlysimplerepresentationofthe
heat recovery process has been used. This describes the sensible and latent heat recovery potential in
termsofdeviceeffectiveness(seeASHRAEhandbookfordefinitionandtypicalvalues).
Heat recovery devices can be controlled only as a function of exiting drybulb temperature. In other
words, the 'variable being controlled' must be drybulb temperature. For either enthalpy recovery or
modelingofadesiccantdriedbyaheatsource,seethesectiononLatentHeatEffectivenessbelow.Inthe
latter case, a heating coil is required to properly model the drying of the desiccant, and thus the
undesirabletransferofsensibleheatinthedirectionoppositetothelatentheat.
Itisimportantalsotonotealsothatthisistheonecomponentthathastwodownstreamnodesthatcan
becontrolled:oneatthetopandoneatthebottomofthecomponent.However,youmustpickjustone
ofthesetwoairstreamsforthecontrolpoint.
Ifyourequiretheheatrecoverydevicetobefullon,controlthedownstreamnodeofthesupplysidetoa
high temperature by entering an unachievable high target temperature, such as 100, in the value for
maximumcontrolsignal.Ifyouintendtorecovercoolthfromanexhaustairstream,itisgenerallybest
to do so by controlling the leaving exhaust air exit node to an unachievable high target, such that heat
transferperformancewillbelimitedonlybytheeffectivenessparameters.
Toolbariconforplacementofheatrecovery.
Heatrecovery
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
126
2.17.1.1 Reference
Figure258:Heatrecoverydialog
2.17.1.2 SensibleHeatEffectiveness
Enterthesensibleheateffectiveness.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
30.0to90.0
0.0to100.0
2.17.1.3 LatentHeatEffectiveness
Enterthelatentheateffectiveness.Notethatanegativelatenteffectivenessispermitted,butshouldbe
usedonlyinthecaseofmodelingadesiccantthatisbeingactivelydriedorregenerated,thusallowing
latentenergytobetransferredinanuphilldirection.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
60to90.0
100.0to100.0
2.17.1.4 ElectricalPowerConsumedWhenOperating
Enter the electrical power consumed when operating. This might be the pump power for a runaround
coil,themotorpowerforathermalwheel,etc.
WarningLimits(kW)
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.0to15.0
0.0to9999.0
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
127
2.18 Fans
The fan module is used to determine the required fan power at a given flow rate, and thus energy
consumptionofthefan,andtoaccountforthetemperatureriseintheairstream.
Toolbariconforplacementofleftandrightintakefans.
Leftandrightintakefancomponents.
Thefancomponentdoesnotactivelyinfluencetheflowrate;thevaluesenteredheredonotdetermine
airflow through the system. Rather, these values are used solely to calculate the consequential energy
consumptionandeffectonairtemperatureatagivenflowrate.
Pressure,inthiscase,referstothetotalstaticpressure(internalplusexternal)tobeovercomebythefan.
Efficiencyincludesboththemechanicalefficiencyofthefanandtheelectricalefficiencyofthemotorand
associated power electronics (e.g., a variablespeed drive). For variablevolume systems, the flow,
pressure,andefficiencycharacteristicsneedtobedefinedatmultiplepointsonthefancurve.
Figure259:FandialogwithillustrativeinputsforanASHRAE90.1baselinefan
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
128
Thecombinationofflow,pressure,andefficiencyisusedduringthesimulationtocalculatetheelectrical
powerconsumptionandfanheatinputtotheairstreamasfollows:
Power =
Flow Pressure
1000 Efficiency
Where
Flowisairflowinkg/s
Pressure is the pressure resistance against which the fan has to work in Pa at Flowtypically
between50and200Paforlocalfansandbetween500and2000Paforductedfans.
istheairdensity
Efficiencyisthetotal(mechanical+electrical)fanefficiency
ElectricalEnergyConsumption =
VolumeFlowRateTotalPressure
TotalEfficiency
Energyloss=Electricalpower(1Efficiency)
Fanheatpickup=Electricalpower(1Efficiency)Airstreamheatpickup%
Where
Poweriselectricityconsumptionascalculatedinthefirstfanequation,above.
Efficiencyistotalcombinedefficiencyatagivenflowrateforboththefanandmotor.
Airstreamheatpickupisthefractionoftotalfanandmotorlossesthatgointotheairstream.
Itisimportanttorealizethatthefancurvedatamustaccountforthesystemlayout(totalpressure)and
the type of airflow and fan controls. For example, the same fan would performance depending on
whether it is controlled by a downstream damper or by variablespeed drive. In the system with speed
control,thepressureeitherwilldropwithfloworwillbemaintainedataconstantvalueasthebasisfor
fan speed control (in either case, power and heat will fall with flow); whereas the dampercontrolled
systemwillhaveroughlyconstantspeed,andthereforethepressuremustriseasflowisreduced.
2.18.1.1 Reference
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
129
2.18.1.2 AirstreamHeatPickup
Dependingonwhetherthefanmotorisintheairstreamornot,therewillbeagreaterorsmallerheat
pickupbytheairacrossthefan.Forfanswhosemotorislocatedintheairstream,afigureof100%should
beused.Forfanswherethemotorisnotlocatedintheairstream,thiswillbelessthan100%.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
10.0to100.0
0.0to100.0
2.18.1.3 Flow
Enterthefanflowrate.Uptofivepointsmaybedefinedonthefancharacteristiccurve.
WarningLimits(l/s)
ErrorLimits(l/s)
0.0to25000.0
0.0to900000.0
2.18.1.4 Pressure
Enterthetotalfanstaticpressureatthisflowrate,includingbothinternalpressure(resultingfromfilters,
coils,andotherairhandlercomponents)andexternalpressure(fromductwork,terminalunits,etc.).
WarningLimits(Pa)
ErrorLimits(Pa)
150.0to2000.0
10.0to90000.0
2.18.1.5 Efficiency
Enterthefantotalefficiencyatthisflowrate.Thisfigureisusedtocalculatetheelectricalconsumptionof
the fan at any instant, by dividing the work done on the air by the efficiency. The value entered here
shouldbetheproductoftheefficienciesoftheimpeller,drive,andmotor.
WarningLimits(%)
ErrorLimits(%)
25.0to90.0
10.0to99.0
2.19 MixingDamperSet
24B
ToolbariconforplacementofaMixingDamper.
MixingDamperSetcomponentontheairsideHVACnetwork.
Themixingdampercontrolsflowfromtheleftinletbranchasapercentageofthemixedairflow,subject
to a preset minimum. The minimum can be scheduled or modulated by a timeswitch profile in the
dampercomponentdialog.Acontrollerthenmodulatesflowfromtheleftbranchvs.bottombranchasa
percentage of the outlet flow rate or in an attempt to achieve a target mixedair temperature. Typical
applications include outside air economizers, demandcontrolled ventilation, and bypass dampers for
heatrecovery, indirect evaporative cooling, heat pipes, coils with high static pressure, or similar
componentswithinanairhandler.Forexample,VAVsystemswithoutsideaireconomizers(variablefresh
aircontrol)andminimumventilation(outsideair)requirementsrequireadamperatthefreshairinlet.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
130
The minimum flow from the left branch is entered in the damper component dialog, and can be
scheduledandevenmodulatedviathemodulatingprofilereferencedinthisdialog.
Figure 260: Mixing damper set dialog (top) and associated controller dialog (bottom) as set up for
modulatingthedampertoatargetmixedairdrybulbtemperatureforatypicaloutsideaireconomizer.
NotethatthecontrolleralsohasanANDreferencetoadependentcontrollerwithsensorthatprovides
a similar outdoor air dewpoint temperature high limit. In this example, the controller will modulate
the damper, mixingoutsideair andreturnair togetasclose asitcantoachievinga targetmixedair
temperatureof55F.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
131
Inthecaseofoutsideaireconomizerdamperapplications,theflowintothelefthandbranchissubjectto
theminimumvaluespecifiedbytheMinimumflowparameter,withthreeexceptions:
Theflowfromtheleftbranchwillbelessthanthe setminimumwhenthe totaldemandfor

outflow(mixedair)islessthantheminimumoutsideairvalue.Inthiscase,theflowintothe
lefthandbranchissimplyequaltotheoutflowatanygiventimestep.
The flow on the lefthand inlet branch will be increased above the minimum, such as in the
caseofairsideeconomizerfreecooling,CO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV),as
determined by a controller pointed to the downstream (mixedair) node of the damper set.
Thecontrolledvariableforeconomizeroperationisnormallyatargetmixedairtemperature,
for DCV it is usually a percentage flow. See the DCV examples illustrated below for systems
thatcombineOAeconomizerandDCVoperation.
An RA Damper component connected to the vertical (bottom) inlet branch on the Mixing
Damperwilloverridethesetminimumoutsideairwhenthetotaldemandforsupplyairatthe
mixedairnodeexceedsthetotalofavailablereturnairplustheminimumOA.Thisisintended
mainly for use in building, such as laboratories, for which there are multiple means of
exhaust/extract from spaces served by the system. While it would be possible to create a
detailed schedule for the minimum OA makeup air requirement, this is not necessary at the
systemOAdamper,solongastheairbalanceisalwaysprovidedforatthezonelevel.
TheMixingDamperisusedtodeterminethefractionofdownstreamflowdemandthatisdrawnfromthe
leftinletbranchvs.thebottominletbranch.Themixingdampercomponentcanbeusedonlywheretotal
flow at the mixedair (outlet) is determined downstream of the damper set, and not where flow is
otherwise determined on either upstream branch. In other words, while flow paths, sources, and
conditionscanbedeterminedupstreamofamixingdamper,andmixingdamperscanbeusedinseries,
the actual airflow volume at the downstream node of a mixing damper must be determined on a
downstream branch. Configurations for which flow is otherwise determined on either inlet branch
upstreamofthemixingdamperwillpassanetworkcheck,butwillnotrunatsimulationtime.Therefore,
thiscomponentwill,inmostcases,beusedonlyatornearthesysteminlet.
When the controllers profile is on, the damper set component modulates the flow into its lefthand
branch(normallythefreshairinlet)eithertoapercentageoftheflowleavingthedeviceortogetasclose
as it can to a target mixedair temperature. The leaving flow rate will have been determined by flow
demandsdownstream.
Thetimeswitchprofilewithinthecontrollerthatiscontrollingthedampermodulationisinterpretedas
anon/offswitch,ONwhentheprofilevalueisgreaterthan50%andOFFotherwise.Thisisincontrastto
thebehaviorofatimeswitchprofileusedeithertoscheduleortomodulatetheminimumflowontheleft
branchorwhenavolumeflowcontroller.
PercentageflowcontrolcanbeappliedonlytomixingdampersetsanddivergentTjunctions(whichcan
thusactasflowsplittingdampers),andmustbeappliedatthecontrolnodeimmediatelydownstreamof
themixingdamperset.
2.19.1.1 Reference
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
132
2.19.1.2 DamperMinimumFlow
This parameter sets a minimum value for the flow into the lefthand branch of the damper set.
Independentofwhethertheon/offcontrolwithintheassociatedcontrollerusedtomodulatethedamper
position above the minimum flow is on or off, the flow into the lefthand branch will be subject to a
minimumwhichisthelesserofthisminimumvalueandtheflowratedemandedatthedamperoutletby
downstreamcontrollers.
WarningLimits(l/s)
ErrorLimits(l/s)
0.0to25000.0
0.0to900000.0
2.19.1.3 ModulatingProfile
Themodulatingprofileinthemixingdampersetcanserveatleasttwofunctions:
A schedule can be used to enforce the minimum outside air (flow from the left branch) during
only occupied hours of building operation, thus allowing the outside air damper to close
completelyduringunoccupiedhours.Thisisatypicalmeansofavoidingunnecessaryheatingof
outside air when system fans switch on the middle of the night or weekends to maintain a
setbacktemperature.
Amodulatingprofilecanbeusedtovarytheminimumflowratebaseduponeitherascheduleor
aformulaprofilereferencingavaluesuchasoutdoordrybulbtemperature.
DemandcontrolledventilationbaseduponzonelevelCO2isprovidednotbymodulatingprofile,butby
attachingaproportionalcontrollertothedampersetwithaCO2sensoronthedownstreamnodeofthe
occupiedzone(s)/room(s)asillustratedbelow.Notethebranchofthedampersettowhichthecontroller
ispointed.
2.19.1.4 MixingDamperApplication:CO2basedDemandControlledVentilation(DCV)example
For CO2based demandcontrolled ventilation, the controlled variable for outside air (OA) can be either
flow rate (cfm or l/s) into the left branch of the damper set or the fraction from the left branch as a
percentage of the total mixedair flow rate. However, the latter is much more flexible and useful, as it
allows independent zonelevel controllers with CO2 sensors to vote on the systemlevel outsideair
damperposition,withouthavingtoknowatanygiventimestepwhattheactualflowrateatthatdamper
is.
IftherearemultiplezonesvotingonthefractionofoutsideairasafunctionofindividualCO2levels(via
multiplexed controllers responding to sensed room CO2 levels), the controlled variable will normally be
percentageflow.For100%outsideairsystems,asinthesecondexamplebelow,zonelevelflowratescan
becontrolledtomaintaindesiredCO2levels.NoOAdamperisrequired.
Ifoutsideairflowabovetheminimumrequiredforventilationand/ormakeupairiscontrolledtoatarget
mixedair temperature, as is most typical means of outside air economizer control, a duplicate damper
willneedtobeincludedforraisingthefractionofoutsideairwhendemandedbyzoneCO2levels.Thisis
because all controllers pointing to a given node must use the same controlled variable in order to
facilitatevoting.
Intheapplicationillustratedbelow,eachzonevotesforadditionalOAatthesystemlevelasthezoneCO2
exceedsasetthreshold(seethehighlightedcontrollerandassociatedcontrollerdialog).Aseconddamper
component,inadditionaltothenormalOAeconomizer,justbelowandtotheleftoftheOAeconomizer
damper. This represents a second copy of the same actual damper, but with a different controlled
variable.WhiletheOAeconomizeriscontrolledtomodulatethefractionofoutsideairtomeetadesired
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
133
mixedairtargettemperature,withanoutsidetemperaturehighlimit,atorabovewhichitwillshutdown
tothesetminimumOAflow,theaddedDCVdampercanaddmoreOAbasedonzonedemand.Thezone
levelDCVcontrollersvoteontheamountofadditionalOAneededatanygivetime.Thehighestvote
from zonelevel DCV controllers modulates the system DCV damper from 0 to 100% as zone CO2
concentrationrisesfrom1,000to1,400ppm.Inotherwords,whenitisdesirabletobringinmoreOAto
maintain the set mixedair temperature, the first damper will prevail. When it is desirable for
maintenance of appropriate zone CO2 levels to introduce more OA than otherwise provided by the
thermallydrivenOAeconomizer,theaddeddamperwillprevail.NeithercaneverbringinmoreOAthan
isdemandedbythesystem.BothwillhaveequalpriorityindetermininghowmuchOAisbroughtinat
anygiventime.
Figure 261: Illustrative HVAC network configuration with added outsideair damper and controller for
CO2baseddemandcontrolledventilationinamixing(recirculating)system.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
134
Figure 262: Illustrative controller dialog for CO2based demandcontrolled ventilation in a mixing
(recirculating) system. This controls the percentage flow in the added copy of the outsideair damper,
thusoverridingtheoutsideairflowrateotherwisedeterminedbythermalconsiderationsforthenormal
economizerdamperoperation,asneededtomaintainsetzoneCO2levels.
Asecondexample(below)illustratesanappropriateconfigurationforcontrolofthezoneleveloutsideair
ventilationratewitha100%outsideairsystem.Thisistypicalforventilationsystemsusedwithfancoil
units, active chilled beams, and similar terminal equipment. In this case, some zones can use constant
volume ventilation and others can have ventilation rate varied according to CO2 concentration in the
zone.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
135

Figure 263: The system network example above illustrates a configuration for CO2based demand
controlledventilationina100%outsideairsystem(i.e.,withnorecirculation).Thisexampleisafancoil
system, but could easily be modified to model active chilled beams (induction units), passive chilled
beams,orchilledceilingpanels.ForallzoneswithDCV,thehighlightedcontrollermustuseroomCO2as
thesensedvariableforcontroloftheprimaryzoneairflowrate.Otherzonescansimplyuseafixedflow
rate(e.g.,identicalvaluesfortheflowrateatminandmaxsensorsignals).
Notethatthedampersetatthesysteminletisaface&bypassdamperfortheenergyrecoverydevice,
andhasnoinfluenceonthefractionofoutsideair.Aseparatecontrollerinthisexampledeterminesthe
fraction of air that air passes through or around the heat/enthalpy recovery device based upon zone
temperatures,andthuswhetheradditionalfanenergyisconsumedasaresultofaddedstaticpressure
whenrecoveringthermalenergy.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
136
2.20 ReturnAirDamperSet
ToolbariconsforplacementoftheRADampercomponent.
RADampercomponentonthenetwork.
The Return Air (RA) Damper Set component incrementally increases the minimum flow of outside air
(makeupair)enteringthesystemviatheeconomizerdamper whenrequired.Inotherwords,itcan,as
needed,overridetheminimumOAsettingintheintakeairmixingdampercomponent.
TheRADamperSetisintendedforuseonlywiththeMixingDamperSet,andthisisassumedtobewhen
thelatterisfunctioningasanoutsideair(OA)economizeri.e.,whenitismixingOAandRAflows.The
RADamperhasnouserinputsandperformsitsfunctiononlywhenpairedwiththeMixingDamperSet.In
orderforthetwotobelinked,theRADampermustbepresentontheverticalbranchenteringtheOA
economizerdamper.Therecanbenojunctionsbetweenthem.IfitisnotpairedwiththeMixingDamper
inthisconfiguration,andthuslinkedtheOAdamper,itwillreverttofunctioningasasimpleTjunction.
ThecapabilityoftheRAdamperlinktoautomaticallyoverridetheminimumOAsettingwithintheOA
damperisusefulinthecaseofanysystemforwhichthesumtotalofRAplusminimumOAavailableto
the system may occasionally be less than the collective demand for primary supply airflow to the
conditionedzones.Thismayoccur,forexample,whenthereareseparatelyexhaustedzones(lavatories,
copyrooms,janitorscloset,lockerrooms,etc.)orvariablevolumevent/fumehoods(e.g.,inlaboratories,
hospitals,industrialenvironments,etc.)removingairfromthesystemaccordingtoschedulesorsensed
variablesthatareindependentoftheprimaryairflowcontrolstotheconditionedzonesthatfeedthem.
AnotherwaytothinkofthisisthattheRADampercanoverridetheminimumOAsettingwhenthetotal
demandforsupplyairatthemixedairnodeexceedsthetotalofavailablereturnairplustheminimum
OA.Thisisintendedmainlyforuseinbuildings,suchaslaboratories,forwhichtherearemultiplemeans
of exhaust/extract from spaces served by the system. While it would be possible to create a detailed
schedulefortheminimumOAmakeupairrequirement,thisisnotnecessaryatthesystemOAdamper,so
longastheairbalanceisalwaysprovidedforatthezonelevel.
The RA damper does not, however, obviate the need to otherwise specify airflow rates so that other
brachesonthesystem,suchastransferairpaths,arenotstarvedofairflowwhentheminimumflowfrom
upstreambranches,ortheschedulethereof,constrainswhatisavailabledownstream.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
137
2.21 ControlledDivergentTJunction(splitterdamper)
ToolbariconsforplacementofTJunctioncomponents.
DivergentTjunctioncomponents.
When the flows for a junction component are set to be divergent, the junction can be controlled to
function as a fixed or variable percentageflow splitter damper. Until a percentage flow controller is
pointedtothedownstreamnodeatoneoftwooutletsonadivergentjunction,itfunctionsasasimple
uncontrolled junction of airflow paths. Attaching a percentage flow controller to either one of the two
outlets provides a controlled split of the flow, regardless of the current flow rate. It is important the
percentageflowcontrolisappliedtoonlyoneofthetwodownstreamnodes,andnotboth.Furthermore,
theflowmustnotalsobedeterminedbyaflowratecontrolleronthesamedownstreambranch,asthis
wouldcreateanoverconstrainedpath.
Clicking on the red arrows in the Junction flow direction dialog determines divergent rather than
convergent flows in junction components. Percentage flow control can be used only in the case of
divergentjunctions.
DivergentTjunctioncomponentwithpercentageflowcontrollerattachedtooneoftwooutlets.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
138
2.22 DuctworkHeatPickup
Whensupplyductspassthroughnotablywarmspaces,suchasreturnairplenums,orwhensupplyand/or
returnductsarelocatedoutsideofthebuildingenvelopeitisoftendesirabletomodeltheheatgaintoor
heatlossfromductwork.Heatlostfromhotductsisgainedbytheroomairthroughwhichtheductruns
pass (where additional heat may or may not be needed). Similarly, heat gained by cold supply ducts
passingthroughahotreturnplenumwillraisethesupplyairtemperatureandprovideunintendedcooling
tothereturnair,someorallofwhichistypicallyexhaustedfromthebuilding.
Toolbariconsforductwotkheatpickup(horizonatalandverticalcomponents).
Ductworkheatpickupcomponent.
2.22.1.1 Reference
Figure264:Ductworkheatpickupdialog
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
139
2.22.1.2 SurfaceAreaofDuct
Entertheapproximatesurfaceareaoftheduct(s).
WarningLimits(m)
ErrorLimits(m)
5.0to100.0
0.1to10000.0
2.22.1.3 AverageUvalueofDuct
Enter theaverageUvalueoftheduct.The duct Uvalueisusedtogetherwiththe ductsurfaceareato
calculatetheheattransferbetweentheductandtheadjacentroom(oroutside).
WarningLimits(W/mK) 0.1to10.0
ErrorLimits(W/mK)
0.01to99.0
2.22.1.4 Location
Select either external to building (outside the conditioned envelope) or contained with room
(includingnonoccupiedspaces,suchasreturnairplenums).
2.22.1.5 RoomContainingDuct
Select an indoor location of the ductwork (an actual space in the model), if the location is not set to
external.Theflowofheatbetweentheductandroomismodeledforboththeairsystemandtheroom.
2.23 DirectActingHeater/Cooler
25B
Toolbariconfordirectactingheater/coolerslist.
Direct acting heaters are intended to represent any room unit with negligible thermal capacity. Unlike
radiators, direct acting units can be used to heat or cool a space. Cooling is achieved by entering a
negativevaluefortheoutput(correspondingtoeitherminimumormaximumsensedsignal)intheroom
unitcontrollerdialog.
TheDirectActingHeatersdialogallowsyoutocreateasetofdirectactingheatertypesforplacementin
thebuilding.DirectactingheaterscanutilizeCHPtoprovideabaseload.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
140

Figure265:Directactingheaterslist
Figure266:Directactingheaterdialog
2.23.1.1 Reference
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
141
2.23.1.2 RadiantFraction
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemitted(orcoolingeffect)fromthedevice.SeeTable13fortypical
values.
2.23.1.3 Efficiency
Enterefficiencyforthedirectactingheater.
2.23.1.4 UsesCHP?
TickthisboxtoindicatethattheheatercanacceptheatinputfromaCHPsystem(ifpresent).
2.23.1.5 Sequenceranking
Sequencerankingdeterminesthesequenceinwhichheatsourcesareswitchedintotopupanydeficit
inCHPsuppliedheat.Heatsourceswithlowvaluesofthisparameterwillbeswitchedinfirst(typicallythe
most efficient ones). If two heating sources have the same sequence ranking, they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforboth.
2.24 HotWaterRadiators
26B
InApacheHVAC,thetermRadiatorscoversabroadrangeofhydronicheatingdevicesplaceddirectlyin
conditioned spaces. These generally include castiron radiators, radiant panel heaters, fintube
convectors, and so forth. Whether mainly radiative or purely convective heating units, the common
threadisthatallroomunitsareindependentoftheairsidenetworkandairsidecomponents;theydirectly
interactonlywiththeconditionedspaceandtheplantequipment.
Radiator room units can also be used as a hydronic loop within a heated slab zone, but care should be
takeninsuchcasestoappropriatelydefinethetypeusingparametersthatwillrepresenttheproperties
ofjustthehydronicloopwithintheslab.
Toolbariconforhotwaterradiatortypesdialog.
The Radiators(types)dialogsupports definingradiatortypesforplacement inthe building.Eachtime a

particular type is placed within a room component, this constitutes an additional instance of that type.
Anygivenroomcanhavemorethanonetypeandcanhavemorethanoneinstanceofaparticulartype.
However, keep in mind that a separate controller is required for each instance. Therefore, it is often
worthlimitingthenumberofinstancestojustoneortwoperzonebyrepresentingarangeofgrouped
setsofradiatorswithtypesthatrepresenttheircollectivecapacityandrelatedcharacteristics.
Hot water radiators use the same calculation algorithms as the chilled ceiling module. The variation of
convectiveheattransferwithradiatortemperatureismodeledusingAlamdariandHammondequations.
ApacheHVACallowsmodelingofbothTRVandmodulatedtemperaturecontrolledradiators.Theprogram
usesasimpleparametricmodelthatincludesthermalmassandconvectiveheattransfercoefficientthat
varieswithradiatortoroomtemperaturedeltaT.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
142

Figure 267: Radiator types dialog (showing illustrative inputs for a group of convective fintube
baseboardheaters)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
143
Figure268:Radiatoreditingdialogshowinginputsforagroupofsmallwallmountedsteelradiators.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
144
Figure269:Radiatoreditingdialogshowinginputsforsetof8overheadradiantheatingpanels.
2.24.1.1 Reference
2.24.1.2 Orientation
Select an orientation to describe the orientation of the radiator. Standard radiators are vertically
orientated, which will tend to increase the convective heat transfer coefficient within the overall heat
transfercalculation.Youmaywanttodefinetheradiatorwithhorizontalorientationifitisbeingusedto
modelanoverheadradiantpanelorahydronicradiantheatingfloorsystem.
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemittedfromthedevice.SeeTable13forsometypicalvalues.
2.24.1.4 ReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturersdatacommonlygivesheatoutputoftheradiatorforareferenceunitroomtemperature
difference.Enterthereferencetemperaturedifferenceinthiscell.Forexample,thedatamaystatethat
theheatingoutputis2.5kWforatemperaturedifferenceof60C.
2.24.1.5 HeatingOutputatReferenceTemperatureDifference
Enterthereferenceheatingoutputinthiscell.Fortheexamplegivenabove,theheatingoutputis2.5kW
foratthereferencetemperaturedifferenceof60C.
Theprogramusesthisdatatocalculateaneffectiveareaforuseinthecalculationoftheconvectiveheat
transferasfollows:
A standard convective heat transfer coefficient HCIs is first calculated for the standard radiatorroom
temperaturedifference,TuusingtheAlamdariandHammondequations:
HCIs=F_HCIs(ORI,Tsu,Tsr,CHARL)
where
VE6.3
Tsr
isthestandardroomtemperature(setto20C)
Tsu
isthestandardunittemperature(=Tsr+Tu)
ORI
istheOrientation
CHARL
isthecharacteristiclength(setto0.1m)
ApacheHVAC
145
F_HCIs
isafunctionimplementingtheequations.
Theeffectivearea,Aeffiscalculatedas:
Aeff=Qstdx(1rf)
_______________
HCIsx(TbsTrs)
where
QstdisthestandardheatoutputatTuandrfistheradiantfraction.
Note that the Alamdari and Hammond equations are used to set up the form of the variation of the
convective heat transfer coefficient as the radiator and room temperatures vary and not to calculate
absolute values from first principles. When the radiatorroom difference is at Tu, the convective heat
outputfromtheunitisQstdx(1rf).
2.24.1.6 MaximumInputfromHeatSource
Enterthemaximuminputfromheatsourceservingtheradiator.Becauseofthewayinwhichheatsource
loads are calculated in the program, maximum heat source capacity cannot be specified. Instead, a
maximummustbeallocatedtoeachheatemitter,coil,etc.Thesumofthemaximumcapacitiesforallthe
devicesonaheatsourcecircuitshouldequalthemaximumcapacityoftheheatsource.
2.24.2 DistributionPumpConsumption
118B
Thisitemisincludedtoallowfortheelectricalpumpsonasecondarydistributioncircuit.Wheneverthe
flow rate on/off controller is on, irrespective of the actual flow rate, then the full electrical power
specifiedherewillapply.Thisallowsthemodelingofzonedcontrolofhotwaterdistributiontoradiators.
2.24.3 Material
119B
Select the material from which the chilled ceiling panels or passive chilled beams are made (steel or
aluminum).Thematerialisusedtogetherwiththe'Totalweight'andthewatercapacitytocalculateof
thetotalthermalcapacityoftheradiator.
2.24.4 TotalRadiatorWeight
120B
Enter the weight of the radiator, excluding the weight of any water in the system. This data is used to
calculatethethermalcapacityoftheradiator.
2.24.5 WaterCapacity
121B
Enter the water capacity of the radiator. This data is also used to calculate the thermal capacity of the
radiator.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
146
2.25 ChilledCeilings
27B
TheChilledCeilingsmoduleallowsyoutocreateasetofchilledceilingtypesforplacementinthebuilding
and then control each instance of a particular type using flow rates, set points, and other control
parametersspecifictoeachparticularzone.
ToolbariconforChilledCeilingTypeslist.
Chilled Ceiling Types may be used to model mainly radiant chilled ceiling panels, mainly convective
passivechilledbeams,oranythinginbetween.Ahydroniccoolingloopinachilledconcreteslabcanalso
be modeled using a Chilled Ceiling Type, however, care should be taken to modify the input values
accordingly.Activechilledbeamsshouldbemodeledontheairsidenetworkusingacoolingcoilandloop
forinducedairflowcontrolledinproportiontoprimaryairflow.
The chilled ceiling module allows modeling of both coldwater flow and modulated temperature
controlleddevices.Theprogramusesasimpleparametricmodelthatincludesthermalmassandvariable
heattransferwithchilledceilingtemperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
147
Figure270:Chilledceiling(types)list
Figure271:Chilledceilingdialog
2.25.1.1 Reference
2.25.1.2 PanelOrientation
Select an orientation for the panels: horizontal for mainly horizontal panelsi.e. the majority of the
chilledsurfacefacesdowntowardthefloor;verticalforwallmountedpanelsorthosewithsurfacearea
mainlyperpendiculartothefloorandceiling.
Vertical beams are mainly convective and horizontal beams are mainly radiative in their cooling effect.
The selected option therefore affects the default radiative fraction in the next cell. It is also used as a
parameter to the Alamdari and Hammond convective heat transfer coefficient equations in the
determination of the form of the variation of the convective heat transfer coefficient with beam
temperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
148
Horizontalpanelorientation
Verticalpanelorientation
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemittedfromthedevice.SeeTable13forsometypicalvalues.
WarningLimits
ErrorLimits
0.0to0.9
0.0to1.0
2.25.1.4 ReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturers data commonly gives the cooling output of the unit at a reference temperature
difference.Enterthereferencetemperatureinthiscell.Forexample,thedatamaystatethatthecooling
outputis2.5kWforaunitroomtemperaturedifferenceof6Ki.e.,whenthecoolingsurfaceoftheunit
is6Kbelowtheroomairtemperature.Inthiscaseenter6inthiscell.
Default(C)
WarningLimits(C)
ErrorLimits(C)
5
2.0to20.0
1.0to100.0
2.25.1.5 CoolingOutputatReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturersdatacommonlystatescoolingoutputforagivenunitroomtemperaturedifference.Enter
thisreferencecoolingoutputinthiscell.Forexamplethedatamaystatethatthecoolingoutputis2.5kW
foratemperaturedifferenceof6K.Inthiscaseenter2.5inthiscell.
Theprogramusesthisdatatocalculateaneffectiveareaforuseinthecalculationoftheconvectiveheat
transferasfollows:
A standard convective heat transfer coefficient HCIs is first calculated for the standard paneltoroom
temperaturedifference,TbusingtheHammondandAlamdariequations:
HCIs=F_HCIs(ORI,Tsb,Tsr,CHARL)
where
Tsr isthestandardroomtemperature(setto22C)
Tsb isthestandardbeamtemperature(=TsrTb)
ORI istheOrientation
CHARL
isthecharacteristiclength(setto0.1m)
F_HCIs
isafunctionimplementingtheequations
Theeffectivearea,Aeffiscalculatedas:
Aeff=Qstdx(1rf)
_______________
HCIsx(TbsTrs)
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
149
where
QstdisthestandardheatoutputatTbsandrfistheradiantfraction.
Note that the Alamdari and Hammond equations are used to set up the form of the variation of the
convective heat transfer coefficient as the beam and room temperatures vary and not to calculate
absolutevaluesfromfirstprinciples.WhenthebeamisatTbsandtheroomisatTrs,theconvectiveheat
outputfromtheunitisQstdx(1rf).
ErrorLimits(kW)
0.05to9999.0
2.25.1.6 MaximumCoolingfromChiller
Enter the maximum input from chiller. In an actual application, this will be limited by the water
temperature and flow rate. The parameters can also be controlled, and thus limited (see Room Unit
Controllers section), however, this parameters allows opportunity for setting a hard limit in terms of
availablecoolingcapacity.
Because of the way in which chiller loads are calculated in the program, a maximum chiller capacity
cannotbespecified.Instead,amaximumlimitmustbeallocatedtoeachchilledceiling,coolingcoil,etc.
Exceptwhereconsiderablediversityofcoolingloadsisanticipated,thesumofallthemaximumcapacities
ofallthedevicesonacoolingcircuitshouldequalthemaximumcapacityofthechiller.
2.25.1.7 DistributionPumpConsumption
This item is included to allow for the electrical pumps on a zonelevel secondary (or tertiary) hydronic
loop. Whenever the flow rate on/off controller is on, irrespective of the actual flow rate, then the full
electrical power specified here is assumed to apply. This allows the modeling of zoned control of cold
water distribution to chilled ceilings using local constantspeed pumps. Alternatively, such when only
valves and not pumps are use at the zone loop level, pump power can be included on the secondary
chilledwaterloopatthesystemmodelinglevel.
2.25.1.8 PanelMaterial
Select the material from which the chilled ceiling panels or passive chilled beams are made (steel or
aluminum).Thematerialisusedtogetherwiththe'Totalweight'andthewatercapacity'tocalculateof
thetotalthermalcapacityofthebeam.
2.25.1.9 PanelWeight
Entertheweightofthepanels,excludingtheweightofwaterinthesystem.Thisdataisusedtocalculate
thermalcapacity.
2.25.1.10 PanelWaterCapacity
Enter the water capacity of the panels or passive chilled beams. This is used to calculate the thermal
capacity.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
150
Controllers
2B
Controllers are used in ApacheHVAC to govern the operation of the HVAC system. Their function is to
controlairflowsandthebehaviorofdevicessuchascoils,mixingdampers,flowsplitters,energyrecovery
heatexchangers,spraychambers,andsteamhumidifiers.
Figure31:Exampleofaverysimple2zoneFanCoilsystemwithconstantvolumetemperedoutsideair
supply. The brown boxes and lines represent controllers. Those with arrowheads point to controlled
nodesforairflowsandequipment;thosewitharoundbulbattheendaresensors.Notethatthisexample
isnotmultiplexed,whichwouldeffectivelystackthesetwozoneswithallequipmentandcontrollers(like
cards) and provide far more efficient means of adding and editing controls, etc. for a larger number of
zones.Seesection6MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks.
3.1 WorkingwithcontrollersontheairsideHVACnetwork
28B
Whenyouselectacontrollerfromthetoolbaryoufirstchoosethecontrollednode.Formostcomponents
that are placed on the airside network, a controller is required and the controlled node should be the
node immediately downstream of the component. A few components, however, do not require a
controller. For airflow, and only in the case of airflow, the controlled may be any node on the system
branchtowhichthecontrolledflowrateapplies.Typicallyitwillnotbeanodeimmediatelyadjacenttoa
fancomponent.Nextyouplacethecontroller,andfinally(whereapplicable)thesensednodeornodes.
Thefollowingisasummaryofconsiderationsforplacingcontrollers;however,thereareimportantrules
thatdoneedtobefollowedinthecaseofmultiplexedcontrols.Theseareclearlylaidoutinthesectionon
Multiplexing.
Placementofcontrollers:
VE6.3
MostcomponentsControlisrequiredatthedownstreamnodeadjacenttothecomponentin
orderforthecomponenttofunction.
FansandDuctworkheatpickupThesetwocomponentshavecharacteristicperformancethat
relatestotheairflowpassingthroughthem,butneithershouldbedirectlycontrolled.
ApacheHVAC
151
Divergent T junctions One of two downstream branches for a flowsplitting T junction

canbecontrolled,viatheimmediatelydownstreamnodeonthatbranch,asapercentageof
the flow entering the junction. The flow on that branch cannot, however, also be otherwise
controlledbyanothercontroller.
AirflowProvidecontroloneachbranchrepresentingauniquepathforwhichtheflowrate
cannototherwisebedetermined,butdonotoverconstrainthesystem.
Airsource heat pumps while this component is placed on the network (typically at an air
inlet)soastoreadthesourcetemperature,itdoesnotneedacontroller,asitisonlyreading
theairtemperatureandotherwiseactingasaheatsourceforcoils,radiators,etc.thathave
theirowncontrols.
Heat recovery The heatrecovery/exchange component is unusual in that is has two

downstreamnodes.Inthiscase,eitheroneofthetwo,butnotboth,maybecontrolled.
It is not necessary to define local control loops at individual components. Indeed, it is likely to cause
controlinstabilityifyoucontrolavariableasadirectfunctionofavaluemeasuredatthesamenode.For
example,ifyouwantaheatingcoiltowarmanairstreamto25C,donotcontrolheatoutputinresponse
tothemeasuredoffcoilairtemperature.Instead,youshouldcontroltemperaturedirectly.
Ideally,allfeedbackcontrolloopsshouldhaveaslowrespondingcomponentsuchasaroomsomewhere
intheloop.Therewillbeoccasionswhenthisisnotpossible(forexamplewhentheratioofoutsideairto
returnairiscontrolledasafunctionofthemixedairtemperature);insuchcasesdampingcanbeaddedto
the proportional controller to encourage control stability, but you should check the program output
carefullytoensurethatthesystemisbehavingcorrectly.
OncecontrollersareinplacetheirbehaviormaybemodifiedwithANDandORconnectionsfromother
controllers.
3.1.1
On/Off,Deadband,andProportionalcontrol
122B
3.1.2
VE6.3
It is essential for users to understand the differences between On/Off, Deadband, and
Proportionalcontrol.Illustrationsofeachofthese,plusrelationshipbetweenairflowandSAT
controls,areprovidedbelowinrelationtothesecontrollertypes.
Multiplecontrolofsinglevariable
123B
Itispermissibleandoftenhighlydesirabletohavemultiplecontrollersvyingforcontrolof
thesamecontrolledvariableforacomponentorflowrate.
Where multiple controllers are used, whether multiplexed or manually placed, they must all
pointtoonenodeandmustallcontrolthesamevariablee.g.,itwouldnotbeacceptableto
point a target drybulb temperature control and a percentage flow control both to the
downstream node of a single mixing damper set. In the case of airflow control, while the
controllednodecanbeanywhereonabranch,multiplecontrollersmustallpointtothesame
nodesuchthattheycanvoteontheflowrateforthatbranchofthenetwork.
Thegeneralruleformultiplecontrollersisthatwhichevervotesforthevaluethatrepresent
moreoutputfromthecomponentorbranchwillwinthevote.Indeed,whilethevoteforthe
lowest leaving air temperature will always win in the case of a cooling coil, for all other
components and airflows, it is the high value that will win the votei.e., whichever
controller is asking for more heat, more air, more moister, a higher percentage, or a higher
flowratewillwin.
ApacheHVAC
152
3.2 Controlleroperation
29B
Allcontrollershaveatimeswitchprofileandsometypesrespondtooneormoresensedvariables.They
outputtwotypesofcontrolsignal:switchingsignalsandnumericalcontrolsignals.Theswitchingsignalis
eitherONorOFF,dependingonthesensorsignalandsensorparameters.Thenumericcontrolsignal(if
present)willbeavariablesuchastherequiredoffcoiltemperatureofaheatingcoil.Forflowcontrollers,
the time switch profile has a special interpretation allowing it to take values intermediate between ON
andOFF.Thismodulatingfeatureforflowcontrolprovesusefulincertainsituations.Forexampleitallows
aflowratetofollowthetimevariationdefinedinaprofile.
Theswitchingsignalisusedtoswitchequipmentonandoff,andmayalsobepassedonasaninputfor
anothercontrollerviaanANDorORconnection.
Thenumericcontrolsignalsetsthevalueofaphysicalvariablesuchastemperatureorflowrate.Thismay
modulateunderproportionalcontrol.
Theiconsrepresentingcontrollersareasfollows:
Independentcontrollers
timeswitch
controllerwithsensor
differentialcontroller
Dependentcontrollers
timeswitch
controllerwithsensor
differentialcontroller
ANDconnection,ORconnection
Controllers are of three basic types: time switch controller, controller with sensor, and differential
controller.Eachtypehasindependentanddependentvariants:
Independent controllers directly control a component or airflow rate. They also generate a switching
signalwhichcanbeusedasaninputtoothercontrollersviaANDandORconnections.
Dependentcontrollersgenerateonlyaswitchingsignalforinputtoothercontrollers.
With the exception of ducts, passive junctions, rooms and fans, every HVAC component needs a
controller. Controllers are also required to set airflow rates, and this may be done at any node (not
necessarily at a fan). Controllers switch components on or off and govern their performance. System
variablesthatmaybecontrolledincludeairflow,heatoutput,temperatureandhumidity.
Controllers are required throughout the ApacheHVAC model to control the system components and to
moveairthroughthenetwork.Thecontrolmaybenomorethanasimpletimeswitch(onatcertainhours
of the day, off at others). In other cases it will modulate the operation of a component in response to
conditionssensedbyathermostatorothertypeofsensor.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
153
Thefollowingcomponentswilloperateonlyifacontrolconnectionhasbeenmadetotheirdownstream
node:
Heatingcoil
Coolingcoil
Sprayhumidifier
Steamhumidifier
Heatrecoverydevice
Damperset(economizer)
The downstream connection is interpreted as a connection to the component itself, and causes it to
control the condition at the controlled node. Note that Fans are not directly controlled; flow rate is
controlledanywhereonanetworkbranch(Seesection3.5Airflowcontrollers,below).
3.3 Controllerparameters
30B
Thefollowingparametersfeatureincontrollerspecifications:
NodeBeingSensed
VariableBeingSensed
PercentageProfileforTimeSwitch
ValueforMaximumControlSignal
ValueforMinimumControlSignal
ConstantorTimedSetpoint
Setpoint
Deadband
HighSensorInput
Logical'OR'ControlCombination
Logical'AND'ControlCombinations
VariableBeingControlled
ConstantorTimedMidband
Midband
ProportionalBandwidth
MaximumChangeperTimeStep
The selection and application of parameters differs depending on the controller type. If a controller is
requiredsimplytoholdavariableataconstantvalue,thecontrollerspecificationneedonlyincludethe
valuetobemaintainedandthehoursduringwhichthevalueistobemaintained.Itwillactasasimple
timeswitchwiththevariableheldconstantasspecifiedforvalueformaximumcontrolsignalwhenever
the controller is the ON state. For example, to simulate a heating coil with a constant leaving air
temperaturerequiresonlyacontrollertoactivatethecoilovertherequiredperiodandtosettheoffcoil
temperature.
WhereitisrequiredtoswitchadeviceONorOFFinaccordancewiththevalueofasensedvariable,the
controller specification will include a set point and other parameters, such as a control deadband
(hysteresis).Thistypeofcontrolwouldbetypicalforathermostatcontrollingaroomheater.Itmayalso
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
154
beaugmentedbyproportionalcontrol(seebelow)if,inthisexample,theoutputoftheheaterisvariable.
Thecontrollersetpointcanbeconstantorcanvaryaccordingtoanabsoluteprofile.Atimevaryingset
point can be used to specify night setback and certain types of optimum start algorithme.g., using a
formulaprofiletovarythetimeforchangingfromnightsetbacktotheoccupiedhourssetpointaccording
totheoutdoortemperature.
Proportionalcontrolsareusedwherethereisneedforcontinuouslyvaryingthecontrolvalueinrelation
to a sensed signal. This will be typical for control of VAV boxes, demandcontrolled ventilation, bypass
dampers for heat recovery, and so forth. They can also be used very generically to control one flow in
proportiontoanother,suchasinanactivechilledbeamforwhichtheinducedairflowistobe2.5times
the primary airflow, regardless of the primary airflow rate. A similar application would be the
approximationofexfiltrationthroughapressurizedbuildingenvelopeatarate,forexample,of1.8%of
theprimaryairflowtoeachzone.
Foranycontrollerthatincludesasensorforeithersetpointcontrolorproportionalcontrol,thesensed
variablecanbeanyofthoseavailable(seelistbelow)andultimatelywilldependuponthesensorlocation.
For example room temperature, CO2, relative humidity, etc., outdoor variables, such as wetbulb
temperature, dewpoint temperature, etc., or relative variables, such as the difference in enthalpy
betweenreturnairandoutdoorair.
3.3.1
Controlledvariables
124B
This parameter, which is present for all independent controllers, specifies the variableflow rate, dry
bulbtemperature,relativehumidity,etc.tobecontrolledatthecontrollednode.Thecontrolvariable
beingmustbeconsistentwitheachcomponent:forexample,youcannotcontrolhumiditywithaheating
coil.Thetablebelowlistsvariablesavailableforcontrolforeachtypeofcomponent.
ApplicablecontrolvariablesforeachtypeofcomponentontheairsideHVACnetwork
Component
Drybulb Relative Wetbulb Dewpoint %

Heat Moisture
Enthalpy
Temp. Humidity Temp.
Temp.
Flow Transfer input
Heatingcoil
Coolingcoil
Heatrecovery
Spraychamber
Steamhumidifier
Mixingdamperset
ReturnAirdamper
Divergentjunction
Activeduct
Fan
Networkbranch
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
n/a
Yes
n/a
n/a
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
No
Flow
rate
No
No
No
No
No
No
n/a
No
n/a
n/a
Yes
Table 31: Controlled variables allowed for each type of componenti.e., at the network node
immediately downstream. As an example, Percentage Flow Rate is permitted only at the outlet of a
dampersetoratoneoutletofadivergent(flowsplitting)junction.However,drybulbtemperatureand
enthalpyarealsopermittedattheoutletofamixingdamperset,wheretheyareinterpretedastargetsto
beachieved,totheextentthiscanbedonebymixingtheavailableinletstreams.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
155
NotethatActiveDuctcomponentsarenotcontrolledatall,Fancomponentsarenotdirectlycontrolled,
andflowratecanbecontrolledanywhereonanetworkbranch.
3.3.2
Sensedvariables
125B
Thefollowingvariablesareavailableforsensinginallcontrollerswithsensors:
Flowrate
Drybulbtemperature
Relativehumidity
Wetbulbtemperature
Dewpointtemperature
Enthalpy
CO2concentration
Ifthesensedvariableisdrybulbtemperature,thesensorradiantfractionmustalsobespecified.
Sensed CO2 concentration in a space at any simulation time step is a function of the outdoor
concentration (assumed to be 400 ppm), CO2 addition from occupants, and the extent to which the
mechanical system recirculates the air and/or mixes it with air from other spaces. Occupant CO2
productionis,inturn,afunctionofthenumberofoccupantsinthespaceandtheoccupantactivitylevel
inkeepingwithcombinedsensibleandlatentgainperpersonthathasbeensetforPeopleunderInternal
Gains in the Thermal Conditions template or Room Data dialogs. CO2 concentration is not available for
Room Unit controllers, as these control only hydronic devices that cannot influence room air CO2
concentration.
Twoadditionalsensedvariablesareavailableforroomunitcontrollers:
Solarradiation
Surfacetemperature
ForSolarradiation,theorientationandslopeofthereceivingsurfacemustbespecified.
Errorlimitsforthethreeadditionalparameters:
RadiantFraction
Orientation(azimuth)
Slope(anglefromhorizontal)
0.01.0
0.0360.0
0.0180.0
0.01.0
0.0360.0
0.0180.0
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
156
Figure32:Addingasurfacetemperaturesensortag
Surfacetemperaturesensorsrequirearoom/zonelocationtobeselectedwithinthecontrollerdialog.For
the sensor to function, this location requires a tag to be set in Apache Thermal view indicating which
adjacencyinthezone/roomshouldhavethesensor.
Forexample,foraroomwithafloorthatoverlapsmultipleotherzones,justonesectionofthefloorcan
betaggedasthesensedsurfacewithinthatroom.
The selected adjacency can be within a nonoccupied space, such as a return or underfloor supply
plenum.Inthecaseofahydronicheatedorcooledslab,thesensorwouldgoonthefloororceilingofthe
adjacent occupied space, such that it is measuring the temperature of the thermoactive surface that
occupantscansee.
ThesurfacetemperaturesensortagisaddedbyselectingtheappropriateadjacencywhileintheApache
Thermalviewandthenrightclickingtoaccessthesurfacetemperaturesensoroption.Onceset,aredT
willbedisplayednexttotheadjacency,parentsurfaceforthatadjacency(typicallyafloororceiling),and
theroomorzonethatcontainsthatsurface.SeeFigure32,above.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
157
3.4 Controlsincombination
31B
3.4.1
Multiplecontrollersatasinglenetworknode
126B
Itispermissibletoattachmorethanonecontrollertoanode.Multiplecontrolsareused,forexample,to
determineanoverallcontrolsignalbaseduponthemostextremeconditionoccurringinasetofzones.
Requirementforusingmultiplecontrollerstodetermineanoverallcontrolsignal:
Allcontrollersmustbeattachedtothesamenode.
Allthecontrollersmustcontrolthesamevariable.
Wheretwoormorecontrollersareattachedtoonenode,theiron/offcontrolsignalsandtheircontrolled
variablevaluesarecombinedasfollows:
Thecomponent(orflow)isturnedonifany(oneormore)oftheattachedcontrollersoutputs
anONsignal.
AnycontrollerprovidinganONsignalalsooutputsavalueforthecontrolledvariable,whichis
thensubjecttoapollingprocess.
Theeffectonthecontrolledvariabledependsonthetypeofthisvariableandthecomponentitappliesto.
Inthecaseofflowcontrol,theflowthroughthenodeissettothemaximumoftheflowscalculatedby
theattachedcontrollers.Inthecaseofadamperset,thisprincipleappliestotheflowcalculatedforthe
branch entering the mixing box from the left on the schematic (which often represents the outside air
intake). In the case of a heating coil, steam humidifier, spray chamber, or heat recovery device, the
controlled variable (for instance, offcoil temperature) is set to the maximum of the controlled values
output by the attached controllers. In the case of a cooling coil, the controlled variable is set to the
minimumof the controllersoutputvalues.Assuch,themultipleattached controllerseffectivelyvote
ontheresultingcontrolvalue.TheresultingoutcomesdescribedabovearesummarizedTable32,below.
Dominantcontrolvaluewhenmultiplecontrolspointtoasinglenetworknode
Component
Drybulb Relative Wetbulb Dewpoint %

Heat Moisture
Enthalpy
Temp. Humidity Temp.
Temp.
Flow Transfer input
Heatingcoil
Coolingcoil
Heatrecovery
Spraychamber
Steamhumidifier
Mixingdamperset
ReturnAirdamper
Divergentjunction
Activeduct
Fan
Networkbranch
Max
Min
Max
Max
n/a
n/a
n/a
Max
Max
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Min
Max
n/a
n/a
n/a
Max
n/a
Max
n/a
n/a
Max
Min
n/a
n/a
n/a
Max
Max
n/a
n/a
n/a
Max
n/a
n/a
n/a
Flow
rate
n/a
n/a
n/a
Max
Table32:Thedominantvaluewhenmultiplecontrollerspointtoasinglenodeorcomponent.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
158
3.4.2
LinkingofcontrollersvialogicalANDandORconnections
127B
ControllersmaybelinkedtogetherviaANDandORconnections(furtherdescribedinsections3.5.4and
3.5.5 below). The final control signal may be the result of a relatively complex series of logical
determinations.Thecontrolofaroomheatercould,forexample,bespecifiedasfollows:
HeatisONduringtheday,providedthattheoutsideairtemperatureisbelow15C,AND
Duringthenight,whenevertheroomtemperaturedropsbelow10C,AND
Duringthepreheatperiod,startingatatimewhichdependsonoutsideairtemperature(i.e.
optimumstartcontrol).
3.5 Airflowcontrollers
32B
Tosetthesystemairflows,isnotnecessaryordesirabletoconnectcontrolstoeverynodeinthenetwork.
Rather, it is necessary to provide just enough control to determine airflow rates for all branches.
Wheneverpossible,usersshouldletApacheHVACderivetheflow.Forexample,whenmultiplecontrolled
branchesconverge,solongasallbranchflowsaredefined,ApacheHVACshouldbelefttoderivetheflow
onthecollector/returnpath.
Theprogramdoescheckforbothoverspecificationofflowrateandfornegativeflows.Therefore,ifflow
ratesareincorrectlysetup,itwillverylikelybeflaggedasaerrorthatwillpreventthesimulationfrom
running. In all such cases, flagged errors include report the node number at which the flow error is
occurring.Inanycase,itisbesttocontrolflowattheminimumnumberofpointsneededtodefinethe
system.
Equipment output is determined by the parameters setting the controlled value at the minimum and
maximum control signal. The component capacity does not feature in the control provided that the
capacityequalsorexceedsthevaluesenteredforminimumandmaximumcontrolsignal.
3.6 Controllerparametersterminologyandgeneraldiscussion
33B
The following section describes the parameters and terminology used throughout the range of
ApacheHVACcontrollers.Separatesectionsfollowingthisdescribespecifictypesofcontrollersandtheir
applications.
3.6.1
TimeSwitchorOn/OffControl
128B
This first section of the control dialog (common to all types of controllers) determines what is being
controlled,thecontrolvalueatmaximumsensedsignal(orsimplythesetvalueifthereisnoproportional
control),andtheinclusionofaprofileorscheduletodeterminewhenthecontrollerisactive.
3.6.1.1
VariableBeingControlled
This parameter, which is present for all independent controllers, specifies the variableflow rate, dry
bulbtemperature,relativehumidity,etc.tobecontrolledatthecontrollednode.
Itisnotnecessarytodefinelocalcontrolloopsatindividualcomponentsand,indeed,itislikelytocause
control instability if you control one variable at a node as a direct function of a value measured at the
samenode.Forexample,ifyouwantaheatercoiltowarmtheairupto25C,donotcontrolheatoutput
inresponsetothemeasuredoffcoilairtemperature.Instead,youshoulddirectlycontroltemperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
159
Ideally,allfeedbackcontrolloopsshouldhaveaslowrespondingcomponent(e.g.aroom)somewherein
theloop.Therewillbeoccasionswhenthisisnotpossible(e.g.whentheratioofoutsideairtoreturnair
is controlled as a function of the mixed air temperature). In such cases damping can be added to the
proportionalcontrollertoencouragecontrolstability,butyoushouldchecktheprogramoutputcarefully
toensurethatthesystemisbehavingcorrectly.
None of the 'active' components defined in the network (with the exception of fans) will perform a
function unless a controller is specified at the node immediately downstream of that component. The
controlsreactwiththecomponentsasfollows:
WhenthecontrollerisOFF,aparticularcomponentwillhavenoeffectontheairpassingoverit.Ifthe
airflowonanetworkbranchisOFF,therewillbenoloadplaceduponanycomponentsonthatparticular
branch. If the airflow ALL downstream network branches are OFF, there will be no load on any
componentslocatedontheupstreampaththatfeedsthem.
WhenthecontrollerisON:
3.6.1.2
Ifunderproportionalcontrol,theconditionoftheairleavingthecomponentwilldependon
thevaluecorrespondingtothecontrolsignalcomingfromtheproportionalcontrolleratany
instantintime.
Ifnoproportionalcontrol,theconditionoftheairleavingthecomponentwilldependonthe
controlvalueindicatedatthemaximumsensedsignal.
ValueatMaximumSignal
Thisparameterispresentforallindependentcontrollers.Ithasadifferentfunctionforon/off(setpoint)
controllersandproportionalcontrol.
Inthecaseofon/offcontrol,whichapplieswhentheProportionalControlboxisnotticked,thevaluefor
maximum signal specifies the numerical control signal. The controlled variable will take this value
whenever the switching signal is on (provided that such a value can be achieved within the physical
constraints,whichincludethemaximumdutyofthecomponent).
Inthecaseofproportionalcontrol,whichapplieswhentheProportionalControlboxisticked,thevalue
formaximumsignalspecifiesthevalueofthenumericcontrolsignaloutputwhenthesensedvariableis
atorabovetheupperendoftheproportionalband.
TheresponsecharacteristicforproportionalcontrolisshowninFigure37.
Notethatifyouwanttocontrolthetemperatureoftheairfromaheatingorcoolingcoil,thisshouldbe
donedirectlybychoosingdrybulbtemperatureforthevariablebeingcontrolledcellandtherequired
temperature for value for maximum control signal. ApacheHVAC will calculate the heat needed to
maintain this temperature (subject to the limit imposed by the capacity of the component). The same
principleappliestothecontrolofrelativehumidity,wetbulbanddewpointtemperaturesbycoolingcoils
andhumidifiers.
3.6.1.3
TimeSwitchProfile
Youmustspecifyapercentageprofiletoindicatethescheduleofoperationforthecontroller.
Formosttypesofcontrolledvariablethisisinterpretedasfollows.
When the profile has a value greater than 50% it will be ON, subject to other parameters that may
overridethetimeswitch.Otherwise,itisOFF.Thecontrolleroutputisalwaysoffwhentheprofilevalueis
lessthanorequalto50%.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
160
An exception to this rule applies in the case of air and water flow controllers. Here the profile has a
modulatingratherthanjustaswitchingrole,theprofilevaluebeingappliedasafactorontheflowrate.
3.6.2
Sensor(foron/offandproportionalcontrol)
129B
Thesectionofthecontrollerinputsthatdeterminethesensedvariableandcharacteristicsofthesensor,
suchasradiantfraction,inthecaseoftemperaturesensors.
3.6.2.1
VariableBeingSensed
Selectthevariablethatistobemonitoredatthesensednode.Thiswillbefedintotheon/off(setpoint)
orproportionalcontrol.
3.6.2.2
Radiantfraction
Whenthesensedvariableisdrybulbtemperature,aninputfieldisavailabletosettheradiantfractionof
sensedtemperature.Asanexample,iftheradiantfractionweresetto0.5,thesensorwouldeffectively
besensingdryresultanttemperaturei.e.,operativetemperatureinstillairconditions.
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
SetPoint(foron/offcontrol)
130B
Active
Tick this box to enable on/off control. This may operate in conjunction with, or as an alternative to,
proportional control. On/off control must be enabled for direct acting heaters, radiators and chilled
beams.
3.6.3.2
SetPointVariation
Thesetpointforon/offcontrolmaybeconstantorvariable.SelectConstantorTimedasappropriate.
3.6.3.3
SetPoint
Set Point defines the behavior of the switching signal generated by the controller as a function of the
sensed variable when on/off control is used. The response characteristic for on/off control is shown in
Figure38.
A constant value for Set Point is entered as a number and a variable value by an absolute profile
specifyingthevalueofthesetpointthroughouttheyear.
Theunitsinwhichthevaluesareexpressedmustbeappropriatetothevariablebeingsensed,andwhen
thesetpointisentereddirectly,thevaluemustliewithintheappropriatewarninganderrorlimitsshown
below:
3.6.3.4
Deadband
Deadbanddefinestherangeofsensedvariablevaluesoverwhichswitchingoccursinon/offcontrol.The
responsecharacteristicforon/offcontrolisshowninFigure38.
Thedeadbandenablestheprogramtomodelswitchinghysteresis.Ifitisspecifiedaszerothecontrolwill
switchbetweentheONandOFFstateswheneverthevalueofthesensedvariablepassesthroughtheset
point. If a nonzero deadband is specified, the control will change its state as the sensed variable rises
throughtheupperendofthedeadbandorfallsthroughthelowerendofthedeadband.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
161
3.6.3.5
HighSensorInput
Thisparameterrelatestoon/off(setpoint)controlandspecifieswhethertheswitchingsignaloutputby
thecontrollerisONorOFFforhighvaluesofthesensedvariable.Theresponsecharacteristicforon/off
control shown in Figure 310 is drawn for the case where High Sensor Input set to OFF. When this
parameterissettoONthecharacteristicisinverted.
HeatersandhumidifiersusuallyhaveHighSensorInputsettoOFFsothatthedeviceswitchesoffathigh
values of sensed temperature or humidity. Cooling coils, whether used for cooling or dehumidification,
usuallyhaveHighSensorInputsettoON.
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
ProportionalControl
131B
Active
Tickthisboxtoenableproportionalcontrol.
ProportionalcontrolfeaturesarerequiredwithintheApacheHVACsystemmodeltoallowcomponentsto
mimic the operation of real controls. Proportional control usually gives a better quality of control than
on/off(setpoint)control.
All HVAC components need a controller and the versatility of the controllers means that proportional
controlisonlyrequiredforcertainfunctions.
Proportional control is used to adjust the value of a controlled variable smoothly as a function of the
valueofasensedvariable.ExamplesofthistypeofcontrolarethemodulationofaVAVsupplyairflow
ratesandCAVsupplytemperatures.
3.6.4.2
MidbandVariation
Themidbandforproportionalcontrolmaybeconstantorvariable(timed).SelectConstantorTimedas
appropriate.
3.6.4.3
Midband
Themidbandparameterspecifiesthevalueofthesensedvariableatthecentreoftheproportionalband.
A constant value for midband is entered as a number and a variable value by an absolute profile
specifyingthevalueofthemidbandthroughouttheyear.
3.6.4.4
ProportionalBandwidth
The proportional bandwidth is the width of the band used for proportional control that is, the
movementinthesensedvariablebetweenthevaluesthatgeneratethemaximumandminimumcontrol
signals.Thisproportionalbandwidthiscenteredaboutthemidband.
By way of illustration, if a heater coil is being controlled on outside air temperature, such that at an
outside temperature of 1C requires an off heater temperature of 35C, and at 10C outside the off
heater temperature is reduced to 28C, then the midband would be 4.5K (4.511/2=10,1), and the
proportionalbandwouldbe11K(10(1)=11).Itshouldbenotedthatthevaluefortheminimumcontrol
signalwouldbe35C,andforthemaximumcontrolsignal,28C.
ApacheHVAC can model simple switching (on/off) control and ideal proportional control. Because
ApacheHVACsimplifiestheHVACsystemitcanmodelthe'ideal'translationofacontrolsignaldirectlyto
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
162
therequired changeina physicalquantity.In this respect,ApacheHVAC proportionalcontrolisactually

closerinrealitytorealPIDanddirectdigitalcontrolthanitistorealproportionalcontrol.
Inreality,to controlthe heatinputfromaheatercoil,asensormightbepositionedsomewhereinthe
systemandconfiguredtoadjustthepositionofavalvewhichvariestheflowofhotwaterthroughit.The
controls engineer will choose a control system which gives the most precise match of control signal
(measuredtemperature)torequiredcondition(heatinput).Inawelldesignedcontrolsystem,therewill
beaonetoonecorrespondence.
ApacheHVAC proportional controllers model this situation because a control signal can be translated
directlyintoheatinputoroffcoiltemperatureaccordingtoalinearrelationship,withoutanyofthelag
typicallyintroducedbythewatersideofthesystem.
3.6.4.5
MaximumChangeperTimeStep
This parameter specifies the maximum fractional change that the controller can carry out in each
simulationtimestep.ThefractioniswithrespecttotheoverallrangeofcontrolbetweenthevalueatMax
signalandthevalueatMinsignal.
Thisparameterprovidesaformofdampingandshouldbeadjustedtoalowervalueinsituationswherea
closedloop feedback between the sensor and controller may cause 'hunting'. The program will try to
automaticallycompensateforthistypeofcontrolinstability,butitisadvisabletotakestepstoavoidthe
problemarising.
Neveruseafeedbacklooptocontrolacomponentwhenopenloopcouldbeusedinstead.Whenclosed
loop feedback control is essential or valuable, there are a number of precautions that will facilitate
controlstability:
Ensurethatthecontrolledcomponentsarenotoversizedorthattherangeofcontrolledvalues
isnogreaterthanisnecessarytomeetdesignconditions;
Keepproportionalbandsaswideasisreasonableandappropriate;
Ifpossible,includearoomintheloop(themassofairandmaterialsinaroomprovidesvery
muchslowerresponsetimesthanothercomponents)
Specifyasmallvalueforthe'maximumchangepertimestep'(e.g.0.05to0.2)
Notethattheeffectofthemaximumchangepertimestepvalueenteredwillvarydependingonthetime
step.Thusifyouchangethetimestepyoushouldalsochangethevalueenteredhere.
3.6.4.6
ValueatMinimumSignal
The value for minimum control signal applies to proportional control only. It specifies the value of the
numericalcontrolsignaloutputwhenthesensedvariableisatorbelowthelowerendoftheproportional
band.
Example:
Acontrollerissensingtemperatureinaroomwithamidbandof22Candaproportionalbandwidthof
4Kandtheairflowatanodeistobecontrolledto500l/swhentheroomisat20Candto1500l/s
whenitisat24C.Herethevalueforminimumsignalis500andthevalueformaximumsignalis1500.
Note that the distinction between a direct acting and a reverseacting proportional control is made by
exchangingthevalueatminimumsignalwiththevalueatmaximumsignal.Thevalueatminimumsignalis
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
163
generatedforlowvaluesofthesensedvariableandthevalueatmaximumsignalforhighvaluesofthe
sensedvariable.
3.6.5
ANDConnections
132B
The effect of AND connections is to permit a controller to generate an ON signal only when its own
switchingsignalANDallcontrollerscoupledtoitviaANDconnectionsaregeneratingONsignals.
To attach an AND connection click on the AND connection icon and drag a line from the controller
generating the signal to the controller receiving the signal. AND connections attached to the current
controllerarelistedinthedialog,andmaybedeletedusingtheRemovebutton.
Thistypeoflogicalcombinationisuseful,forexample,whenasystemhasadifferentmodeofoperation
in summer and winter, with automatic switchover as a function of outside air temperature. The
summer/winterswitchcanbedescribedastwocontrollers;furthercontrollerscanbeANDcombinedwith
thesummerorwintercontrollers.
ThesignalsfromallORconnectionsarecomputedbeforecombiningtheresultwithsignalsfromanyAND
connections.
3.6.6
ORConnections
133B
The effect of an OR connection to a controller with a sensor is to make the controller generate an ON
switching signal if either its own on/off controller OR the signals from one or more other attached
controllersisON.
To attach an OR connection click on the OR connection icon and drag a line from the controller
generating the signal to the controller receiving the signal. OR connections can be applied to all
controllerswithsensors(independent,differential,ordependent),butnottimeswitchcontrollers.
ORconnectionsdonotoverridetheTimeSwitchProfileforthecontroller.WhentheTimeSwitchProfileis
OFFtheswitchingsignalisOFF.
ThesignalsfromallORconnectionsarecomputedbeforecombiningtheresultwithsignalsfromanyAND
connections.
OR connections are less commonly used than AND connections. One application is in frost protection,
where they can be used to detect when any one of a set of rooms falls below a given temperature
threshold.
ORconnectionsattachedtothecurrentcontrollerarelistedinthedialog,andmaybedeletedusingthe
Removebutton.
3.7 ControllerAlgorithm
34B
Shown below is a flow chart illustrating the decision making process followed by a controller. Not all
controllersuseeverystepoftheprocess.Forexample,atimeswitchcontrollerdoesnotuseasensorand
willproceeddirectlytothetimeswitchprofiledecision.
The independent controller with sensor and independent differential controller have tick boxes for set
pointandproportionalcontrol.Atleastoneoftheseboxesmustbetickedtoprovidesomefeedbackfor
thecontroller.Ifonlysetpointistickedthenthecontrolledcomponentwillattempttomaintainthevalue
at maximum control signal when the controller is ON and no control will be maintained when the
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
164
controller is OFF. If we assume a controller is being used to control airflow and both the set point and
proportionalcheckboxesaretickedthen:
WhenthecontrollerisOFF,flowatthisnodeiszero.
WhenthecontrollerisON:
o If under proportional control, the flow rate at this node will depend on the value
corresponding to the control signal coming from the proportional controller at any
instantintime.
o Ifnotunderproportionalcontrol,theflowrateatthisnodewilldependonthevalue
specifiedforthemaximumcontrolsignal.
Normallytheonlyreasonforusingboththesetpointandproportionaltickboxesonthesamecontroller
is in order to allow the signal for the set point to be modified by AND or OR connection. However, an
exception applies in the case of radiators and chilled ceilings. If proportional control is used for these
componentsthecontrollermusthavethesetpointboxticked,anditscontrolparametersmustbesuchas
togiveanONsignalwhenthedeviceisscheduledtooperate.
Start
Vaule of variable
being sensed
Does the sensed variable in conjunction

with the set point return an ON signal?
NO
Are there any referenced OR controllers

currently in an ON state?
YES (or no Set Point)
YES
Does the current time fall within the

Time Switch Profile?
YES
NO
OFF Control Signal
NO
YES
Are there any referenced AND

controllers currently in an OFF state?
NO
ON Control Signal
Figure33:OnOffcontrollogic
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
165
3.8 Airflowcontrol
35B
Inthecaseofairflowcontrol,thenodewheretheflowiscontrolledmaybeanywhereinthenetwork;itis
notnecessarytomakeanycontrolconnectionsatthefaninordertoestablishsystemairflowrates.Asan
exampleofcontrolsmoregenerally,thecontrolsaffecttheairflowasfollows:
A flow controller, in common with controllers of other system variables, has an on/off state that is a
governedbyitsprofileandanyANDorORconnectionsattachedtoit.
WhenthecontrollerisOFF,theflowatthecontrollednodeiszero.
Whentheon/offcontrollerisON:
Ifproportionalcontrolisset,theflowrateatthenodewilldependonthevaluecorresponding
tothecontrolsignalgeneratedbytheproportionalcontroller.
Ifproportionalcontrolisnotset,theflowrateatthenodewilldependonthevaluespecified
forthemaximumcontrolsignal.
Flowrateissubjecttoafurthertypeofcontrolthatdoesnotapplytoothercontrolledvariables.Flowrate
isnotonlyswitchedbetweenonandoffstatesbythecontrolprofileitismodulatedbyit.Thusifthe
percentage flow controller has a value of 70% at a particular time, the flow value calculated from the
control parameters will be multiplied by 0.7. This feature has been introduced to provide additional
flexibilityinflowspecification.
Forothercontrolledvariables,theTimeSwitchprofileisinterpretedasanon/offswitch,beingonwhen
the profile has a value greater than 50% and off otherwise. This principle applies whether or not
proportionalcontrolisused.
Onceacontrollerhasbeenusedtoestablishtheflowrateatanode,theprogramfeedsthatinformation
forwardsandbackwardsalongtheairdistributionpathuntilitreachesajunction(i.e.itassumestheflow
rateintoanycomponent equalstheflowrateout,exceptatjunctions).Atjunctions,the programmust
knowtheflowratesatalltheconnectednodesexceptone.Itcanthencalculatetheunknownflowfrom
the known ones. In this way the program can calculate the flow rates at every point in the system,
providedtherearesufficientcontrollersappropriatelypositioned.
It is usually sufficient to place flow controllers only at those nodes which are immediately upstream of
rooms,andatoneothernodetoestablishtheratioofoutsidetorecirculatedair.Fromthis,theprogram
can work backwards through the system network calculating the flow rates elsewhere by addition and
subtractionatjunctions.
In constant volume systems the ratio of outside air can be controlled without the use of a damper
component by simply specifying the absolute value of flow rate at the outside air inlet. In variable air
volumesystemsitistypicallynecessarytouseaDampersetcomponentinthefreshairinlettocontrol
thepercentageofoutsideair.Atthenodeimmediatelydownstreamofadamperset,eitherpercentage
flowcontrolfortheoutsideairbranchoratargetdrybulbtemperatureforthemixedairmustbeusedto
controltheoutsideairventilationrate(inasmuchasitexceedstheminimumsettinginthedamper).
In some systems for example dual duct systems additional flow controllers are required to specify
flowsinthesystembranches.
Ifflowratescannotbecalculatedatallnodes,anerrorwillbereported.Forthefullsetofrulesonsetting
flowratesseeAppendixA:Rulesforairflowspecification.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
166
3.9 IndependentTimeSwitchController
36B
Figure34:IndependentTimeSwitchControllers(withoutandwithanANDconnection)
This is the simplest type of controller. It controls a variable at a constant value at prescribed times
(subject to physical feasibility and the optional addition of AND connections). When it is attached
immediatelydownstreamofacomponentsuchasaheatingcoilitcontrolsthecoilinsuchawayastoset
the offcoil temperature, provided this is feasible given the oncoil condition, the airflow rate and the
coilscapacity.
Thetermindependentisusedtodenotethatthecontrollerfeedsitssignaldirectlyintoacomponent(in
thiscaseapreheatcoilandamixingdamperset).Independentcontrollersgeneratetwotypesofsignal:a
switchingsignalandanumericalsignal.Theswitchingsignalturnsthecontrolleddeviceonoroffandthe
numericalsignalindicatesthevaluetobesetforthecontrolledvariable.
The switching signal is ON when the time switch profile is ON (subject to provisos detailed below). The
numerical signal is the value of the parameter V at maximum signal, where V denotes the controlled
variable.
ANDandORconnectionsattachedasoutputsfromthecontrollermaybeusedtofeeditsswitchingsignal
intoothercontrollers.
IfANDconnectionsareinputtoanindependenttimeswitchcontrollertheyaffecttheswitchingsignalin
thefollowingway.
ThecontrollergivesanONsignalwhen,andonlywhen:
thetimeswitchprofileisON
alltheinputANDconnections(ifanyarepresent)areON
and
ANDandORconnectionsonlyconveyaswitchingsignal,notanumericalsignal.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
167
Figure35:ExampleparametersforTimeSwitchController
In the example shown in Figure 34 the switching signal will be ON at all times, provided the switching
signalfromthecontrollernamedMixedair<53F=OFF(2Fdeadband),whichiscoupledbyanAND
connection,isalsoON.Thenumericcontrolsignalwillthenbe53F.
The independent time switch controller has been illustrated here first using temperature control as an
example. When the controlled variable is airflow rate, as in Figure 35, below) two special conditions
apply.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
168
Figure36:IndependentControllerwithSensor
First,anairflowratecontrollermaybeattachedtoanyduct,whereitwillhavetheeffectofsettingthe
flowtothenumericalcontrolsignal.
Second,thetimeswitchprofilehasaspecialfunctioninairflowcontrol.Ratherthanbeinginterpretedas
ON(asdenotedbyavaluegreaterthan50%)orOFF(othervalues),theprofileistreatedasamodulating
functionmultiplyingthenumericalcontrolsignal.Thisfeaturecanproveusefulasameansofsettingtime
varyingflowrates.
3.10 IndependentControllerwithSensor
37B
This type of controller responds to a variable sensed at a system node. It includes a time switch and
options for both ON/OFF setpoint control and proportional control. These options can be used in
combination,ifdesired.
Figure37:IndependentControllerwithSensor
Thistypeofcontrollerrespondstoavariablesensedatasystemnode.InthecaseillustratedinFigure37,
thecontrollermonitorsroomtemperatureandfeedsitssignalintoaheatingcoilontheprimaryairsupply
totheroom.
After placing the controller, select the controlled node (indicated by an arrow), followed by the sensed
node.
Thecontrol parametersshowninFigure38aresetuptoprovideproportionalcontrol.WhentheTime
SwitchProfileison,theoffcoiltemperatureisadjustedbetween28Cand14Cthevaluessetforthe
parametersDrybulbtemperatureatminimumsignalandDrybulbtemperatureatmaximumsignalas
the room air temperature varies over a proportional band centered on 20C (the midband) and with a
widthof2K(theproportionalbandwidth).
ThecontrolcharacteristicforproportionalcontrolisshowngraphicallyinFigure39.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
169
Figure38ExampleparametersforIndependentControllerwithSensor
Controlled
variable
Proportional
bandwidth
Value at
minimum signal
Value at
maximum signal
Midband
Sensed
variable
Figure39:Proportionalcontrolcharacteristic
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
170
Intheprecedingexamplethesetpointcontrolhasbeenturnedoffinfavorofproportionalcontrol.Set
point(on/off)controlisanalternativetoproportionalcontrolinwhichthesignalfedintothecontrolled
device can take only two values: ON or OFF. The control characteristic for on/off control is shown in
Figure310.
On/off control
signal
Deadband
ON
Characteristic
illustrated for
High Sensor
Input = OFF
OFF
Set point
Sensed
variable
Figure310:On/off(setpoint)controlcharacteristic
Thestateoftheon/offcontrollerswitchesbetweenONandOFFasthesensedvariablerisesthroughthe
upper limit or falls through the lower limit of the deadband. Within the deadband the signal retains its
currentvalue.Thecharacteristicgivesrisetohysteresis:thevalueofthecontrolsignalinthedeadband
dependsonthehistoryofthesensedvariableaswellasitscurrentvalue.
Theoverallshapeoftheon/offcharacteristicissetbytheparameterHighSensorInput.IfthisisOFF(asin
theFigure)thesignalisOFFathighvaluesofthesensedvariable.IfitisONthecharacteristicisinverted.
Theon/offlogicalcontrolsignalissubjecttomodificationbyoptionalANDandOR connectionsfeeding
intoit.Theseconnectionsalsogoverntheoperationofthecontrollerwhenproportionalcontrolisused.
ThecontrollergivesanONsignal(andoperatesinproportionalcontrolmode)when,andonlywhen:
thetimeswitchprofileisON
and
theon/offcontrolsignal,oratleastoneORconnection,isON,or
theon/off(setpoint)controlisnotticked
and
alltheinputANDconnections(ifanyarepresent)areON
ANDandORconnectionsattachedasoutputsfromthecontrollermaybeusedtofeeditsswitchingsignal
intoothercontrollers.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
171
3.10.1 Proportionalcontrolssequencing
134B
Coordinationofzonecoolingairflowandcoolingsupplyairtemperature(SAT)resetatthesystemcooling
coil according to zone demand provides an instructive example of how and why controls should be
sequenced.Figures311,312,and313showfirstagraphplottingthefunctionsofthesecontrollerswith
respect to the room temperature and then the controller input dialogs for typical VAV cooling airflow
control and SAT reset. To keep the visualization clear, the nighttime setback and fan cycling for
unoccupiedhoursviatimedmidbandshavebeenomittedfromthegraphshownhere(seethesectionson
PrototypeSystemsandSystemSizingtowardtheendofthisuserguideformoreinformation).Thegraph
showsonlyhowthetwocontrollerswouldfunctionduringoccupiedhours.
Figure311:PlotoftypicalVAVcoolingairflowcontrolandSATreset.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
172
Figure312:ControllerinputsfortypicalVAVcoolingairflowcontrol.
Figure313:ControllerinputsfortypicalVAVheatingairflowcontrol.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
173
3.11 IndependentDifferentialController
38B
Figure314:IndependentDifferentialController
Theindependentdifferentialcontrollertakesasitsinputthedifferencebetweenvariablessensedattwo
systemnodes.Inotherrespectsitbehaveslikeanindependentcontrollerwithsensor.
After placing the controller, select the controlled node (indicated by an arrow), followed by the two
sensednodes.Theorderofselectingthesensednodesisimportant:theinputsignalisthevalueatthe
nodeselectedfirstminusthevalueatthenodeselectedsecond.Onthegraphicthefirstselectednodeis
shownattachingtothecontrolboxbelowthesecondselectednode.
Thistypeofcontrollerisusedlessoftenthanthedependentdifferentialcontroller.Inthecaseillustrated
inFigures314and315,itsensesthedifferencebetweenflowssensedintwonetworkbranchesandsets
athirdflowequaltothisdifferencewhenitispositive.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
174

Figure315:ExampleparametersforIndependentDifferentialController
3.12 DependentTimeSwitchController
39B
Figure 316: Dependent Time Switch Controller (shown with both with input AND connection and
outputORconnection)
This controller operates like the independent time switch controller, but is not directly attached to a
component.Itspurposeistogenerateaswitchingsignaltobefedintooneormoreothercontrollersvia
ANDandORconnections.ThecontrolsignalisafunctionoftheprofileandanyinputANDconnections.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
175
3.13 DependentControllerwithSensor
40B
Figure317:DependentControllerwithSensor(withoutputANDconnection)
This controller operates like an independent controller with sensor but is not directly attached to a
component.Itspurposeistogenerateaswitchingsignaltobefedintooneormoreothercontrollersvia
ANDandORconnections.Theswitchingsignalisafunctionoftheprofile,thesensedvariableanyinput
ANDorORconnections.Proportionalcontrolisnotanoptionwiththistypeofcontroller,asitdoesnot
generateanumericcontrolsignal.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
176
Figure318:ExampleparametersforDependentControllerwithSensor
IntheexampleshowninFigure318,thecontrollermonitorsoutsidedewpointtemperatureandgivesan
ONsignalwhenitexceeds56F.Inthiscase,thereisnodeadband,asthecontrolwillnotinfluencethe
outdooraircondition,andthustherewillbenopossibilityofafeedbackloop.
3.14 DependentDifferentialController
41B
Figure319:DependentDifferentialController(withoutputANDconnection)
The dependent differential controller takes as its input the difference between variables sensed at two
systemnodes.Inotherrespectsitbehaveslikeadependentcontrollerwithsensor.Acommonuseforthis
type of controller is to detect whether fresh air is warmer or cooler than return air as the basis for
recirculationdecisions.
Afterplacingthecontroller,selectthetwosensednodes.
Theorderofselectingthesensednodesisimportant:Theinputsignalisgivenbythevalueatthefirst
nodeselectedminusthevalueatthesecondnodeselected.InFigure319,thefirstsensednodeisshown
attaching to the control box below the second sensed node. This will always be true, regardless of the
lefthandvs.righthandorientationofthedifferentialcontrollerbox.
InthecaseillustratedinFigure319andthefirstofthetwoexamplecontroldialogsinFigure320,the
controllersensesthedifferencebetweentemperaturesinthereturnandfreshairinletductsandreturns
anONsignalifthereturnairenthalpyisgreaterthantheoutsideairenthalpy.Thissignalisfed,viaan
ANDconnection,intothedampersetcontrollingoutsideairintake.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
177
Figure320:ExampleparametersforDependentDifferentialControllers:Thefirst(top)generatesanON
signalifEnthalpySensor1EnthalpySensor2=positivevaluegreaterthan0.01.Thisistypicalofdamper
controlsintendedtointroducemorethantheminimumoutsideaironlywhenithasalowerenthalpythan
the return air. The second (bottom) example generates an ON signal if the value at the outdoor air
TemperatureSensorisgreaterthanorequaltothevalueataroomtemperaturesensor3F.Thisisa
typical control for mechanical fan systems in mixedmode building that are intended to operate only
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
178
whentheconditionsareunfavorablefornaturalventilation(e.g.,whentheoutsideairisnotatleast3F
cooler than the room air). This second example also includes OR connections to dependent controllers
withsensorsmeanttooverrideit(providinganONsignalwhenthiscontrollerwouldotherwisenotdoso)
ifeithertheroomtemperatureexceedsanelevatedsetpointoraCO2threshold,ineithercasesuggesting
that the windows are not open when they should be or that, despite favorable outdoor temperatures,
thereisnotenoughairmovementtomeetcoolingorventilationdemandviatheoperablewindows.
NotethatwhiletheSetpointvaluewhensensingtemperature(DBT,WBT,orDPT)willbeexpressed
inK(indicatingadifferential)wheninmetricunitsmode,inIPunitsthedifferentialwillbeexpressed
inF,asthereisnodifferentialIPunitfortemperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
179
RoomUnitControllers
3B
Figure41:Roomcomponentdialog,includingfacilitiesforselectingdefinedRoomUnitsandexamples
ofunittypes(notethatthisisforillustrationonly,asitwouldbeveryunusualtoplaceroomunitsfrom
allthreecategoriesinasinglespacewithinthemodel).
Room unit Types are initially placed in the Room component dialog and must be defined before this
action will be available for a given category of room unit. The room component can represent any
occupied or unoccupied 3D space in the model, including normal rooms or thermal zones as well as
heated or cooled ceiling or floor slabs. The userdefined types are effectively components sitting on a
shelf, but not active until placed in a room component. Each time a room unit type is placed within a
roomcomponent,anadditionalinstanceofthattypeiscreated.Theroomunitcontrollersbelowarethus
specifictoeachseparateinstanceofaparticularroomunittype.
Theroomunitcontrollersprovidecontrolovertheparticulardeviceorunitinstancewithwhichtheyre
associated. In the case of radiators and chilled ceilings, controls include scheduling of on/off
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
180
operationbytimeswitchprofiles,on/offcontrolaccordingtosensedvariables,andproportionalcontrol
ofwatertemperatureand/orflowrateaccordingtosensedvariables.Asinglesurfacetemperaturesensor
per zone, as described above under sensed variables, is available for use with any room unit on/off or
proportionalcontrol.
4.1 HotWaterRadiatorControl
42B
InApacheHVAC,thetermRadiatorscoversabroadrangeofhydronicheatingdevicesplaceddirectlyin
conditioned spaces. These generally include castiron radiators, radiant panel heaters, fintube
convectors,andsoforth.Radiatorscanalsobeusedasahydronicloopwithinaheatedslabzone,butcare
shouldbetakeninsuchcasestoappropriatelydefinethethetypeusingparametersthatwillrepresent
thepropertiesofjustthehydronicloopwithintheslab.
Figure42:Radiatorcontroldialogwithillustrativeinputsforafintubehydronicbaseboardheaterusing
setpointandsetbacktemperaturesforthermostaticon/offcontrolinoccupiedandunoccupiedhours,a
fixedsupplywatertemperature,andproportionalcontrolofwaterflowratetomodulatetheoutputof
the device. In this case sensors have been located in the local room, however, they can be located in
otherspacesoroutsideofthebuilding.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
181
4.1.1.1
Reference
Enteradescriptionofthecontroller.Thereferenceislimitedto100characters.Itisforyourusewhen
4.1.1.2
Radiatortypereference
Selectaradiatordeviceforplacementintheroomfromthelistofpreviouslydefinedtypes.
4.1.1.3
Heatsource
Selectthereferenceofthepreviouslydefinedheatsourcefromlist,whichwillservetheradiatorplacedin
theroomfromtheradiatorslist.
4.1.2
On/offandsetpointcontrols
135B
4.1.2.1
FlowforMaximumControlSignal
Entertheflowratethatcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifnoproportional
controlistobeused,entertheflowratethatoccurswheneverthisradiatorison.Notethatforreverse
actingproportionalcontrolwherethesensedvariableisroomtemperature(typicalforheatingdevises),
thisvalueislowerthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrolsignal.
WarningLimits(l/s)
ErrorLimits(l/s)
4.1.2.2
0.001to2.5
0.0to99.0
WaterTemperatureforMaximumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturewhichcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifno
proportional control was specified, enter the temperature of the radiator supply water. Note that for
reverseacting proportional control where the sensed variable is room temperature (typical for heating
devises),thisvalueislowerthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrolsignal.
WarningLimits(C)
ErrorLimits(C)
VE6.3
30.0to85.0
0.0to250.0
ApacheHVAC
182
4.1.2.3
Timeswitchprofile
4.1.2.4
Sensorlocation
4.1.2.5
Sensedvariable
4.1.2.6
Radiantfraction
4.1.2.7
Radiantfraction
4.1.2.8
Setpointvariation
4.1.2.9
Setpointorvariationprofile
4.1.2.10 Deadband
4.1.2.11 Highsensorinput(resultingon/offaction)
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
ProportionalControllerforHotWaterFlowRate
136B
ProportionalTemperatureController
Ticktheboxnexttothisitemtouseproportionalcontrolofthewatertemperatureintheradiator.Then
clickontheitemtoenterandeditparametersfortheproportionalcontroller.Ifproportionalcontrolof
watertemperatureis not used,thewatertemperaturewillbefixedatthevaluegivenintheTempat
MaxControlSignalinput.
4.1.3.2
Sensorlocation
4.1.3.3
Sensedvariable
4.1.3.4
Midbandvariation
4.1.3.5
Midbandorvariationprofile
4.1.3.6
Proportionalbandwidth
4.1.3.7
Maximumchangepertimestep
4.1.3.8
TemperatureforMinimumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturethatcorrespondstotheminimumsignalfromtheproportionalcontroller.If
noproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,thevalueenteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimum
controlsignalisgeneratedwhenthesensedvalueisatorbelowthemidbandminushalftheproportional
band.
4.1.3.9
Radiantfraction(forsensor)
4.1.3.10 ANDReferences
4.1.3.11 ORReferences
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
183
4.2 ChilledCeilingControl
Enterdetailsofthecoldwaterflowratecontrolonthefirstlineofdataanddetailsforthesupplywater
temperaturecontrolonthesecondline.
Youcanmodellocalthermostaticallycontrolledunitsbyvaryingtheflowthroughtheunitaccordingtoan
on/off proportional controller combination sensing temperature in that room and fixing the water
temperatureonthesecondlineofdata.
Figure43:ChilledCeilingcontroldialogwithillustrativeinputs
4.2.1.1
ChilledCeilingTypeReference
Selectachilledceilingdeviceforplacementintheroomfromthelistofpreviouslydefinedtypes.
4.2.1.2
Chiller
Selectthechilledwaterloopthatwillservethechilledceilingdevice.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
184
4.2.2
On/offandsetpointcontrols
137B
4.2.2.1
FlowforMaximumControlSignal
Entertheflowratethatcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifnoproportional
controlistobeused,entertheflowratethatoccurswheneverthischilledceilingdeviceison.Notethat
fordirectactingproportionalcontrolwherethesensedvariableisroomtemperature(typicalforacooling
device), this value is higher than that in the water temperature at minimum control signal, and for
reverseactingcontrol,itislower.
WarningLimits(l/s)
ErrorLimits(l/s)
4.2.2.2
0.001to2.5
0.0to99.0
ChilledCeilingWaterTemperatureforMaximumControlSignal
Enter the water temperature that corresponds to the maximum control signal from the proportional
controller.Ifnoproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,enterthetemperatureofthechilledceilingsupply
water. Note that for direct acting proportional control where the sensed variable is room temperature
(typicalforacoolingdevice),thisvalueishigherthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrol
signal,andforreverseactingcontrol,itislower.
4.2.2.3
Timeswitchprofile
4.2.2.4
Sensorlocation
4.2.2.5
Sensedvariable
4.2.2.6
Radiantfraction
4.2.2.7
Radiantfraction
4.2.2.8
Setpointvariation
4.2.2.9
Setpointorvariationprofile
4.2.2.10 Deadband
4.2.2.11 Highsensorinput(resultingon/offaction)
4.2.3
ProportionalControllerforColdWaterFlowRate
138B
Enterthereferenceofapreviouslydefinedproportionalcontroller,ifapplicable.Leavethisfieldblankif
proportionalcontrolofflowrateisnotused.Inthiscasetheflowthroughthechilledceilingistakenas
thevalueinthe'Flowformaximumcontrolsignal'cellwhenevertheon/offcontrollerison.
4.2.3.1
FlowforMinimumControlSignal
Enter the water flow rate through the chilled ceiling that corresponds to the minimum signal from the
proportionalcontrollerspecifiedinthepreviouscell.Ifnoproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,anyvalue
enteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimumcontrolsignalisgeneratedwhenthevaluesensed
by the proportional controller is at or below the midband minus half the proportional band. Thus, a
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
185
reverseactingproportionalcontrolwouldhavealargervalueherethaninthe'Flowformaximumcontrol
signal'cell.
WarningLimits(l/s)
ErrorLimits(l/s)
4.2.4
0.001to2.5
0.0to99.0
ProportionalTemperatureController
139B
Ticktheboxnexttothisitemtouseproportionalcontrolofthewatertemperatureinthechilledceiling
unit.Thenclickontheitemtoenterandeditparametersfortheproportionalcontroller.Ifproportional
controlofwatertemperatureisnotused,thewatertemperaturewillbefixedatthevaluegiveninthe
TempatMaxControlSignalinput.
4.2.4.1
Sensorlocation
4.2.4.2
Sensedvariable
4.2.4.3
Midbandvariation
4.2.4.4
Midbandorvariationprofile
4.2.4.5
Proportionalbandwidth
4.2.4.6
Maximumchangepertimestep
4.2.4.7
TemperatureforMinimumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturethatcorrespondstotheminimumsignalfromtheproportionalcontroller.If
noproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,thevalueenteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimum
controlsignalisgeneratedwhenthesensedvalueisatorbelowthemidbandminushalftheproportional
band.
4.2.4.8
Radiantfraction(forsensor)
4.2.4.9
ANDReferences
4.2.4.10 ORReferences
4.3 DirectActingRoomHeaterController
43B
4.3.1.1
Reference
Enteradescriptionofthecontroller.Thereferenceislimitedto100characters.Itisforyourusewhen
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
186
4.3.1.2
Heater
Select the reference of a previously defined direct acting heater for placement in the room from the
directactingheaterslist.
Figure44:Directactingheater/coolercontrol(proportionalcontrolbandrangesfromheatingoperation
atMinsignaltocoolingoperationatMaxsignal;SetpointcontroliseffectivelyforcedtoONsothatthe
TimeSwitchscheduleandtheProportionalControlwilldeterminetheoperation).
4.3.1.3
HeatOutputforMaximumControlSignal
Entertheheat(orcooling,asanegativevalue)outputthatcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignal
fromthecontroller.Notethatfordirectactingproportionalcontrolthisvalueisgreaterthanthatinthe
'Directheateroutputforminimumcontrolsignal'cell,andforreverseactingitissmaller.
4.3.1.4
SensorLocation
Thesensormaybeinternal(containedinaroom)orexternal.Anexternalsensorwouldbetheequivalent
ofaweathercompensatedsystem.Severaldirectactingheatersmayusethesameinternalroomsensor
e.g.allroomsonthewestofabuildingmaybecontrolledbyasinglesensor.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
187
HVACWizard
4B
5.1 HVACWizardInterface
44B
TheHVACwizardenablestheusertoviewrecentlymodifiedsystemsorquicklycreateanumberofsimple
predefined ApacheHVAC models. The creation of the models assumes typical sizes for heat sources,
chillers,radiators,chilledsurfaces,directactingheater,heatingcoils,coolingcoilsandalsosensibleset
points for the controllers. These sensible defaults will need to be amended to the project specific
requirements.
While this facility has been made largely obsolete with the provision of considerably more detailed
prototype systems (see that section later in this user guide) and the advent of multiplexing (see that
sectionfollowingthisone),theverybasicHVACWizardsystemscanstillbeofuseforsimplifiedanalyses,
particularlyinbuildingswithveryfewrooms.
5.1.1
HVACWizarddialog
140B
Figure51:HVACWizardpage1
5.1.1.1
CreateNewSystem
VE6.3
Selectthistocreateanewsystem
ApacheHVAC
188
5.1.1.2
OpenRecentSystem
5.1.1.3
Next
5.1.1.4
SelecttoviewnextpageintheHVACWizard
Cancel
5.1.2
Selecttoopenarecentdocument
SelecttoexitfromtheHVACWizardwithoutopeningorcreatingaHVACsystem
HVACWizard:CreateNewSystem
141B
Figure52:HVACWizardNewsystempage2
VE6.3
Selecttypeofsystemrequiredfromthelistofavailablesystems.
ApacheHVAC
189
5.1.3
Page3oftheHVACWizard(CreateNewSystem)
142B
Figure53:HVACWizard:NewSystempage3
5.1.3.1
AddZone
ClicktoaddroomstotheHVACsystem.Choosetherequiredroomfromthedropdownlist.
Notethatthisapproachshouldnotbeusedforsystemsthatwillbemultiplexed:Themultiplexstructure
provides stacked duplicates of all components and controllers on the original base layer in the
multiplexedregionoftheHVACnetwork(seesection6.MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks).
5.1.3.2
Reset
ClicktoresettheHVACsystemtothestartingsinglezonesystem
5.1.3.3
Finish
ClicktocreatetheHVACsystem
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
190
5.1.4
HVACWizard:OpenRecentSystem
143B
Figure54:RecentSystemsviewwithintheHVACWizard.
This dialog shows recently used, modified, or opened system models in the order in which they were
accessed.Thesefilesmaybeinany combinationofcurrentlyavailablefolders.Selectasystemtoopen
and click Finish. If the system selected is from a previous project or is to be significantly modified, it is
advisabletoproceedfromheretoSaveAsbeforemakinganychanges.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
191
MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks
5B
Multiplexing allows users to more efficiently create, populate, modify, and edit large ApacheHVAC
networks, considerably reducing the project workload. Multiplexing gives users the ability to condense
anyApacheHVACnetworktoamoremanageableformat.
MultiplexToolbarbutton
Themultiplexfeaturecanbeusedonatotalsystemlevel,justatthezonelevel,orfornearlyanyother
subsetofasystem(seerulesformultiplexes,below).Theexamplebelowisa4zonenetworkwithfancoil
unitsforeachzoneandacommonoutsideairsystem.Figure61showsthenetworksetupwithoutthe
multiplexfeature;figure62showstheequivalentmultiplexednetwork.
Figure61:NonmultiplexedApacheHVACnetwork
Figure 62: Equivalent ApacheHVAC network with Multiplex. The image on the right is depicting the
additionallayersthatareeffectivelyhiddenunderthecurrentlyselectedDisplayLayer.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
192
6.1 CreatingaMultiplexOverview
45B
AmultiplexiscreatedbyselectingtheMultiplexbuttonin
the main toolbar & dragging the
greenmultiplexboxfromthebottomlefttothetoprightcornerofthedesiredmultiplexregion.Rulesfor
multiplexesandmultiplexedcontrollersareprovidedbelow,followingtheillustrationofbasicsteps.
Step1:Positionthegreenmultiplexboxatthebottomleftcorneroftheareaofnetworkthatyou
wishtomultiplex.
Step2:Holdingdowntheleftmousebuttondragthegreenmultiplexboxfromthebottomlefttothe
toprightofthedesiredmultiplexregionandreleasethebutton.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
193
Step3:Oncetherectangularboundaryforthemultiplexregionofthesystemhasbeendraggedoverthe
networkcomponents,theCreateMultiplexdialogwillappear.
Rooms or thermal zones in the model are assigned to multiplex layers either by adding layers and manually
selectingthespacesfromthePrincipalRoomdropdownlistoneachlayerorbyusingtheAssignfromRoom
Groupfeature.ThesearedescribedinmoredetailunderCreateMultiplex,below.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
194
Step4:Onceamultiplex hasbeen created,thenetworkcomponentsandcontrollerscan bepopulatedwith

inputvaluesappropriatetothezonesanddesiredcontrolfunctionsoneachlayer.Calculatedflowrates,set
points, cooling coil capacities, reference formula profiles, etc. can be entered into the network controllers
layerbylayer(Localediting),inallcurrentlyselectedlayers(Globalediting),orpastedfromaspreadsheetinto
a range of selected layers via a tabularData Table edit view (Global editing). For autosizing of values within
multiplexedcomponentsandcontrollers,seetheSystemPrototypes&SizingsectionofthisUserGuide.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
195
6.1.1
RulesforMultiplexesandcontrollerswithinthem
144B
Whendefiningthemultiplexregion,somerulesmustbefollowed:
Themultiplexedregionofthenetworkmustcontainatleastoneroomcomponent.
Amultiplexboundarymustnotabutoroverlapanexistingmultiplex.
Itmustsatisfytherulesforcontrollersinamultiplex,asfollows;
1. Acontrollerisinamultiplexifitscontrolboxisinsidethemultiplexboundary.
2. Anycontrolleroutsideamultiplexmayonlysenseorcontrolnonmultiplexednodes.
3. A controller inside a multiplex can sense and control any nodes inside or outside the
multiplex.
4. Acontrollerinsideamultiplexmaynotsenseandcontrolnodesinanothermultiplex.
5. AND or OR connections cannot connect a controller in one multiplex to a controller in
anothermultiplex.
A multiplex must not contain any sections of a network that consist only of connectors (see
Figure63below).
Any connection between multiplexes must contain at least one component or junction so that
nodescanbegenerated(seeFigure63below).
Figure63:Disalloweduseofconnectorsegmentsthroughamultiplexandbetweenmultiplexes:
Figure63providesexamplesofnetworkbranchesconsistingsolelyofconnectingsegmentsthatarenot
permitted within a multiplex. In cases such as that shown on the left, either reroute the connectors
aroundtheanticipatedmultiplexregionormovethecontrollerboxdownwardssothatthemultiplex
with not overlap the upper path. Direct connections between multiplexes consisting solely of
connecting segments (straight or elbow), such as illustrated on the right-hand side of this figure,
are not permitted. The network must be revised so that there is a junction or other component
between the multiplexes.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
196
Note: It will be common to have multiplelayer instances of a controller pointing to one component
control node. In such cases, the controller will compete for or vote on the value of the controlled
variableateverysimulationtimestep.Thevaluethatprevailsdependsuponthecontrolledvariableand
typeofcomponentbeingcontrolled.Forexample,whilethehighesttemperaturewillprevailinthecase
ofaheatingcoil,thelowesttemperaturewillprevailforacoolingcoil.
Warning: Where multiple airflow controls are present on one branch, these must all point to the same
nodeiftheiroperationwillevercompeteforcontrol.Anattempttosimultaneouslycontrolairflowfrom
twodifferentnodesonasinglebranchwillresultinanoverconstrainedflow.
6.2 CreateMultiplex
46B
Whenanewmultiplexiscreatedbydefiningitsboundary,theCreateMultiplexdialogisdisplayed.The
nameanddescriptionofthemultiplex,thenumberoflayerscontainedinthemultiplex,andtheprincipal
roomassignmenttoeachlayerareenteredhere.
6.2.1
Description
145B
Enter a name and description here to make it easier to identify the multiplex and manage complex
systems.
6.2.2
EditingMode
146B
Editparameterswithincomponentsandcontrollersononelayeratatime(Localediting)oraselectionof
layers(Globalediting).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
197
6.2.3
Layers
147B
AssignfromRoomGroup,asdescribedthesectiondedicatedtothatbelow,isthemostefficientwayto
add and populate the correct number of layers in a system multiplex. Alternatively, simply select the
number of layers to be added to or inserted into the multiplex, then click Insert Layer (new layers are
insertedattheselectedlayer)orAddLayer(layersareappendedtothebottomofthelist).
Select layers then click Delete Layers to remove them from the list (note it is not possible to delete all
layersfromamultiplex)
TheCtrlandShiftkeysareusedtoaddorremoveindividuallayerstoorfromthecurrentselectionset
andtoholdtheviewfromscrollingwhentherearemorelayersthancanbeviewedatonce.
6.2.3.1 LockLayerSelection
When multiple layers are selected (selection must be set while in Global Edit mode) tick Lock Layer
Selectiontoavoidaccidentallyeditinganunselectedlayere.g.,afterswitchinglayersonthetoolbar.The
lockedstateappliestobothGlobalandLocaleditmodes.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
198
6.2.4
PrincipalRooms
148B
ThefirstroominthemultiplexnetworkisnominatedasthePrincipalRoomand
indicatedasagreenroomcomponentonthenetwork.
EachlayerinthemultiplexisassignedaPrincipalRoomtohelpidentifythelayer.
DoubleclickthePrincipalRoomcolumnforanyLayertoselectthePrincipalroom
fromthelistofroomsinthemodel.
Each layer in a multiplex can have more than one Room component on it. All
layers, however, must include the same number of Room components. Three
examplesofthisareprovidedbelow.
Roomcomponentscanhaveduplicateassignmentsacrossmultiplelayers.Thisis
mosttypicallyusedfornonprincipalrooms(seeexamples1and3below).
Nonprincipalroomcomponentscanremainunusedonselectedlayers.Thisrequiresonlythattheyare
setviatheirRoomassignmenttoactasanAdiabaticduct,ratherthanbeingassociatedwitharoomor
zoneinthe3Dmodel(seeexamples1and2below).
Tochangearoomcomponentonthenetworkfromanonprincipalroom(blueoutline)foralllayersto
thePrincipalRoomforalllayers,doubleclickthedesiredroomcomponentandthenticktheboxnextto
Principal Room within the Room dialog. As this is equivalent to adding or deleting a component, the
determination of the component that is the Principal Room must be consistent across all layers in a
multiplex.
Whenincludingmorethanoneroomcomponentoneachmultiplexlayer,theprincipalRoomistypically
theoccupiedspacewithwhichathermostatorothersensorsandcontrolsareassociated.
Example 1: It is common to have a return air (RA) plenum void in commercial spaces. This should be
modeledasaseparatethermalzoneovertopofallofthezonesitserves.Theremay,forexample,beone
plenumforeachfloorofthebuilding.TheseRAplenumswouldberepresentedbyanonprincipalroom
component directly downstream of the occupied space on all multiplex layers. However, the Principal
Room component on each layer will typically be assigned a different space in the model. Therefore, if
therewereoneRAplenumforentire1stfloor,itwouldneedtobeassociatedwithalloccupiedthermal
zonesonthatfloor,andthusthesameRAplenumspaceinthemodelshouldbeassignedtotheplenum
roomcomponentsoneachofthelayersthatcontainaroomonthefirstfloorthathasareturnairgrill.
Iftherearespacesonthefirstfloorinthisexamplethathavesupplyairandeitheraductedreturnorno
return(perhapstheyareexhausted),theywouldnotbecoupledwiththeRAplenum.Forlayersassigned
tothesespaces,theRAplenumcomponentshouldbesetasanAdiabaticduct.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
199
Example2:Theremaybeaprincipalroomthatcontainsathermostat(sensors
andcontrollers)andanadjacentroom,suchasalavatory,thatdrawstransfer
airfromtheprincipalroomandhasnothermostatorothersensorsassociated
withit.Theremust,however,bemeansofdeterminingtheairflowthroughit,
even if the flow is intentionally set to zero. Typically, such rooms will have a
path to either an exhaust fan or a return fan. This will draw air from an
adjacentspace,asinthelavatoryintheillustrationtotheright.
As it is very unlikely that there would be a lavatory or similar space drawing
transfer air adjacent to the Principal Room on every layer, this nonprincipal
roomcomponentwouldbesetasanAdiabaticductonalllayersforwhichitis
toremainunused.
Example 3: In the case of an underfloor air distribution
(UFAD) system, each layer would typically include the
UFADsupplyplenum,anoccupiedzone,astratifiedzone,
and possibly also a returnair (RA) plenum. The occupied
spaces would normally be the Principal Room on each
layer. As the UFAD plenum would be before this on the
network,thecomponentrepresentingtheoccupiedzone
on the network would need to be changed from a non
principal room to the Principal Room for all layers, as
describedabove.
As with the RA plenum in Example 1, each UFAD supply
plenumservingmorethanonezonewouldbeassignedto
the designated UFAD plenum component on more
multiple layers (the same layers as the occupied zones it
serves).
For occupied zones served by the UFAD plenum, there
would be a corresponding stratified zone assigned to a
nonprincipal room component downstream of the
Principal Room. If there is an RA plenum, this would be
yet another nonprincipal room downstream of the
stratifiedzone.
If there are spaces receiving supply air from the same
airside system but not via the UFAD plenum, the UFAD
plenum would be set to Adiabatic on those layers.
Similarly, if those orother spaces were to be fully mixed
zones using overhead diffusers, the stratified zone room
componentwouldbesettoAdiabaticonthoselayers.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
200
6.2.5
AssignfromRoomGroup
149B
TheAssignfromRoomGrouptoolcanbeusedtoassignroomstoselectedlayers.Itcanalsobeusedto
automaticallyaddlayerstothemultiplexforeachroominaselectedroomgroupi.e.,tocreateexactly
thenumberofadditionallayersthatwillberequiredforallroomsorthermalzonesinthegroup.
WheninGlobalEditingmode,clicktheAssignfromRoomGroupbutton.ThisopenstheAssignfromRoom
GroupdialogshowingtheGroupingSchemesintheproject.
SelectaGroupingSchemeandRoomGroupthenclicktheOKbuttontoassigneachroomorthermalzone
intheselectedGroupasaPrincipalRoomonamultiplexlayer.
Iftherearemoreroomsinthegroupthanlayersinthemultiplex,theoptionisgiventocreatelayersfor
eachadditionalroom.Thisisanefficientwaytoaddlayers.
ClickYestoaddtherequirednumberoflayers.Thisisanefficientwaytoaddlayerstoamultiplex.Click
Notoassigntheroomsfromthegrouptojusttheexistinglayersinthemultiplex.
WhentheOKbuttonisclickedtocompletemultiplexcreation,theEditingmodeandlayerselectionwill
bereflectedinthemultiplextoolbarandsubsequentedits.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
201
Room(s)assignedThecolumnofcheckboxesattherighthandsideoftheCreate/EditMultiplexdialog
indicateswhetherornotallRoomcomponentsonagivenmultiplexlayerhavebeenassigned.Thecheck
boxes are not usereditable, but will include a check mark when assignments are complete for a layer.
AssigninganAdiabaticductratherthananactualspaceinthemodeltoaRoomcomponentdoescountas
anassignment.
6.3 EditMultiplex
47B
6.3.1
MultiplexToolbar
150B
Whenanycellinamultiplexregionisselectedtheotherwisegreenmultiplexboundaryiscoloredredand
themultiplextoolbarisactive.
6.3.1.1
EditMultiplex
ThisbuttonopenstheEditMultiplexdialog.
6.3.1.2
DisplayLayer
Thecurrentlyactivelayerisdisplayedhere.Thiscanbeidentifiedbylayernumberandprincipalroom.Itis
thelayerthatonecanbealteredinLocalEditmodeandisthelayerthatwillbeviewedandservesasthe
Global Edit interface (prior to entering the Data Table edit view) when in Global Edit mode. Toggle
throughlayersusingthearrowbuttonsorexpandthedropdowntoselectalayerfromthelist.
Thecurrentdisplaylayercanbechangedwhilearoom,component,orcontrollerdialogisactive,andthe
contentsofthatdialogwillupdatetoreflectthenewlyselectedlayer.
6.3.1.3
EditMode
ChoosebetweenLocalorGlobalEditing.
LocalEditModeeditsapplyonlytothecurrentDisplayLayer.
Global Edit Mode edits apply to all currently selected layers, as shown in the Create/Edit multiplex
dialogandonthemultiplextoolbar.
6.3.2
EditMultiplexDialog
151B
When the Edit Multiplex button is clicked the Edit Multiplex dialog is displayed. This is used to add or
remove layers, assign principal rooms, and select layers for editing in the same way as the Create
Multiplexdialogdescribedearlier.
6.3.2.1
LockLayerSelection
When multiple layers are selected (selection must be set while in Global Edit mode) tick Lock Layer
Selectiontoavoidaccidentallyeditinganunselectedlayer.ThelockedstatewillapplytobothGlobaland
Localeditmodes.
When cycling through layers on the multiplex toolbar while the selection is locked, a warning will be
displayed if any locked layer is selected. The user has the option to unlock that layer or revert to the
previouslyselectedcurrentdisplaylayer.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
202
6.4 EditingComponentsandControllersinmultiplex
48B
Onceamultiplexhasbeencreated,thecomponentsandcontrollerswithinitcanbeeditedinmuchthe
samewayasthoseonanyotherpartofthenetwork.
Clickonceinsidethemultiplexregionoronanycomponentwithinittomakeitactive.Thiswillupdatethe
toolbar with information regarding the current display layer, selection set, and editing mode for that
multiplex. It is then possible to edit the components, controllers, and connectors within the multiplex
muchasisdoneoutsideamultiplex;however,editsareappliedaccordingtothelayerselectionsetand
edit mode. Select Local or Global Edit mode from the multiplex toolbar then edit properties of the
networkcomponents.
Note:Itisimportanttobeawarewheneditingwithinamultiplexthat,atleastpresently,changescannot
beundone.
Note: Because all layers must contain the same set of components, controllers, and connectors in the
same layout (though not with the same settings, profiles, etc.), moving, copying, and deleting any item
withinthemultiplexregionmustbedoneinGlobalEditmodewithalllayersselected.
In Local edit mode the properties for the controller or component on the current Display layer are
displayedandcanbemodified.
ThepropertiesdisplayedwillbeupdatedifadifferentDisplayLayerisselectedfromthemultiplextoolbar
viaeitherthedropdownlistorup/downarrows.
InGlobaleditmode,changestocontrollerorcomponentparametersthataremadeinthenormal(non
tabularedit)dialogareappliedtoalllayersinthecurrentselection.Globaleditsapplymorebroadlyinthe
caseofRoomUnitcontrollers(seenextsectionbelow).
6.4.1
TabularEditing
152B
WheninGlobalEditmode,clickthebuttoncontainingthenameorlabelforanyvariableinputfieldina
component or controller dialog to use the tabular editing Data Table view to efficiently view and edit
valuesonmultiplelayers(seetheTabularEditingsectionbelowformoreinformation).
6.4.2
TouchEdits
153B
Wheneditingacontroller orcomponentin Global edit mode,doubleclicking inanyvariableinputfield

willupdatethatvariableinallotherlayerstomatchthevalueinthedisplaylayer.Thevariableinputfield
will be colored orange to indicate that a Touch Edit has been completed. Clicking OK applies all Touch
Editsmadeinthecurrentdialog(thesecanbeverifiedintheDataTableeditview).Cancelingoneormore
TouchEditsinacomponentorcontrollerdialogisdonebyCancellingoutofthedialog.
6.4.3
EditRoomComponentInstancesandRoomUnitControllers
154B
RoomUnitcomponentinstances(Radiators,DirectActingHeaters,ChilledCeilings)andtheircontrollers,
as located within multiplexed rooms, can be edited locally or globally. Room Unit controllers should
generallybeeditedinLocalEditmode,exceptwhenreplicatingacontrollerandALLofitssettings.Thelist
ofroomunitsinanygivenroomissortedfirstbyUnitType,withmultipleinstancesofaRoomUnitType
groupedtogether.
Globaleditstoroomunitswithinamultiplexapplytothecurrentlyselectedroomunitandthoseinother
selectedlayersthatareofthesametypeandpositionwithintheorderedlistofunitsofthattype(ifsucha
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
203
roomunitexistsintheroomsontheotherlayers).ClickingOKinaRoomUnitcontrollerwheninGlobal
Edit mode will apply not only newly edited values but ALL inputs and settings in that dialog to all
correspondingroomunitcontrollers.
IntheRoomdialog,thecolumntotheleftoftheroomunitsdescriptionindicatestheunittypeforeach
particular room unit instance in that room. This type plays an important role: Whenever a room unit is
selectedforeditingordeletingwhileinGlobalEditmode,itisassociatedwithcorrespondingroomunits
ineachoftheotherselectedlayersbymeansofitstypeandpositionwithintheorderedlistofunitsof
thattype.Forexample,editingthesecondinstanceofradiatortypeRad1_14kWintheprincipalroom
onthedisplaylayerwouldresultintheeditsbeingappliedtothesecondradiatoroftypeRad1_14kW
withintheprincipalroomoneachcurrentlyselectedlayerinthemultiplex.
6.4.3.1 Copyingonlymodifiedparameters
Asofversion6.3,onlythoseparametersjustmodifiedonthedisplaylayertobecopiedtothematching
Roomunits(ifany)inallselectedlayerswhenOKisclicked.
155B
Figure64:InGlobalEditmodetherearetwoOKbuttonsformultiplexedRoomunitcontrollerdialogs,
as shown here. OK & Copy All replicates the data in all the controller fields on the display layer to
controllersforcorrespondingroomunitsonothercurrentlyselectedlayers,whereasOKreplicatesonly
thedatathathasjustbeenmodifiedandnotyetsaved.
6.5 TabularEditing
49B
TabularEditingallowsinputvaluesforcomponentsandcontrollersonalllayerstobereviewedoredited
inadatatableformat.WheninGlobalEditmodewithmorethanonelayercurrentlyselected,openthe
properties dialog of any controller or component then select the variable to be edited. This is not yet
supportedforRoomUnitcontrollers.
6.5.1.1
MultipleEdit
Toselect multiplevariablesfortabularediting,holdtheShiftkeyandselectthe desired variables;then

click the Multiple Edit button. This opens a data table displaying the values for the selected
parameter(s)and/orvariable(s)ofthecomponentorcontrolleroneachselectedlayer.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
204
Figure65:IllustrationofMultipleEditfunctioninthedialogofamultiplexedcomponentorcontroller
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
205
6.5.2
PastetoDataTableusingtabulareditview
156B
Valuesfromaspreadsheetorcommaseparatedvalue(CSV)filecanbepasteddirectlyintoaDataTable
columnintabulareditview.Youcanthusupdateuniquevaluesforaselectedvariableonmultiplelayers.
Selectandcopysourcedatafromacolumnorrow,thenselecttheuppermostvariablecellyouwouldlike
toeditintheDataTableandclickthePastebuttontotherightofthetable.Thepastewillbeginwiththe
selected cell and continue downwards, entering new values on each layer up to the total number of
valuespresentinthecopiedselectionset.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
206
Figure66:Illustrationofusingcopy&pastefromaspreadsheettotabulareditview
Figure67:Copy&pastefromaCSVfiletotabulareditview
Note:IfthePasteisperformedwithoutfirstclickingonanycellintheDataTable,andmultiplevariables
have been selected for inclusion in the Data Table view, the copied values will be assigned to the last
variablecolumn(attherightsideofthetable).ThepastewillbeginwiththecurrentDisplayLayer(row
highlightedinyellow)andcontinuedownwards,enteringnewvaluesoneachlayeruptothetotalnumber
ofvaluespresentinthecopiedselectionset.
Note:Itispossibletopastenumericortextcharacters.However,anypastedtextmustexactlymatchthe
availableoptionsforthatinput(e.g.,Profilenamesmustexactlymatchthenamesofavailableprofilesin
theApProdatabase;BoilernamesmustexactlymatchthosedefinedintheHeatSourcesdialog;etc.).
Note:TabularEditingofRoomUnitcontrollerparametersandinputdataisnotyetsupported.RoomUnit
controllersshouldbeeditedinLocalEditmodewithjustoneexception:UseGlobalEditmodewhenthe
intent is to apply ALL settings within a particular Room Unit controller to ALL other controllers for that
unitTypewithinthecurrentlyselectedRooms.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
207
6.6 NodeNumbering
50B
Attheboundaryofamultiplexanextranodenumberisgenerated.Thisishidden,asiteffectivelyincludes
both a node on the outside of the boundary (corresponding to the last labeled node outside the
multiplex)andanothernodeforeachlayerontheinsideoftheboundary,correspondingtothenearest
labelednodeontheinside.Together,thesehiddennodesformajunctionwherethenetworkbranches
intolayersi.e.,fromlayerzeroontheoutsidetoeachthenumberedlayersofthemultiplex.
Intheexamplebelow,themultiplexjunctionexistsbetweennodes4and13andbetweennodes14and7:
Figure68:Nodenumberinginamultiplexedsystem
Node numbers are not always sequential across multiplex boundaries. This is merely an artifact of how
themultiplexednetworkishandledbythesoftware,andmaychangeinfutureversions.
AsviewedeitherinVistaResultsorinanerrormessage,nodenumberswithinamultiplexedApacheHVAC
networkarenumbered1,2,3,asinanormalnetwork,butwiththelayernumberappendedtoindicate
thelayere.g.,thenodesonlayerzeroare1/0,2/0,3/0,andonlayer1are1/1,2/1.3/1,andon
layer2are1/2,2/2,3/2,.andsoforth.
Note: Some nonmultiplexed nodes may be numbered 1/ , with layer zero being assumed. This is most
likelytobeseeninamessageregardinginsufficientflowdefinition,overconstrainedflow,orsimilar.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
208
6.7 DeleteMultiplex
51B
Amultiplex canbedemultiplexed (collapsedtojustthe currentdisplaylayer)ordeletedbyselecting

anycellinthemultiplexregiononthenetworkdiagramthenclickingtheDeletebutton(trashcan)onthe
toolbar.
Figure 69: When demultiplexing or deleting a multiplex, a popup dialog requires a choice between
deletingtheentiremultiplexandallitemswithinit,orsimplydemultiplexing.
6.7.1.1
Deletemultiplex
Themultiplexisremovedandallcomponentsandcontrollerswithinthemultiplexarecompletelydeleted
fromthenetwork.
6.7.1.2
Demultiplex
ThemultiplexisremovedbutthecurrentDisplayLayerisretainedinthenetwork(onlayerzero).Thisis
the default action. Prior to demultiplexing, check the currently selected layer if you intend to retain a
layercontainingaparticularsetofinputstocomponentsandcontrollers.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
209
PLEASE NOTE: This section of the ApacheHVAC User Guide is presently still
under construction. Please be sure to check for updates, which will be posted
approximately weekly until the VE 6.3 update of the user guide is complete.
SystemLoads,Ventilation,andAutosizing
6B
7.1 Overview
52B
PredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystemscanbeimportedandautosizedatboththezoneandsystem
levels.Thesetwolevelsofloadsanalysisandautosizingcanalsobeappliedsuccessfullytoabroadrange
of usermodified variants of the predefined prototype systems. And, all systems, including any user
definedcustomconfiguration,canbeautosizedwithrespecttomostsystemandplantequipment.
Forpredefinedsystemsandvariantsthereof,theprocesssizesabroadrangeofsystemelementsintwo
stagesfirst at the room/zone level, then at the system/plant levelwith opportunity for user
interventionbetweenthetwo.ASHRAELoadscalculationsarelinkedtotargetApacheHVACsystemsfor
bothstagesofthesizingprocess:
Zonelevel loads and sizing must be completed either manually or through the autosizing
procedure described below. The resulting values for airflows and other controller settings
mustbeassignedtotheHVACsysteminorderforthespacestobeadequatelyconditioned.
Systemlevel loads and sizing, which applies to coils, fans, chillers, DX cooling, boilers, heat
pumps,andotherheatsources,mustbecompletedinordertoappropriatelyscaleequipment
capacitiesandperformancedatatoobtainappropriateperformanceandenergyconsumption.
7.2 Zonelevelloadsandsizing
53B
The zonelevel autosizing process (Room Load Calculations step in the System Prototypes & Sizing
navigator,associatedLoadsdataspreadsheet,andAssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingDatastep
inthenavigator)isfocusedonsettingairsidecontrolinputsforthefollowingparameters,dependingupon
thespecificsystemtype:
zonelevelairflowforVAVboxes,fancoilunits,fanpoweredboxes,activechilledbeams,etc.
outsideairventilationratesaswellasCO2sensorcontrolthresholds,whereDCVisemployed
exhaustfansandinterzonaltransferairflows(typicallyasmakeupairforexhaustedspaces)
outsideaireconomizerdamperminimumflowratesanddrybulbtemperaturehighlimits
energyrecoveryengagement,sensibleandlatenteffectiveness,andenergyconsumption
coilleavingairtemperatures,temperatureresets,andzonehumiditycontrol
Forprototypesystems,thisprocessalsoprovidesmeansofengagingordisengagingsystemfeatures,such
asoutsideaireconomizersandairsideenergyrecovery,fromwithinsystemleveldialogs,inaadditionto
manuallychangingthesewithintheLoadsDataspreadsheetforeachsystemorwithintheApacheHVAC
airsidenetworkitself.Thecontrollersinpredefinedsystemsalsousepredefinedcontrolprofiles(which
you may also use as you see fit). This allows systemoperating schemes for unoccupied hourse.g.,
temperaturesetbackonly,setbackwithfancycling,orsetbackwithfancyclingbutnooutsideairtobe
selectedalongwithsystemschedulesandsetpoints.Whiletheseparametersandoperatingschemescan
bemanuallychanged,thedialogsprovideadegreeofautomationforpredefinedsystems.
WhileotherwiseaccessibletoanyApacheHVACuser,theASHRAE90.1PerformanceRatingMethod(PRM)
Navigator in the VE provides additional interface dialogs and tools for ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates,
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
210
exhaustairflowsettings,andapplicationofPRMBaselinefancurveinputs.ThePRMNavigatorinterfaceis
describedinaseparateuserguide.Themoremanualapproachtotheseparametersisdescribedbelow.
IMPORTANT: Through version 6.3, the automated zonelevel sizing procedure requires that the target
ApacheHVACsystemfileisnamedproposed.asp.ThisfilenamemustbeinplacepriortotheRoomLoad
CalculationsstepintheSystemPrototypes&Sizingnavigator.Ifnot,thesizingprocesswillnotpopulate
theLoadsDataspreadsheetaccordingtotheroomsorzonesassignedtothecorrecttargetsystem.The
targetsystemnameofproposed.aspmustalsoremaininplace(orbereinstated)fortheAssignsystem
parameters and room sizing data action in the sizing navigator. The ApacheHVAC file name can be
subsequentlychangedwithoutconsequence.Forversion6.4anonward,thisnamingconventionwillnot
berequired,norisitrequiredfortheSystemlevelloadsandsizingprocessdescribedbelow.
7.3 Systemlevelloadsandsizing
54B
System autosizingthe second sizing stageruns the selected ApacheHVAC system for the rooms or
zonestowhichitisassignedusingthecontrollersettingpresentlyinplacetodeterminedesignsizingfor
systemandplantequipment.Thisincludesheatingandcoolingcoils,fans,boilers,chillers,DXcooling,air
sourceheatpumps,andsimilarheating&coolingsources.
System load calculations and sizing can be run either directly from ASHRAE Loads dialog or from the
SystemloadcalculationsactionitemintheSystemPrototypes&Sizingnavigator.Ineithercase,theuser
isrequiredtoselectatargetsystemandprovidedtheoptionofreportingresultsandupdatingthetarget
systemequipmentsizing(thisisthedefaultoutcome)orjustreportingthesystemsloadsresults.Further
description is provided in the System load calculations subtopic of the System Prototypes & Sizing
workflownavigatorsectionbelow.
This stage of the sizing process can be applied to systemlevel equipment for any (predefined or user
defined)ApacheHVACsystem. Unlikethezonelevelloads&sizingprocess,systemlevelsizingdoesnot
requireaspecifictargetfilename.
Figure71:ApacheHVACsystemloadsanalysistypeinASHRAELoadsdialog
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
211
7.4 SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflownavigator
55B
TheSystemPrototypes&SizingNavigatorwalksusersthroughtheprocessofApacheHVACsystemsetup
andsizing.Itfacilitatesacquiringprototypesystems,selectingamongthem,assigningrooms/zones,and
then entering schedules of operation, control set points, setback control strategies, and other common
designparameters.Aswithallother VEworkflownavigators,thisnavigatorsupportsenteringnotesfor
laterreferenceandtrackingthecompletionofeachstep.
System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator provides a twostage (room/zone level then system/plant level)
autosizing process that includes tools for calculating ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates, numerous
opportunities for user intervention, and ultimately system sizing reports. System performance can then
beanalyzedusingthefullarrayofVEsimulationtools.Predefinedsystemscanalsobefurthermodifiedin
ApacheHVACandresizedatoneorbothlevels,asneeded.Thisfacilitatesmoreefficientexplorationand
comparisonofsystemalternativesinallstagesofdesign.
Figure72:SystemPrototypes&SizingNavigator
7.4.1
SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflowsummary
157B
The navigators provide a stepbystep process to guide the user through load calculations, sizing, and
generating system sizing reports in preparation for simulation. The summary of this process below is
followedbymoredetaileddescriptionsofeachstep.
VE6.3
Acquire prototype systems: The user is provided a set of detailed prototype HVAC system
modelstochoosefrom,andeachofthesecanbecopiedandmodified.Whilecustomsystems
canbecreatedfromscratch,autosizedsystemstakingadvantageofthisprocessmusteither
beaprototypesystemorbebasedupononeoftheprototypesystemsprovided.Theextentof
modifications to a system that can be made without disabling the autosizing capability is
significantanddependsmainlyuponthelevelofuserexperiencewithApacheHVAC.
ApacheHVAC
212
VE6.3
Modelpreparation:Havingdefinedinternalgains,assignedconstructions,andselecteddesign
weatherdata,theusersetsuproomorzonegroupsinModelIT,usingagroupingschemethat
organizesspacesinthemodelaccordingtothesystemsthatwillservethem.Groupingspaces
according to system assignment facilitates efficient addition and assignment of zones to
systemsinApacheHVAC.Whenprototypesystemsareacquiredviathenavigator,asetofpre
defined grouping schemes, a couple of typical thermal templates with internal gains,
ventilation rates, and infiltration, required HVAC operating profiles, related formula profiles,
andtheblankLoadsDataspreadsheetareprovidedasastartingpoint.
Prototype system: Clicking this link opens the acquired set of prototype systems in
ApacheHVACwiththefilenamesettoproposed.asp,asisrequiredforthezonelevelsizing
processinVE6.3(for6.4andonward,theusersimplyselectsatargetsystem).Inmostcases,
theuserwill delete unwantedsystemsatthisstage;however,itispossibletoretainunused
systemsintheApacheHVACfile,asdescribed below.Inversion6.4onward,however,thisis
notnecessary,assystemsareindividuallyloadedintotheApacheHVACfilefromalibrary.
Assignrooms/zones:TheuserusestheEditMultiplexfacilityinApacheHVACtoassignrooms
orzonesfromgroupsinthemodeltoselectedpredefinedsystemsorcopiesthereof.
Systemschedules:Thisdialogisprovidesinputsforsystemoperatingschedulesandsetpoints
in terms of occupied and unoccupied times, setback temperatures, daily pre and post
occupancy space conditioning, and afterhours system operating schemes. It also establishes
setpointsandplantoperatingprofilesforcheckingunmetloadhours(viaVistaResultsforany
project;includedinautomaticallygeneratedreportsifusingthe90.1PRMNavigator).
Room/zonelevel load calculations: After assigning zones to a system or systems, the user
clicksthislinktoinitiatezonelevelloadscalculationusingtheASHRAEheatbalancemethod.
Thisrunsasimulationofthemodelwiththedesignweathercondition.Thesimulationisquasi
dynamicwithrespecttoheatingloads(theoutdoordesigntemperatureisheldconstant)and
fullydynamicwithrespecttocoolingloads.Itusesanidealsystemwithunlimitedcapacity
and simplified controls that meets the space temperature setpoints under all conditions.
Selecting Room Load Calculations within the System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator runs the
ASHRAE Loads analysis much the same as can otherwise be done from ApacheThermal,
however a separate editable spreadsheet will be generated for each ApacheHVAC system in
theproposed.aspfile.Thesetofsystemspecificloadsandventilationdataspreadsheetsare
populatedwithzonelevelloadresultsandsavedwithintheprojectdirectory.
System parameters: Systemlevel parameters, such as coil leavingairtemperature settings,

operationasa100%outsideairsystem,inclusionofenergyrecovery,andrelatedinputscan
bechangedusingtheSystemParameterdialog.
AccessloadsdataspreadsheetandASHRAE62.1ventilation:Thislinkopentheprojectfolder
of spreadsheets just created and updated by the last two steps for each system in the
proposed.asp file (or selected HVAC file after version 6.3). The Loads Data spreadsheet is
usedtodeterminezonelevelairflowsandventilationrequirements.Itisalsoarepositoryfor
othervaluesthatcanbeeditedandlaterassignedtosystemscomponentsandcontrollers.The
spreadsheet includes essential user inputs for oversizing factors, manipulating coderequired
minimumprimaryairchangerates,transferairflowrates,basisforcalculatingmaximumVAV
turndown, and other similar parameters. Editable values also include zone and system
specificinputstoASHRAE62.1outdoorairventilationcalculationsusingtheTable6.3method.
Assignsystemparametersroom/zonelevelsizingdata:Afterchanges(ifany)withintheloads
data spreadsheet for each system, this assigns component and controller inputs from the
spreadsheettotheirrespectiveApacheHVACsystemsintheproposed.aspfile.
ApacheHVAC
213
Having assigned the system parameters and zonelevel sizing data to the systems, the user
remains free to open individual HVAC components and controllers or selected sets of
componentsandcontrollerswithinApacheHVACformanualeditingofcontrolparametersand
inputs. System, component, and controller configurations can also be substantially modified
without breaking the autosizing functionality. The user may thus resize the systems after
changes to either the building model or the HVAC systems. So long as individual autosized
values are manually overridden only within the spreadsheet, these overrides can be
maintainedinfuturesizingrunsandsizingdataassignments.
System/plantloadscalculationandsizing:Theidealizedsystemwithunlimitedcapacitythat
runsforthezonelevelloadcalculationsandsizingisreplacedbythefullydetailedsystem(s)
withintheselectedApacheHVACfile(thiscanbeanyHVACnetworkfile).Systemsrunasthey
have been set up within ApacheHVAC. This step populates systemlevel information in each
system spreadsheet, generates system loads and sizing reports, and directly updates sizing
relatedsystemlevelandplantequipmentinputswithintheselectedApacheHVACfile.
Sizing reports: The action generates and displays reports for specific sizing runs. The reports
includesizingresultsforthesystemplant,systemequipment,andprimary
ASHRAE 62.1 report: This action opens a report of ventilation rates and indicates whether
these meet or exceed ASHRAE 62.1 requirements (so long as appropriate space occupancy
typeshavebeenindicatedinthe62.1CalcstabofthespreadsheetorviathePRMnavigator).
Assign SystemLevel Sizing Data: Prior to assigning the System & Plant sizing to the system
equipment, the user has the option to modify the sizing values generated by the ASHRAE
Loadstoolforindividualfans,chillers,boilers,coils,etc.withinthespreadsheet.Afterchanges
(if any) are completed within each system spreadsheet, equipmentsizing inputs are then
assigned to the designated set of ApacheHVAC systems from within the navigator using the
Assign system sizing data function. All system and zonelevel sizing information can be
adjusted and reapplied as needed or applied to alternate or modified systems. The
spreadsheets can also be copied and renamed so as to link to new, additional, or alternate
copiesofpreviouslysizedsystems.
Finally,theuserreturnstotheApacheThermalviewtosimulatethebuildingandsystems,withinteraction
betweentheseateachsimulationtimestep.Simulationscanbecarriedoutfortheentirebuildingproject
orjustasmallsubsetofit,asmightbedesirablewhensettingupandoptimizingsystemconfigurations
and zonelevel controls. Having optimized the system using a small number of select zones and select
dates or conditions from the simulation weather file, the user can assign additional zones to the
ApacheHVACsystems,repeatthezonelevelsizingrun,andthenperformsystemlevelsizingforcoilloads,
plant equipment, and so forth. Because systems within ApacheHVAC are created or modified
independentlyofthethermalmodel,theVEallowsuserstocreatemultiplesystemsthatcanberunwith
thethermalmodelfromApacheSim.
This is facilitated by the System Prototypes & Sizing workflow navigator. The same functionality is also
providedwithintheASHRAE90.1AppendixGPerformanceRatingMethod(PRM)workflownavigator.
SystemPrototype&SizingnavigatorandtheASHRAE90.1PRMnavigator.Thenavigatorsprovideastep
bystepprocesstoguidetheuserthroughloadcalculations,sizing,andsimulation.Thefollowingoverview
describesthisprocessasitwouldbecompletedusingtheSystemPrototype&Sizingnavigator
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
214
7.4.2
Designsizingconditions
158B
Before proceeding through the sizing steps, ensure that all geometry, shading devices, internal gains,
envelope constructions, and design climate conditions are set as you intend them. If you are sizing
systemsinthecontextofthe90.1PRM,ensurethatthecoolingdesignpercentageisconsistentwiththe
requirementsofthe90.1versionyouareusing(settingsfor90.112007areillustratedbelow).
Figure73:ApLocatedesignandsimulationweatherdataselectionwizard.
7.4.3
AcquirePrototypeSystems
159B
ThisstepimportsthePrototypeApacheHVACsystems.ForVE6.3,thesearebroughtinasacompleteset.
Youdecidewhichsystemsyouwanttouseinthecurrentprojectandthendeletetheremainingsystems.
ForVE6.4andonward,however,predefinedsystemseitherasconfiguredbyIESorbytheusercanbe
loadedindividuallyfromalibrary.Thelibraryfacilitatessaving,adding,andreplacingsystemsatanytime.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
215
SystemPrototypesbuttoninApacheHVAC
UsetheSystemPrototypesbuttontoimportonlythefullsetof22prototypesystems(allatoncein6.3
andindividuallyfromtheprototypesystemlibraryin6.4onward),alongwithjusttheprofilesneededto
runthesystemsandtheenergyendusedesignationsforthefuelcodestheyreference.Thisisincontrast
totheSystemPrototypes&SizingnavigatorAcquireprototypeHVACsystemsactionthatimportsallof
thefollowingitemsfromtheSystemPrototypesPlusdatamodel:
22prototypesystems
DefaultLoadsDataspreadsheet(requiredforzonelevelHVACsizingand62.1ventilationrates)
HVACcontrolprofilesusedforautomatingsetupofsystemsetpointsandoperatingschedules
Examplecontrolprofilesfornaturalventilation,daylightdimming,etc.
ExamplegroupingschemesforHVACzones
Examplethermaltemplateswithsetpoints,ventilationrates,internalgains,andinfiltrationrates
fortypicalofficespacesandrestrooms
Energyendusedesignationsforthefuelcodesreferencedinprototypesystemcomponents
In version 6.3, loading the prototype systems via the S button requires that the ApacheHVAC view is
blanki.e., as it is before opening a file or after clicking the New button. Once the set of prototypes
systemsareloaded,userswillnormallythendeletethesystemstheywillnotneedbeforecompletingthe
processofpopulating,sizing,and/ormodifyingthedesiredsystems.Inversion6.4andonward,however,
the system library can be used at any time to save, select, and import individual systems to a new or
existingApacheHVACfile.
Figure74:TheSystemPrototypes&SizingnavigatorAcquireprototypeHVACsystemsactionisusedto
open the dialog above and select the System Prototypes Plus to import the 22 prototype systems,
essentialcontrollerprofilesassociatedHVACcontrolzoneloadsdataspreadsheet,xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
216

Figure75:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
FromthepredefinedsystemsintheSystem_Prototypes.aspfilethatisloadedbyclickingthisnavigator
linkinVE6.3,determinethepredefinedsystemsorconfigurationsyouwishtouse.
UntilVE6.4,ifthereisasystemtypethatyoumaywishtouseinconjunctionwithoratthesametimeas
thesystemyouarepresentlysettingupforthecurrentproject,youwillwanttoretainthissystemtypeas
well.InthecontextofVE6.3,itisimportantthatyounotdeletesystemtypesthatyouwilllaterwantto
haveinthesame.aspfile,asthisversionrequiresthattheybemanuallyreconstructedifyouwanttoadd
them back into an existing .asp file. For example, if you have five VAV systems in your project and
anticipatelaterreplacingoneortwo,butnotall,ofthesesystemswithfancoilsystems,youwouldwant
toretainthefancoilsystemtypeinthesame.aspfile.However,beselectiveinwhatyouchosetoretain,
asthereareafewthingsyoullneedtodo(explainedbelow)tokeeptheseunusedsystemsfromgetting
inthewayofthesizingprocess.
Deletesystemsthatwillnotbeneeded.
Insubsequentstepsyouwillassignrooms,schedules,andsoforth,priortosizing.
7.4.4
PrototypeSystemsSelectionandModification
160B
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.
7.4.5
AssignSpacesorZonestoRoomComponents
161B
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
217
7.4.6
SystemSchedulesHoursofoperationandsetpoints
162B
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
218
7.4.7
RoomLoadsCalculations
163B
First the room loads calculation is run via the ASHRAE Loads application, using an idealized system
(unlimitedcapacity,simplifiedcontrols)anddefinedmodelinputs,suchasheatingandcoolingsetpoints.
TheASHRAELoadsanalysisusestheASHRAEHeatBalancemethod(describedintheASHRAEHandbookof
Fundamentals)
Whenthezonelevelloadsarecalculated,aspreadsheetisgeneratedforeachApacheHVACsysteminthe
proposed.aspfile,andeachspreadsheetispopulatedwiththeseresults.Thespreadsheetisusedtosize
airflowsandothercontrolinputsfortheHVACsystemsandisfullyeditablei.e.,usershavetheoptionto
editanydataasrequired,suchasoversizingfactors,primaryairchangerates,transferairflowrates,etc.
IMPORTANT: Through version 6.3, the automated zonelevel sizing procedure requires that the target
ApacheHVACsystemfileisnamedproposed.asp.ThisfilenamemustbeinplacepriortotheRoomLoad
CalculationsstepintheSystemPrototypes&Sizingnavigator.Ifnot,thesizingprocesswillnotpopulate
theLoadsDataspreadsheetaccordingtotheroomsorzonesassignedtothecorrecttargetsystem.The
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
219
targetsystemnameofproposed.aspmustalsoremaininplace(orbereinstated)fortheAssignsystem
parameters and room sizing data action in the sizing navigator. The ApacheHVAC file name can be
subsequentlychangedwithoutconsequence.Forversion6.4anonward,thisnamingconventionwillnot
berequired,norisitrequiredfortheSystemlevelloadsandsizingprocessdescribedbelow.
7.4.8
AccessLoadsDataspreadsheetsandASHRAE62.1Ventilation
164B
The Loads data spreadsheet is used for three purposes, the first two of which are important in this
workflow,andthesecondtwoofwhichareoptional:
SettingHeatingandCoolingoversizingfactorsforzonelevelloads
SpecifyingandsettingupASHRAE62.1ventilation(optional)
Additionalinputsformodifyingsystemparameters(optional)
The Loads Data spreadsheet itself will, however, eventually be optional, as the VE will incorporate all
parametersfromitwithinasetofdialogs.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
220
7.4.8.1
OversizingFactorsforZoneLoadsandSizing
Thedefaultoversizingfactorsforzonelevelloadsaresettovaluesrequiredforbaselinesystemsinthe
ASHRAE90.1PRM,asfollows:
Heating=1.25
Cooling=1.15
Thesefactorsareusedtoadjusttheactualloadsinthespacesuchthatsubsequentcalculationsofzone
airflows, etc., will be calculated based upon the oversized loads. While similar defaults are used, the
oversizing factors that must be entered in dialogs for system and plant equipment, such as coils, fans,
boilers,andchillersareseparatefromtheoversizingzonelevelloads;however,theyarenotredundant.
NOTE:OversizingfactorsarenotappliedtoresultsintheSystemLoadsReportprovidedwithintheVE.
To revised the default oversizing factors, begin by clicking the Access Loads Data spreadsheets and
ASHRAE 62.1 Ventilation link in the navigator and then opening the Loads Data spreadsheet with the
nameforthesystemyouwishtoeditfirst.Untilresavedwithadifferentsheetopen,thespreadsheetwill
openshowingtheRoomDesignAirflowstab.TheOversizingfactorsareingreenhighlightedcellsatthe
topofthesheet.
7.4.8.2
ASHRAE62.1ventilation
Bydefault,thespreadsheetissetuptousetheventilationratesspecifiedinRoomdataforeachspaceor
the System tab of the Thermal Template applied to each space. In these locations, users can specify
ventilationratesincfm,cfm/ft2,cfm/person,orACH.Therefore,theASHRAE62.1ventilationcalculation
isanoptionalstepinthesystemloadsandsizingprocess(unless,ofcourse,requiredbycode).
The link in the Navigator opens a folder containing the Loads Data spreadsheets, which, for VE 6.3,
include a sheet for determining ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates according to the Table 6.3 method (the
AppendixAmethodwillbeintroducedinasubsequentversionoftheVE).
Note:ForusersofthePRMNavigator,itisnotnecessarytoaccessthisspreadsheetdirectly,asaninput
dialogforASHRAE62.1ventilationisprovidedaspartofthatworkflownavigator.
To use ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates, begin by opening the spreadsheet with the name for the system
youwishtoeditfirst.Onceinthespreadsheet,switchtothe62.1OACalcssheetand,atthetopofthe
sheet,replacetheYwithNtoindicatethatyoudonotwishtoallowthedefaulttotheOAratessetin
theVE(TemplatesorRoomData).Youmustcompletetwofurtherstepsinordertouse62.1ventilation
rates:
VE6.3
Set the 62.1 occupancy category for each space using the dropdown selector built into the
input fields in that column (click then use down arrow and scroll bar). If you wish to have
severalroomswiththesameoccupancytype,setthefirstofthem,selectit,anddrag/copythe
selectiondowntosettheothersthesameasthefirst.
ApacheHVAC
221
SetzoneAirDistributionEffectiveness(Ez)forbothheatingandcoolingmodes(defaultisfor
overheadsupplyandreturn).
AtthetopofcolumnAA,indicatethe Totalsystem population (maximumnumberofpeople

thatwillsimultaneouslyoccupyallroomsservedbythesystematonesametime).Thisfield
defaults to the sum total of all zone peak occupancy values (sum of values in column E).
However,becauseofdiversity,thistypicallyshouldbereducedtotheactualnumberofpeople
collectivelyoccupyingthespacesonthesystem.
Immediately below that, indicate if the system is a 100% Outside Air system (this will be
automaticallysettoYifyouaresizingatype09prototypesystemoronebaseduponthat
prototype).Thisdeterminesthemethodofcalculatingthetotalsystemoutsideairrate.
Set exhausted space type and, if selecting one of the toilets types, then you must also
indicatethenumberofunitsincolumnAV(forthoseusingthePRMNavigator,thisisdonevia
aninputdialog;nonPRMuserwillthereforebeoverwritingtheformulaswithmanualinputs,
thusbreakingthelinktothatdialog).
Notethatthe62.1Referencetabimmediatelytotherightofthe62.1OACalcstabprovidesinformation
regardingthefollowing:
flowratesforeachoccupancytype
zoneairdistributioneffectivenessvaluesforcommonconfigurations
systemventilationefficiencyvalues
minimumexhaustrates
RepeatthesestepsfortheLoadsDataspreadsheetassociatedwitheachsystem.
Before proceeding to the next step in the System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator, ensure that all of the
LoadsDataspreadsheetshavebeenclosed,astheVEwillneedtoaccesstheseinthebackground.
7.4.9
AHUSystemParameters
165B
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
222

7.4.10 AssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingData
166B
Thisstepappliesthebasicsystemparametersettings(above)androom/zonelevelautosizedvalues,such
as VAV airflows, to components and controllers in the system in the target ApacheHVAC file
(proposed.asp).Whenthevalueshavebeenautosized,theletterAandtheinputvalueschangefrom
blacktogreen.
**IMPORTANTNOTES**
1) Thesystemparametersettings(above)androom/zonelevelautosizedvalueswillbeappliedonlyto
mappedcomponentsandcontrollersinthetargetApacheHVAC(.asp)file,andthistargetfilemustbe
namedproposed.aspinorderforthistowork.
2) Apart from systemlevel components, (boilers, chillers, and other heating and cooling sources), all
input values in ApacheHVAC components and controllers that have a capital letter A next to the
inputfieldwillbeoverwrittenbyautosizedvalueswhenthisstepisexecuted.
UpdatingplantequipmentsizesviathesubsequentSystemLoadsCalculationstepwilloverwriteall
inputvaluesinApacheHVACboilers,chillers,otherheating&coolingsources,heating&coolingcoils,
andfansforwhichthereisacapitalletterAnexttotheinputfield.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
223
Toallowforfutureupdatesusingthisfacility,manualchangesshouldbemadetothevaluesonthe
appropriatetabinthespreadsheetassociatedwitheachparticularsystemthatisbeingsized.
Projectfolder>LoadsData>Proposed>systemspecificspreadsheet.
Valuesinthecomponentsandcontrollerscanalsobeediteddirectly.However,ifthereisaletterA
next to the input field, these manual inputs will be overwritten if/when the assignment of AHU
parametersandautosizedroom/zonelevelvaluesisrepeated.
AllowingafutureupdateofallotherAHUparametersandroom/zonelevelautosizedvalueswithout
affecting those in a particular controller can be achieved by at least temporarily breaking the
autosizinglink.Tointentionallybreaktheautosizinglinkforaparticularcontroller,simplydeletethe
mappingdesignation(e.g.,MC4:)fromthereferencename.
7.4.11 SystemandPlantLoadsCalculation
167B
WhentheRoomLoadsdatahasbeenusedtoupdatetheHVACSystemsanASHRAELoadscalculationcan
berunandlinkedtotheApacheHVACsystem.
On the ASHRAE Loads settings dialog the Analysis Type is set to ApacheHVAC System Loads and the
ApacheHVAClinkistickedwiththeApacheHVACSystemspecified
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
224
7.4.12 SystemandPlantEquipmentSizing
168B
Plantequipment,suchasboiler,heatpumps,chillers,DXcooling,andotherheatingandcoolingsources
plussystemlevelcomponents,suchascoilsandfans,aresizedbytheSystemandPlantLoadsCalculation
withintheASHRAELoadsdialog.
7.4.12.1 UpdateApacheHVACsystemsizes?
Whenthisoptionisticked,systemandplantequipmentintheselectedApacheHVACnetworkisupdated
withsystemlevelsizingresults(asadjustedbyanyoversizingfactorspresentintheequipmentdialogs).
Figure720:Theoptionisprovidedtocompletethesystemloadsanalysisandgenerateareportwithout
updatingthesystemitself.Tosizethesystemequipment,usersmustselectatargetApacheHVACsystem
forsizingandensurethattheUpdateApacheHVACsystemsizes?boxisticked(asitisbydefault).
Itisnotrequiredthattheautosizingprocessbeusedforzonelevelsizingpriortosystemlevelsizing:itis
possible to perform the System & Plant Loads calculation for an ApacheHVAC system that has had all
zonelevel sizing information entered manually, and therefore does not have an associate Loads Data
spreadsheet (oratleast, notonethathasbeenautomaticallypopulatedandupdated).Thisstepwrites
separatefilestostoresystemsizinginformationintheeventthatthespreadsheetsarenotpresent.
Notethatsizingandperformanceinputsforairsourceheatpumpsrequireaddedattentioninthecaseof
ASHRAE 90.1PRM Baseline systems. More information regarding these considerations is provided with
respecttoPRMBaselineSystems2and4inthePreDefinedPrototypeHVACsystemssection,below.
7.4.13 SystemandPlantSizingReport
169B
When the calculations are complete, the user can generate a detailed system sizing loads report with
resultsfortheRoomLevelandSystemlevelloads.ThisispresentedintheIESreportageformat.Please
note that presently (in version 6.3), this report must be generated via the System Prototypes & Sizing
workflownavigatororthesamestepintheASHRAE90.1PRMworkflow.
The System Loads results files have extension *.htn (heating) and *.cln (cooling). These can be read in
Vista like normal ASHRAE Loads results (standard room and apache system loads results files have
extension*.htgand*.clg).
NOTE:OversizingfactorsenteredintheLoadsDataspreadsheetforzoneairflowsizingorintheplantand
system equipment dialogs apply only the sizing of the equipment within the systems themselves.
OversizingfactorsarenotappliedtoresultsintheSystemLoadsReportprovidedwithintheVE.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
225
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
226
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
227
PrototypeHVACSystems
7B
Thissectiondescribesthepredefineprototypesystems,theparameterswithinthemthatcanbesetby
the user directly (independent of the dialogs in the System Prototypes & Sizing navigator), and the
approachtomodifyingtheirconfigurationsandcontrolswithoutdisablingtheautosizingfunctionality.
ApacheHVACincludesarangeofpredefinedsystemsforwhichnumerousparameters(controllerinputs,
flowrates,coilsizes,temperatureresets,fansizes,heatingandcoolingplantequipmentcapacities,etc.)
can be autosized with respect to setpoints, design loads, ventilation rates, operating schemes, and so
forth.Therealsocapabilityforautosizingcoils,fans,andheating&coolingequipmentinfullycustombuilt
systems.Section 7: System Loads, Ventilation, and Autosizing, describes the autosizing process,
opportunities for user intervention, and the setting of associated system schedules, operating schemes
forunoccupiedhours,economizeroperation,andothersystemparameters.
IMPORTANT:Whilethepredefinedprototypesystemswillrunasprovided,withonlytheassignmentof
rooms or zones having been completed, appropriate results depend upon completion of sizing at two
levels.Thissizingprocess,asdescribedintheprevioussection,iscompletedintwoseparatestages:
Zonelevelsizingforairflowcontrollersandothersimilarsystemelementsmustbecompleted
eithermanuallyorthroughthelargelyautomatedprocessdescribedintheprevioussection,in
orderforthespacestobeadequatelyventilatedandconditioned.
Systemlevel loads calculation and sizing, which applies to coils, fans, chillers, DX cooling,
boilers, heat pumps, etc., must be completed in order to appropriately scale this equipment
capacitiesandperformancecurvesandthustoobtainperformanceandenergyconsumption
resultsthatreflectrealworldapplications.Whileroomsmaybeadequatelyconditionedwith
only the first stage of sizing completed, energy consumption for grossly over or undersized
equipment will be far from what is should be. This will be particularly true in the case of
performance for grossly oversized hotwater boilers and aircooled or watercooled chillers
usingpredefinedbiquadraticperformancecurves.
PLEASENOTE:ThissectionoftheApacheHVACUserGuideispresentlystillunderconstruction.Pleasebe
suretocheckforupdates,whichwillbepostedapproximatelyweeklyuntiltheVE6.3updateoftheuser
guideiscomplete.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
228
8.1 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Commonfeatures
The predefined prototype systems in ApacheHVAC provide autosizing capability, examples of various
system configurations, and a starting point for users who wish to create custom configurationseither
fromoneoftheprototypesorusingtheseasanexample.
CoolingcoilSATreset
perzonetemperature
CoolingcoilSATreset
perzone%humidity
CoolingVAVairflow
CoolingcoilSATreset
perzonetemperature
HeatingVAVairflow
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
229
8.2 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Systemtypesandconfigurations
ThefullsetofpredefinedHVACsystemsinVE6.3includesthefollowing:
All eight systems required by the ASHRAE 90.1 Performance Rating Method (PRM) with all
default equipment, component, and control inputs (including air and water supply
temperature resets, etc.) set to 90.1PRM Baseline values. These systems, which are generic
andcanbeusedoutsidethecontextofthePRM,include:
o PackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)
o PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)
o Singlezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)
o Singlezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)
o VAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler
o VAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
o VAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler
o VAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
These systems meet all ASHRAE 90.12007 PRM requirements for baseline systems modeling, including
detailed systemspecific requirements. Where equipment performance standards vary with sized
equipmentcapacityordesignairflowrates,suchvaluesarerevisedaccordingtoPRMrequirementsatthe
time of autosizing if the system application is a PRM baseline model (there are a small number of
exceptionsthatstillrequiremanualintervention).Forexample,multiplepredefinedDXcoolingtypesare
providedforeachstandardloadrangeandassociatedCOP/EERforDXcoolinginsystems36.Whileusers
can manually select these DX types, in the case of a PRM baseline model, the DX cooling type will be
automaticallyreassignedtomatchtheCOP/EERtotheloadrangeasrequiredbyASHRAE.
VE6.3
Dedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHWboiler.
Indirectdirect evaporative cooling version of VAVreheat system 5 above with backup DX

coolingandzonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV).
VAVreheat with differentialenthalpy economizer set up for the public areas of a hotel or
similar building with PTAC systems for individual guest/resident rooms drawing air from an
atriumzoneonthemainVAVsystem.
Mixedmode natural ventilation and VAVreheat with zone temperature and zone CO2
overrides for natvent when it is insufficient (e.g., when not enough cooling or ventilation is
providedviaoperablewindows,inspiteoffavorableindooroutdoorthermalconditions).
Singlefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
Dualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
Underfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxesforperimeterzones,leakagepath,
and remixing of PFPb zones when theyre in heating mode. Can also be used for thermal
displacement ventilation by simply omitting the PFPbs, UFAD plenum, leakage path, and re
mixinginheatingmode.
UFAD/DVsystemasabove,plusheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatofsub
cooled(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
Active chilled beams and DOAS for ventilation, both using electric watercooled chiller with
watersideeconomizerandcondenserheatrecovery;recoveredheatandHWboilerforDOAS
heatingcoilandzonebaseboardfintubeconvectors.
ApacheHVAC
230
Radiant heating and cooling panels (i.e., fourpipe system), plus DOAS with airside energy
recoveryandDCV.
RadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatof
subcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
While some autosizing features are constrained to particular component and controller applications or
configurations, all of the predefined systems can be extensively modified. This includes combining
features from multiple systems into one, directly coupling systems, or adding custom component and
control configurations. For example, the predefined DCV controls, heat pipes, or controllers for mixed
modeoperationcouldbedrag&dropcopiedfromotherpredefinedsystemstotheActivechilledbeams
system.Theairsupplyforthesystemcouldbedrawnfromanatriumorotherspaceonanothersystem.
The heat recovery could then be modified to model a desiccant wheel regenerated by heat recovered
fromthe condenserloop onthe electricwatercooledchiller,which canalsomesettouseawaterside
economizer (waterside free cooling). There are also special features for advanced modeling, such as
surfacetemperature(e.g.,ceilingorfloorslab)sensorsforcontrolofhydroniccomponents.
Airsidecomponentscoils,mixingdampers,spraychambers,heatexchangers,fans,flowsplitters,etc.
sensors and controllers can be arranged as needed to model custom configurations, such as an earth
tube or subterranean labyrinth for preconditioning intake air, series or dualmode rather than parallel
fanpoweredboxes,aDXcoolinganddehumidificationsystemwithdesiccantwheelregeneratedbywaste
heatfromtheDXcondensercoil,stageddualmaxandtriplemaxVAVcontrols,specializedtemperature
resets,oralaboratorywithexhaustairchangesmadeupbyacombinationofsupplyairandtransferair
fromadjacentspaces.
There are detailed models for chillers, boilers, DX cooling, etc. with editable predefined performance
curves, models for cooling towers and both primary and secondary loop pumps, and basic sequencing
optionsformatchedpairsofboilersandchillers(allincludedasof6.1.1).Thepending6.3releaseincludes
morealongtheselines,suchasdetailedchilledwatercoolingcoilmodelswithautosizeanddesignsizing
modes,expandedmodelingofchilledwaterloops,andflexiblesequencingofseparatelydefinedchillers
andothercustomsourcesofchilledwater.
Partloaddatamatricesareprovidedformodelingnonstandardheatingandcoolingsources.Forthistype
ofcoolingsource,COPcanvarybothwithloadandoutdoorconditions.Partloadcoolingsourcescanalso
usethechilledwaterloopmodelandassociatepumpmodeling,butdonotsharethedetailedcondenser
waterloopandcoolingtowermodelsusedbythefullelectricwatercooledchillermodel.Likehotwater
boilers, partload heat source models can use recovered chiller condenser heat must presently still
modulate associated pump power according to heating load. Any heat source can serve space heating
and/ordomestichotwaterloads,andasolarthermalhotwatermodelwithstoragetankisavailableto
useasthefirstsourceofheatfordomestichotwater.
Presently,mappingofresultsforanygivennodeintheHVACsystemonapsychrometricchartmuststill
be done by transferring state points to a separate psychrometric chart tool. However, this data is
availableforeverysimulationtimestepandtheVistaResultsviewsupportsgraphingselectedzoneand
systemlevelnodevariablesonthesamegraph.Roomconditionsandoutdoorvariablescansimilarlybe
added to the same graph. Anything that can be graphed can also be viewed, copied, and exported to
othertoolsasatableofresultsdataforeachtimestep.
The predefined systems added in 6.3 include versions of systems 1 & 2 using the more detailed Unitary
Cooling System Model, a more advanced configuration of system 5 with enthalpy economizer and directly
coupled copies of system 1 for residence/hotel rooms, and a range of eight more advanced non
conventionalsystems.Theseincludethefollowing:
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
231
PackagedterminalairconditioningusingthedetailedUnitaryCoolingSystem(UCS)model
(appropriateforsmallsinglezoneunitswithfixedspeedfansthatcycleonandoff,suchas
throughthewallAC),withahotwaterheatingcoilcoupledtoacentralboiler.
PackagedterminalheatpumpusingthedetailedUnitaryCoolingSystem(UCS)model(appropriate
forsmallsinglezoneunitswithfixedspeedfansthatcycleonandoff,suchasthroughthewallAC)
incoolingmodeandanairsourceheatpumpinheatingmode,withelectricresistancebackup
heatingcoil.
IndirectdirectevaporativecoolingVAVreheatsystemwithbackupDXcoolingcoil,dewpoint
temperatureOAeconomizerhighlimitcontrol,zonelevelhumidityhighlimitcontrol,andCO2
baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV)usingzonelevelsensorstofirstforceindividualVAV
boxesfurtheropenandtherequestadditionaloutsideairatthesystemlevel.
VAVreheatwithdifferentialenthalpyeconomizersetupforthepublicareasofahotel,dormitory,
orsimilarbuildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualroomsdrawingairfromandatriumzoneprior
tothereturnpathofthemainVAVsystem.
MixedmodenaturalventilationandVAVreheatwithzonetemperatureandzoneCO2overridesto
reintroducesystemairsupplywhennatventmodeisinsufficient(e.g.,whentheroomoccupancy
isveryhighorwinddrivenpressuredifferentialsaretoolow)inspiteofindooroutdoorthermal
conditionsthatareappropriateforventilationandcoolingviaoperableopenings.
DualfandualductsystemwithdewpointtemperatureOAeconomizerhighlimitcontroland
zonelevelmixingboxes(reducesfanenergyandavoidstheneedforreheat,butrequiressecond
setofducts).
Underfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxes(PFPbs)forperimeterzones,leakage
path,andremixingofotherwisethermallystratifiedPFPbzoneswheninheatingmode.
Underfloorairdistributionasabove,plusheatpipeorrunaroundcoilintheAHUforfreereheat
ofsubcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil,andaccountingforaddedstatic
pressureseenbythesupplyfanwhenairflowpassesthroughtheheatpipe/coil(i.e.,whenitisnot
bypassed).
Activechilledbeams(zonelevelinductionunitswithcoolingcoilsandinducedflowinproportionto
theprimaryairflow)andaDedicatedOutsideAirSystem(DOAS)fortemperateventilationair.
Radiantheating&coolingpanels(multipletwopipeorfourpipeunitscanbeplacedineachzone;2
typesarepredefinedforbothheatingandcoolingasexamples),plusDOASwithzoneCO2based
DCV.
RadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatof
subcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil,accountingforaddedstaticpressure
seenbythesupplyfanwhenairflowpassesthroughtheheatpipe/coil(i.e.,whenitisnot
bypassed).
All22predefinedsystemswillnowloadviatheSystemPrototypesSbuttoninApacheHVACandtheSystem
Prototypes & Sizing Navigator. When the tabbed views have been provided in ApacheHVAC, users will load
thesepredefinedsystemsindividually,asneeded.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
232
8.3 Workingwithprototypesystems
56B
Allpredefinedcontrollers,configurations,defaultvalues,andautosizedvaluesaremeanttobeastarting
point.ThisstartingpointprovidesdefaultsforASHRAEbaselinesystems,ameansoffacilitatingtherapid
useofsystemswithoutexcessivesetupeffort,andanexampleofhowthesystemareintendedtobeset
up.Inotherwords,thepredefinedconfigurations,defaultvalues,andtheirrelationshipsaremeanttobe
instructiveandillustrative,butnotsetinstone.ExceptinthecaseofautosizedASHRAEbaselinesystems
inthecontextofthe90.1PRM,itisrecommendedthatusersmodifyinputsandconfigurationsasneeded
toaccuratelyrepresentthesystemsineachactualproject.
8.3.1
Loading,saving,andretrievingprototypesystems
170B
8.3.1.1
Predefinedanduserdefinedprototypesystems
8.3.1.2
Maintainingconnectiontoreferencedschedulesandprofiles
8.3.2
Selecting,moving,copying,andnamingsystems
171B
8.3.2.1
Maintainingautosizingcapability
8.3.3
Modifyingpredefineprototypesystems
172B
8.3.3.1
Maintainingautosizingcapabilityforcomponentswithautosizedparameters
8.3.3.2
Maintainingautosizingcapabilityforcontrollerswithautosizedparameters
8.3.3.3
Maintainingconnectiontoreferencedschedulesandprofiles
8.4 Commonelementsusedinpredefineprototypesystems
57B
8.4.1
Energyrecoveryandbypassdampersection
173B
Thissystemelementiscommontoallofthepredefinedmultizonesystems,andprovidesforrecovery
andheatingandcoolingenergyforpreconditioningofoutsideairwhenitisenabled.
Autosizingvaluesintheenergyrecoverydeviceandbypassdampercontrollersaredeterminedasfollows:
Midband for damper modulation and set point for changeover from heating to cooling mode for
energyrecoverytargetarethemidpointbetweentheaverageheatingtocoolingroomtemperature
setpointsforallzonesonthesystem.Iftheaverageheatingandcoolingsetpointsforthezoneson
the system are 68 F and 76 F, respectively, then the midband/setpoint value returned to these
controllerswillbe72F.
VE6.3
For the Energy Recovery mode controls, this is the return air temperature, subject to a
deadbandorhysteresis,aboveorbelowwhichthedefaultconfigurationassumesthemajority
of zones on the system are in heating vs. cooling mode. The majority, in this case, is with
respect to total conditioned/ventilation air volume on the system, as the sensors for these
ApacheHVAC
233
controls see only the combined return air temperature. If the RA temperature is below the
thresholdminushalfthedeadband(e.g.,71Ffortheexampleabovewitha2Fdeadband),
thezonesare,onaverage,assumedtobeinheatingmode,andtheheatingmodetemperature
target in SC5 applies. If the RA temperatures is above the threshold plus half the deadband
(e.g.,73F),thezonesare,onaverage,assumedtobeincoolingmode,andthecoolingmode
temperaturetargetinSC4applies.
For the Energy recovery bypass damper SAT target, the same value, is the midband for
proportional control of the mixedair target temperature downstream of continuously
modulatedbypassdamper.Asthereturnairgetswarmer,indicatingthezonesarecollectively
warmer, the temperature target for damper modulation is steadily reduced over the
bandwidthofsensedvalues.Forthe72Ftheexampleabovewitha4Fdefaultsbandwidth,
thebypasstemperaturetargetwillbeatitsmaximumvaluewhenthesensedRAtemperature
is 70 F and will be at its minimum value when the sensed RA temperature is 74 F, thus
minimizing undesirable heating or cooling load associated with outside air while maximizing
feecoolingwhenawarmerRAtemperatureindicatesthezonesareonaverage(byvolume)74
Forwarmer(i.e.,theyareincoolingmode).
Target temperatures for the energy recovery bypass damper and for the heating and cooling for
modesoftheenergyrecoverydevicearebasedupontheleavingairtemperature(LAT)setforthe
AHU Heating Coil. Normally, this leaving air temperature is the minimum temperature that the
system is permitted to deliver to the zonese.g., 55 to 65 F or a similar cooltoneutral value
(heat,aboveandbeyondthistempering,ismosttypicallyprovidedatthezonelevel).IftheLATat
theAHUHeatingCoilissetto55F,forexample,thetargetvalueswillbeasfollows
50F(simply555)fortheenergyrecoveryincoolingmode
70F(simply(555)+20)fortheenergyrecoveryinheatingmode
50FatMaxsignal(whentheRAiswarmer)and70FatMinsignal(whentheRAiscooler)for
thebypassdamperproportionalcontrol.
Note that the energy recovery heating and cooling mode target temperatures are intended to be
unattainable targets, just beyond the reach of the capability of the device to preheat or precool the
incoming outdoor air with recovered heat or coolth. For the example above, when in heating mode
(baseduponasensedRAtemperatureof71Forless)theenergyrecoverywouldnotbeexpectedtobe
abletoheattheoutsideairallthewayto70Fwithheatrecoveredfromreturn/exhaustairthatisitself
71Forcooler.Similarly,theenergyrecoverywouldcertainlynotbeexpectedtocooltheoutsideairall
thewayto50Fbyrejectingheatfromittothereturn/exhaustairthatisitself73Forwarmer.
SC5usesthesamevaluesatMinandMaxsignalastheenergyrecoverytargetsinSC4andSC5.Forthe
controllersontheenergyrecoverydevice,SC4andSC5,thetargetscouldbemoreextremewithnoeffect,
astheyarealmostcertainlyunattainable.However,ifthetargettemperaturesatthehighandlowendsof
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
234
theproportionalcontrolbandforthebypassdamperaresettooverlyextremevalues,thiswillhavethe
effectofmakingtheusefulpartoftheproportionalbandrampveryquick(overanaryrangeofsensed
values)fromthelowesttothehighestattainablevalues,orviceversa.
The most important number in these three controllers is the setpoint in the energy recovery mode
controlsandmidbandvaluefortheproportionalcontrolinthebypassandthebypassdampercontrol,as
it determines the changeover from heating to cooling logic for energy recovery based upon the RA
temperature.
Notethat,apartfromtheenergyintensiveintentionalreheataftersubcoolingtodehumidifytheintake
air,itisunlikelyyouwouldsettheLATfortheAHUheatingcoilinapredefinedsystemconfigurationtoa
valuewarmerthanthelowestLATforthecoolingcoilimmediatelyupstreamofit(e.g.,55F):Ifsettoa
warmerLAT,theheatingcoilwillsimplyconsumeenergyreheatingtheairjustcooledbythecoolingcoil.
If,however,youchosetoreplacethefixedtemperaturecontrollerontheAHUheatingcoilwithonethat,
for example, used a sensor to reset the SAT according to zone temperatures, etc., then you would
replacetheautosizedcontrollerwithoneofyourown.
Thefollowinggraphofintakeairflowrateandtemperaturesoneithersideoftheenergyrecoverydevice
onahotsummerday.
Teal=outsideair(node21)
Blue=intakeairaftertheenergyrecoverydevice(node22)
Purple=return/exhaustair(node40)
Red=exhaustairafterreceivingrejectedheatfromtheintakeair(node41)
Gold=intakeairflowrate(node21)
Itcanbeseenthattheintakeairmatchestheoutsideairtemperatureuntilthepointatwhichtheoutside
airisactuallywarmerthantheexhaustairfromthebuilding.Atthiscrossoverpoint,theenergyrecovery
devicebegins,byvirtualofthistemperaturedifferential,totransferheatfromtheincomingoutdoorairto
the outgoing exhaust air. The effect increases with the deltaT in keeping with the heat exchanger
effectivenessinput.Thisrejectionofunwantedheatcontinuesuntilthesystemairflowisreducedtozero
attheendoftheday.Itcanalsobeseenthatintheearlyeveningthetemperatureoftheintakeairrises
withariseinthetemperatureofthereturn/exhaustair,andthusalsoadropinusefuldeltaTandtherate
ofheatrejectiontotheexhaust.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
235
8.4.2
VAVairflowcontrols
174B
Profilesforproportionalcontrolmidbands
Timedvariationofvaluesprovidesnighttimesetback/setup.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
236
8.5 Prototypesystems:Systemspecificdescriptionsandguidance
58B
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
8.5.9
PackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)
175B
PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)
176B
Singlezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)
177B
Singlezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)
178B
VAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler
179B
VAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
180B
VAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler
181B
VAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
182B
Dedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHW
boiler.
183B
8.5.10 IndirectdirectevaporativecoolingversionofVAVreheatsystem5abovewithbackupDX
coolingandzonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV).
184B
8.5.11 VAVreheatwithdifferentialenthalpyeconomizersetupforthepublicareasofahotelor
similarbuildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualguest/residentroomsdrawingairfroman
atriumzoneonthemainVAVsystem.
185B
8.5.12 MixedmodenaturalventilationandVAVreheatwithzonetemperatureandzoneCO2
overridesfornatventwhenitisinsufficient
186B
8.5.12.1 TemperatureandCO2basedoverrideswhennotenoughcoolingorventilationisprovidedvia
operablewindows,inspiteoffavorableindooroutdoorthermalconditions
8.5.13 Singlefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
187B
8.5.14 Dualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
188B
8.5.15 Underfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxesforperimeterzones,leakage
path,andheatingmoderemixingofPFPbzones.
189B
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
237
8.5.15.1 CanbeusedforthermaldisplacementventilationbysimplyomittingthePFPbs,UFADplenum,
leakagepath,andremixinginheatingmode.
8.5.16 UFAD/DVsystemasabove,plusheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatofsub
cooled(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
190B
8.5.17 ActivechilledbeamsandDOASforventilationusingelectricwatercooledchillerwith
watersideeconomizerandcondenserheatrecovery;HWboilerandrecoveredheatfor
DOASandzonebaseboardfintubeconvectors.
191B
8.5.18 Radiantheatingandcoolingpanels(i.e.,fourpipesystem),plusDOASwithairsideenergy
recoveryandDCV.
192B
8.5.19 RadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheat
ofsubcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
193B
guideiscomplete.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
238
References
8B
ASHRAE 1402004 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Building Energy Analysis Computer
Programs.ASHRAE2004.ISSN10412336.
ASHRAE 1402007 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Building Energy Analysis Computer
Programs.ASHRAE2007.ISSN10412336.
ASHRAE 90.12007 Energy Standard for Buildings Except LowRise Residential Buildings. ASHRAE 2007.
ISSN10412336
ASHRAEHandbookofFundamentals,HeatBalanceMethod
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
239
10 AppendixA.RulesforAirFlowSpecification
9B
It is important to specify airflows in the system completely and consistently. The rules for airflow
specificationaresetoutbelow.
Airflowsmaybespecifiedbythefollowingmechanisms:
Withaflowratecontroller.Airflowisspecifiedatanypointinthesystemwhereacontrollerwith
itscontrolledvariablesettoflowrateisattachedtotheductwork.
With a percentage flow control controller. Airflow may be specified by a controller with its
controlledvariablesettopercentageflowcontrol.Suchacontrollermayonlybeattachedtothe
outletofadampersetcomponent.Inthiscase,theflowenteringtheleftbranchofthedamperset
(oftentheoutsideairintake)willbesetasapercentageoftheflowleavingtotheright.
By the assumption of continuity across air handling components. The program will deduce the
airflow at all points along a chain of air handling components given the flow at any point in the
chain, on the assumption of flow continuity. This rule is subject to a qualification in the case of
roomcomponents,asexplainedbelow.
Byadditionorsubtractionatajunction.Atajunctionwhereallbutoneoftheflowsareknown,
the program will deduce the unknown flow by addition or subtraction. You must ensure that,
whereaflowistobededucedbysubtraction,theresultisnevernegative.Ifthissituationarises,
thenegativeflowissettozero.
Forthecurrentiterationscheme,everyroutethroughthesystemmustpassthroughatleastone
room. To satisfy this requirement, a room component must have an actual space in the model
assignedtoiti.e.,itcannotsatisfythisruleifitremainssetasanadiabaticduct.
Importantnote:Airflowisnotsetbythefansorbyanyothertypeofcomponent.
Youshouldcheckbeforesimulatingasystemthatallflowsinthesystemcanbedeterminedbyapplying
these rules. Overspecification of flows is tolerated, but there should be no inconsistencies in the
numericalvaluesofflows.
Inthecaseofrooms,theassumptionofflowcontinuityisqualifiedbyadditionalrulesintroducedtoallow
ApacheHVACtointeractwithMacroFlo.
If MacroFlo is running in tandem with ApacheHVAC, it will detect any imbalance between the system
flows entering and leaving each room, and make up the surplus or deficit with air flowing through the
building through openings in the fabric (provided that suitable openings exist). In order to allow such
imbalances to be set up, the following additional rules are applied relating to the assumption of flow
continuityacrossrooms:
In a first pass, ApacheHVAC makes no assumption about flow continuity across rooms. Within this
constraint,allpossibleflowdeductionsaremade.
Ifsomesystemairflowsremainundeterminedatthisstage,asecondpassismadeinwhichtheprogram
allowsroomoutflowtobesetequaltoroominflow.Allpossibleflowdeductionsarethenmade under
thisassumption.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
240
Ifsomesystemairflowsstillremainundetermined,athirdpassismadeinwhichtheprogramallowsroom
inflowtobesetequaltoroomoutflow,orroomoutflowtobesetequaltoroominflow.Allpossibleflow
deductionsareagainmade.
Afterthisprocess,allairflowsshouldbedeterminedforawellspecifiedsystem.Ifthisisnotthecase,an
errormessageisdisplayed.
Bydelayingtheapplicationoftheroomflowcontinuityassumption,theserulesallowflowimbalancesto
besetuptosimulateavarietyofmechanicalventilationandmixedmoderegimes.
WhenusingApacheHVACandMacroFlointandem,itisimportanttonotethatApacheHVACcansetflows
inMacroFlo,butnotviceversa.AllApacheHVACflowsmustbesetwithinApacheHVAC.
ThereareinstanceswhenroomflowimbalancesmaymeaningfullybesetupwithoutinvokingMacroFlo.
Ifthesupplyrateforaroomisgreaterthantheextractrate,thedeficitwilltacitlybeassumedtobelost
to outside. Note, however, that if the extract rate is greater than the supply, the deficit will not be
assumed to be made up with air from elsewhere unless MacroFlo is running and suitable openings are
present.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
241
11 AppendixB.HVACSystemsModelingGuidanceSpecificto
ASHRAEStandard90.12007
10B
This section provides only supplemental information where added guidance was deemed necessary for
modelingparticularHVACsystemsinthecontextoftheASHRAEStandard90.1AppendixGPerformance
RatingMethod(PRM).InformationregardingsystemsmodelingthatisnotspecifictothePRMisprovided
inprevioussectionsofthisdocument.
guideiscomplete.
11.1.1 Baselinesystems2and4PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)andPackagedSingleZone
HeatPump(PSZHP)
194B
Default autosizing for predefined Heat Pumps in ApacheHVAC sets the heating capacity at ARI rating
conditionof47FequaltothefullheatingloadassignedtotheHPintheHeatingDesignSizingrun.Using
thedefaultperformancecurves,thecapacityactuallyavailablefromtheHPaloneatthedesignheating
outdoorconditionwillbesignificantlyless(ontheorderof30to60%oftheratedcapacity,dependingon
climate, etc.). The remaining load will be met by the backup heat source, which, by default, is electric
resistanceheatingwithinfinitecapacity.
ForASHRAE90.1PRMBaselineSystems,checkthatthedefaultautosizedcapacitydoesnotsignificantly
conflictwiththefollowingconsiderations:
Generally, the ASHP heating capacity should be within about +/ 10 to 20% of the cooling capacity to
mimicthebehaviorofactualequipment.Heatingcapacityforactualequipmentisoften,butnotalways,
ontheorderof15%lessthancoolingcapacity.Usingthisasaguideline,ratherthanexactlymatchingthe
sizes or sizing the heating capacity larger to meet more of the winter heating load without backup (as
such equipment can be selected), will cause the electric resistance heat to begin sharing the load at a
temperatureclosertothe40Foutdoormaximumpermittedforelectricbackupoperation.
ForASHRAE90.1PRMBaselineSystems,theASHPheatingcapacityshouldmustbesufficienttomaintain
the space heating setpoint without solar or internal gains when the outdoor temperature is 40 F, such
thatthebackupelectricheatneversupplementstheheatpumpwhentheoutdoortemperatureis40For
higher.
If the required heating capacity to maintain the 40 F upper limit for backup heat source operation is
significantlygreaterthanthecoolingcapacity(e.g.,),thecoolingcapacityshouldbeincreasedsothatthe
heating and cooling capacities are more fairly representative of actual equipment. This will cause the
simulated DX cooling mode to operate at a lower partload fraction and may require revision of the
coolingmodeCOPifthecoolingcapacityisshiftedtoahigherrangewithrespecttoASHRAE90.12007
tables6.8.1Band6.8.1D.
Foractualapplications,thiswilltypicallybeafunctionoftheequipmentselectionandsizingoften,but
notalways,prioritizedforDesignCoolingLoadswiththeheatingandcoolingcapacitybothdetermined
by sizing at 100 to 125% of the cooling load. However, for heating, the NRCAN recommended outdoor
temperaturebalancepoint(OAtempatwhichcapacityequalsspaceconditioningload)shouldbeinthe
rangeof23to32F(5to0C).
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
242
To maintain dehumidification capability in humid climates, and thus consistency with industry best
practice,heatpumpcoolingcapacityshouldbeoversizednomorethan125%.
AsnotedinthemoregeneralsectiondescribingthesepredefinedApacheHVACsystems,the90.1PRM
requirements for sizing and operation of airsource heat pumps (ASHPs) are based in part upon DOE2
parametersanddefaultinputstoeQuestratherthanstandardindustrypracticeforsizingandoperation
ofASHPs.Thesedefaultsandthesizingapproachthattheyimplycanleadtounrealisticsimulationresults,
regardlessofwhatsimulationtoolisbeingused.Thefollowingconsiderationsarethereforeessentialto
usingthesepredefinedsystemsinthecontextofthePRMbaselinerequirements.
ThisdiscussionaddressesthefollowingsectionG3.1.3.1textfromASHRAE90.1:
HeatPumps(Systems2and4).Electricairsourceheatpumpsshallbemodeledwithelectricauxiliary
heat.Thesystemsshallbecontrolledwithmultistagespacethermostatsandanoutdoorairthermostat
wiredtoenergizeauxiliaryheatonlyonthelastthermostatstageandwhenoutdoorairtemperatureis
lessthan40F.
IEShasprovidedanewsetofdefaultvaluesfortheAirSourceHeatPump(ASHP)componentasofVE6.3
(default values are shown in the figure below); however, in light of the complications with ASHRAE
requirements vs. both realworld and simulationbased sizing considerations detailed below, fully
automating the sizing and performance curve inputs to meet the ASHRAE90.1 PRM requirements for
ASHPs in PRM baseline systems 2 and 4 will come in future versions. The current method therefore
combinesautosizingwithmanualinputstosizebaselineASHPswithinthecurrentversionoftheVE.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
243

ThesizingprocessfortheASHPshouldbeasfollows(ifneeded,seefurtherexplanationbelow):
VE6.3
Forthesesystems,theASHPcomponentandDXcoolingprovidetheheatingandcoolingmodesof
thereversibleheatpump.Theelectricresistancebackupheatsourcehasunlimitedcapacity.
Completethestandarddesignsizingrunsforspacesandthenforthesystem(s)withtheoversizing
factorssettotheirdefaultvaluesof1.15forcoolingequipmentand1.25forheatingequipment,
asrequiredbythe90.1PRM.ThiswillautosizethecapacityASHPandDXcoolingtomeetthefull
extentoftheoversizedloadsattherespectivedesignconditions.
For each zone with an ASHP, compare the autosized capacity for the ASHP component in the
rangeoftypicalbalancepointtemperatures(e.g.,25to40F,dependingontheclimate)withthe
sizedcapacityofthecorrespondingDXcoolingcoil.ThesecapacitiesareshownintheHeatPump
componentdialogor,formanyzonesatonce,intabulareditviewthereof,andintheCoolingCoil
dialog or tabular edit view thereof. Note that the connected DX Cooling type covers a range of
possible baseline sizes having a common COP, and therefore the capacity indicated in the type
dialogmaybeoverriddenbyautosizingforeachinstanceofthattype(ifpermitted).
If the ASHP capacity within the range of typical balance points does not and DX cooling coil
capacitiesdonotdiffersignificantly*(e.g.,by20%ormore),adjustasindicatedbelow.
ApacheHVAC
244
IftheASHPcomponentandDXcoolingcoilcapacitiesdiffersignificantly*(e.g.,by20%ormore),
adjustasindicatedbelow.
o IftheautosizedcoolingcoilcapacityissignificantlygreaterthantheASHPcapacity,adjust
theASHPcapacityupwardtomatchthecoolingcapacity.IftheASHPiswithin20%ofthe
DXcooling,itisprobablynotworthmakinganadjustment,asthisservesonlytoscalethe
ASHPperformancecurvewithrespecttoefficiency.
Iftheheatingdesigndayoutdoortemperatureis40Forhigher,checkthesimulationresultsto
ensurethatthebackupelectric
System heating Capacity from sizing runs, modified as required to accommodate the following
considerations:
Foractualapplications,thiswilltypicallybeafunctionoftheequipmentsizingasprioritizedforDesign
CoolingLoads,withtheheatingandcoolingcapacitybothdeterminedbysizingat100to125%ofthe
coolingload.However,forheating,theNRCANrecommendedoutdoortemperaturebalancepoint(OA
tempatwhichcapacityequalsspaceconditioningload)shouldbeintherangeof23to32F(5to0C).
ForASHRAE90.1PRMBaselineSystems,inordertohavetheelectricresistanceheatsharetheloadat
atemperatureclosertothe40Foutdoormaximumforelectricbackupoperation,theASHPheating
capacityshouldbethrgreatof:
A)thesizedcoolingcapacity
B) sufficient to maintain the space heating setpoint without solar or internal gains when the
outdoortemperatureis40F.
IftheheatingdesigndayOAtempissignificantlybelow30F,andadditionaldesignsizingrunwithOA
temperaturebetween30and40FmaybejustifiedtodetermineanASHPcapacityandbalancepoint
thatwillengagetheelectricbackupbelowthedesigntemperaturewheninternalandsolargainsare
notpresent.
IftherequiredheatingcapacitytosatisfyBisgreaterthanthecoolingcapacity,A,thecoolingcapacity
shouldbeincreasedup
Tomaintainconsistencywithindustrybestpractice,thecoolingcapacityshouldbeoversizednomore
than 125%, unless this is required to match sizing of heating capacity in a PRM baseline system to
avoidoperationofthebackupelectricheatwhentheOAtemperatureisabove40F.
ThesizingprocessforASHPstendstodiffersignificantlyfromthatofotherHVACequipment.TheASHRAE
PRMspecificationisunfortunatelyunclearwithrespecttothesizingthistypeofequipmentforbaseline
systems(moreonthisbelow).Thusthereisadegreeofinterpretationrequiredhere,andyouarefreeto
reinterpretthisasyouseefit.ThenumbersyouareseeingintheASHPcomponentdialogaresimplya
startingpoint,andwillrequiremodification.
IftheASHPweresizedfortypicaldesignheatingindoorconditions(zerosolarandinternalgains)andan
outdoortemperaturebetween23and40F,thiswouldbeconsistentwithboth.However,iftheoutdoor
conditionfortheheatingdesigndayissignificantlybelow32F,heatingthisisinconsistentwiththewayin
whichequipmentisnormallysizedinasimulationenvironmenti.e.,itsadeparturefromthestandard
procedure of sizing of heating equipment to meet heating loads at the standard design heating
conditions.
The90.1PRMrequiresadequatelysizingtheASHPplusbackupheatsourcetoavoidexcessiveunmetload
hours, and does not permit any electric backup heat when the outdoor temperature is 40 F or higher.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
245
Thusthebalancepoint(theoutdoortemperatureatwhichthefulloutputoftheASHPjustmeetsthe
spaceheatingload)needstobebelow40Funderallcircumstancesofvaryinginternalgains,solargains,
etc. The PRM goes on to specify that the electric backup should be the last resort with respect to
maintainingthedesiredroomtemperaturewhentheairsourceheatpumpcantfullymeettheload.The
specified incrementally lower thermostat setpoint for engaging the backup heat is but one means of
accomplishing this. Addressing these together requires a bit of a sizing balancing act. And, the 40 F
ASHRAEisreferringtoisverydifferentthantheMinimumsourcetemperatureintheASHPdialog.Bothof
theseareexplainedbelow.
ItisimportantnottobemisledbythePRMreferenceto40Fasthemaximumoutdoortemperaturefor
operation of the backup electric resistance heating. The PRM is not saying that the ASHP should be off
below this temperature, only that the electric resistance heat should be off at above it. Assuming the
former, which may be implied by the combination of the PRM language regarding the and the eQuest
default for Minimum HP Heat Temp in the eQuest Supplemental Heat dialog (see below), can
significantlyskewresultsforthemodel.
Thefollowingbargraphshowsannualenergyconsumptionbyenduseforautosizedheatingandcooling
aspredictedbyeQuestversion3.63withlocationsettoMinneapolis,MNandHVACsystemtypesetto
PTACandheatsourcesettoheatpump(i.e.,systemtypeisPTHP).Allotherinputs,includingthebuilding
geometry,remainedatpresetversion3.63defaultvalues.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
246
In this particular illustration of how the default eQuest version 3.63 ASHP input values can lead to
unrealisticresultsforabaselinesystem,thedefaultbuildinginMinneapolis,MNused75timesasmuch
energy(390MBTUvs.5.2MBTU)forsupplementalelectricresistancespaceheatingasitdidforheating
viathespecifiedPTHPsystems.
ThescreencapturesaboveshowhowthedefaultMinimumHPHeatTemphasbeenreducedto10Fto
avoid this particular problem. Because we have found no justification for cutting the heat pump off at
even10Fwhenthebackupheatsourceiselectricresistance,thedefaultvalueinApAcheHVACasofVE
6.3is0F.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
247
Foroneparticularzone(thetopfloorcorezoneofthedefault2storyofficebuilding),thedefaultASHP
inputs and sizing beget particularly skewed results, as indicated by the annual load served by the
Supplemental heat source vs. that served by the total load on the Heat pump unit in the SSQ report
above.
MinimumsourcetemperaturesettingfortheASHPcomponent
The minimum source temperature is the temperature below which the ASHP will switch off completely
andallowthebackupheatsourcetotakeovercompletely,ratherthanjustsupplementtheASHPoutput.
WhenthebackupheatsourceiselectricresistanceheatingandboththeASHPheatandbackupheatare
deliveredbyacommonfan,etc.(i.e.,whenthereisnosignificantdifferencebetweenthesewithrespect
to heating system or parasitic loads), it makes sense to switch the ASHP off completely only when low
outdoortemperaturesdrivetheCOPtoavalueoflessthan1.0.Thisisbecausebothrunonelectricityand
the electric resistance heating has an effective COP of 1.0. In such cases, the thermal and economic
balancepointsforthishandoffshouldbeessentiallythesame.
Because the PRM Baseline systems with ASHPs are required to use electric resistance as the backup
heatingsource,wemustassumethishasaneffectiveCOPof1.0.AsthedefaultASHPcurvehasaCOPof
betterthan1.0downto0F,wehaveused2FasthedefaultminimumsourcetemperatureasofVE6.3.
Thisisalsoconsistentwithindustrybestpractice,whichmightsetthisbetween0and10Fforasystem
with electric resistance backup, depending upon the equipment, climate, and so forth. Some recently
offerASHPtechnologies,however,havebeendevelopedwithagreateremphasisonheatingperformance
andarecapableofoperatingefficientlywellbelow0F.
Whenthebackupheatsourceusesadifferentenergysource,hasrelativelyhighefficiency,orhaslesser
associated system/parasitic loads, the economic balance point may be higher with respect to the heat
pump COP. The economic balance point is the outdoor temperature below which it is cheaper to heat
with the supplementary heat source rather than the heat pump. In such cases, it often makes sense to
restrictASHPoperation,operatingonlythebackupheatsourcebelowaspecifiedoutdoortemperature.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
248
Anoutdoortemperaturesensorisusedtoshutofftheheatpumpwhenthetemperaturefallsbelowthe
presetlimit.Onlythesupplementaryheatsourceoperatesbelowthistemperature.ThisistheMinimum
sourcetemperaturesettingfortheASHPcomponentinApacheHVAC.
Note:WhilerealworldASHPapplicationsdosometimes,asnotedabove,restrictoperationoftheASHP
belowaspecifiedtemperature,itisveryunusualtorestrictthebackupheatsourceoperationinbuilding
forwhichtheASHRAE90.1PRMisapplicable.Whileanindividualhomeownermaybegiventheoptionto
preventtheuseofthebackupheataboveasetoutdoortemperature,theoccupantsofheatedspacesin
largerbuildingsgenerallyexpecttheheatingsetpointtobemetbywhatevermeansisavailabletodoso,
regardlessoftheparticularoutdoortemperatureatthetime.
ASHPsizing
For actual applications, ASHP sizing and selection is a combined function of design cooling Loads and
heatingbalancepoint.Thecoolingloadsareusuallythepriorityinaclimatewithsignificantcoolingload,
especially if it is a humid climate. On the other hand, the preferred heating balance point (the lowest
outdoor temperature at which the ASHP meets the entire heating load) is typically in the 22 to 32 F
range.Ifdrivenpurelybycoolingrequirements,bothheatingandcoolingcapacitywouldbesizedatabout
100 to 110% of the cooling load. This approach is meant to provide efficient cooling operation and
effective dehumidification. In climates with mild winters, this may provide ample capacity to meet all
heating loads. In colder climates, however, this approach to sizing will tend to address some significant
fraction of the heating load, but not all of it. The rest will be addressed by a backup heat source. To
minimize dependence on the backup heat source, a somewhat larger unit may be selected in order to
providealowerheatingbalancepointwithrespecttooutdoortemperature.However,wheretheclimate
is not all that cold, oversizing with respect to heating to achieve a low balance point temperature may
reduceseasonalheatingefficiencyifitleadstoamajorityofoperatinghoursatlowpartloadfractions,
whichissignificantlylessefficientthanoperatingtheheatpumpatornearfullload.Furthermore,part
loadoperationatlowoutdoortemperaturesisdoublyinefficient:atanoutdoortemperatureof37F,the
COP for a typical heat pump can drop below 1.0 if the load is less than about 30%. Finally, if
dehumidificationisanticipatedwhenincoolingmode(i.e.,inallbutnotablydryclimates),bestpractice,
even when seeking a lower heating balance point, is to avoid sizing the unit greater than 125% of the
coolingload.Gettingthisrightrequiresasomewhatsophisticatebitoflogic.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
249
Heat
load
Design
temp
HP
Cap
25 to
35 F ?
47 F
Maybe best to simply size ASHP capacity at 47 F OA source temp to equal required heating capacity at
designheatingcondition.Untilwebuildsomeorallofthislogicintothesoftware,userinterventionwill
be required to determine appropriate sizing of the ASHP component in ApacheHVAC. As of VE 6.4, the
ASHP capacity at 47 Foutdoor temperature will, for systems 2& 4 when used in an ASHRAE 90.1 PRM
Baselinemodelorwhenrequestedbytheuser,besetequaltotheDXcoolingcapacity.However,inthe
rare case of spaces with both moderate cooling loads and substantial heating loads occurring when
outdoor temperatures are above 40 F, it will be incumbent upon the user to check that these heating
loadsarenotexceedingtheASHPcapacityandcausinguseofbackupheatwhenoutdoortemperatures
aregreaterthan40F.ThereasonforthisisthatthebackupheatingforASHPsinApacheHVACdoesnot
includeanarbitraryhighlimitinputforthebackupheatsource.Rather,thebackupsupplementstheASHP
whenthelattercannotfullymeettheload.
Afurtherrefinementwillextendthislogicasfollows,usinganadditionalspecialpurposeheatingdesign
sizingrunwiththeoutdoortemperatureforcedto40F.
FortruePRMBaselinesystems(i.e.,onlywhensuchsystemareusedinPRMBaselinemodels),inorder
to have the electric resistance heat share the load at a temperature closer to the 40 F outdoor
maximumforbackoperation,theASHPheatingcapacityshouldbethegreaterofthefollowing:
1)
theassociatedcoolingcapacity
2)
heating capacity sufficient to maintain the space heating setpoint without solar or internal
gainswhentheoutdoortemperatureis40F
Whentheheatingcapacitymustgreaterthanthedesiredcoolingcapacitysuchthatthebackupsource
will never be required when the outdoor temperature is above 40 F (#2 above), the associated DX
coolingcapacitywillneedtobeincreasedtomatchtheheatingcapacity.Thisscalestheperformance
curvesintheDXcoolingdialogsothatthepartloadefficienciesarecorrect.
The ASHRAE PRM specification includes the very clear statement regarding controls to prevent backup
electricheatoperationaboveoutdoortemperaturesof40F;however,thisappliesonlytosoftwarethatis
incapableofmodelingatruebackheatsourcethatisusedonlywhentheprimary(ASHP)heatsourceis
unabletomeettheloadasafunctionofoutdoorconditionsand/orindoorheatingloads.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
250
ThePRMisalsounclearwithrespecttotheactualsizingofheatpumpequipmentforbaselinesystems.If,
for example, ASHP is required by ASHRAE to be 25% oversized beyond that required just to meet the
spaceconditioningloadatthedesigncondition
Backupelectricresistanceheat
Letssaythedesignconditionisa10Foutdoortemperaturejustbeforesunrise(nosun)withnointernal
gains in the space, and maintaining the room at say a 70F setpoint under these conditions results in a
quasistaticloadof464kBtu/h.Multiplythisby1.25andweget580kBtu/h.
If sized according to ASHRAE requirements for baseline building equipment, the ASHP has to have a
capacityof580kBtu/h,andweassumethisshouldbeattheratedcondition(thisiswhereASHRAEis
more than just a bit unclear). If we then go and look at the rating conditions for an ASHP in a baseline
system (EER tables at the end of 90.1 chapter 6), we see that the ARI rating condition is an outdoor
temperature of 17 F. Thus, following this logic, our baseline ASHP should be capable of providing 580
kBtu/hat17Foutdoortemperature.Iftheloadisgreaterortheoutdoortemperatureislower,itmaynot
actuallymeettheload.However,asthedesignloadwasdeterminedat10Foutdoortemperatureandthe
equipment must be 25% oversized, this probably will never by a limiting factor for a baseline ASHP
system. There will, however, be another very significant limiting factor: The ASHP probably will have a
lowerlimit,suchas17F,belowwhichitwillprovidenousefulheat
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
251
12 AppendixC.ModelingVRV/VRFsystems
11B
While work has begun on this, the VE does not yet include an explicit model for Variable Refrigerant
Volume (VRV) or Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) systems. However, as of VE 6.1, a relatively simple
condenser heat recovery approach can be used to reasonable approximate the thermodynamic
performance of such systems in ApacheHVAC. This method assumes that the VRV/VRF system is
configuredandcontrolledthemoveheat,viaacommonrefrigerantloop,fromzonesincoolingmodeto
thoseinheatingmodewhenthesemodesoverlap.
1. Useapartloadcurvechillermodelforthecoolingmodeandapartloadcurveheatingsourceforthe
heatingmode.
2. In the cooling source, you can specify COP values dependent upon both load and OA drybulb
conditions. The curve generator spreadsheet I had sent you can be useful for this. Ive attached the
latestversion(7),tobesureyourenotworkingwithanolderone.
3. Intheheatingsource,theCOPvalueswillbeexpressedasefficiencyvalues(e.g.,350%ratherthan3.5)
andthesewillvaryonlywiththeload.
4. The Condenser Heat Recovery percentage in the Cooling source dialog should be 100% (suggesting
thatalloftheheatextractedfromzonesincoolingcanberejectedtozonesinheating)andtheCHR
recipientshouldpointtotheheatsourceyouhavesetupfortheheatingmode.
5. Intheheatingsourcedialog,leavethetickboxforUsewatersourceheatpump?unticked,asyou
will already have determined the electrical energy needed to extract this recovered heat on the
coolingside.SettheHeatingplanttypetoOtherheatingplanttokeepenergyconsumptionresults
separatefromboilersorDHWheatsourcesinthemodel.
6. Thiswillaccountforthebenefitsofmovingheatfromonezonetoanother,andvariationofCOPwith
loadand,onthecoolingside,withoutdoorconditions.ItwillnotaccountforthedegradationofCOP
orheatingcapacitywithlowoutdoortemperatures.
7. UntilwecanpermittheASHPcomponenttobeaCHRrecipient,accountingforthedegradationofCOP
orheatingcapacitywithlowoutdoortemperatureswillrequirepostprocessingasfollows:
a. Copy hourly outdoor drybulb temperatures and results for both the heatsource load
electricityusetoaspreadsheet.
b. Inthespreadsheet,createaformulathatreferencestheOAtemperatureateachhourlytime
stepandmultipliestheheatingenergyconsumptionforthathourbyadegradationfactorto
reasonablyapproximatethedropinCOPatlowerOAtemperatures.
c. Create another formula that references the OA temperature at each hourly time step and
returnsavaluefortheapproximatecapacityoftheheatingmodeatthatOAtemperature.
d. Create a formula that subtracts the degraded heating capacity from the load on the heat
sourceateachtimestepandreturnsavalueforremainingload,ifany,thatwouldnothave
beenmetbytheheatsourceatthatOAtemperature.
e. Multiplytheremainingload,ifany,bytheefficiencyofabackupheatsourceorsimplytotal
the remainder values if the backup is local electricresistance heating, as this is effectively
100%efficient.Addtheelectricityusedforbackupheatingtothatusedbytheheatingmodeof
theVRVequipmentasdeterminedbytheformulainstepb.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
252
Inmildtowarmclimates,step7aewillbeoflittlebenefitandmaybeoverkill.Incoldclimates,itmaybe
importanttoaccountforthedegradationinbothCOPandcapacityatlowoutdoortemperatures.
Thegraphbelowshowsresultsforamodest25zoneofficebuildingonadaywhereheatingandcooling
loadsoverlap.Thereisoneairsourceheatpump(ASHP)actingastheheatingmodeoftheVRVsystem
and one DX unit modeled via the partloadcurve chiller dialog as the cooling mode of the VRV. These
componentswithinApacheHVACarepermittedtoservemultipleheatingandcoolingcoils,aswouldbe
thecaseinaVRVsystem.
In the illustrated example, the ASHP and DX cooling sources are coupled to a multiplexed stack of 25
packagedsinglezonesystemsfortheindividualzones.Withtheexceptionoftheaddedcondenserheat
recovery, these are essentially ASHRAE 90.1 PRM Baseline system 4, as provided in predefined
configurationamongtheprototypesystemsavailableasofVE6.1.
Thecondenserheatrecovery(CHR)actsasthecommonrefrigerantlooptopassheatfromthezonesin
coolingmodetothoserequiringheat.TheASHPandCHRbothpointtoanelectricresistancebackupheat
source, which is thus 3rd in line as a source of heat after the CHR and ASHP capacity are fully used.
Because the backup heat source is required and will always have an infinitely expandable capacity, any
limitation of heating capacity needs to be specified in terms of capacity for each heating coil. Cooling
capacityissimilarlylimitedbythecapacityspecifiedforeachcoolingcoil.
TheASHPhasheatingcapacityandCOPvaryingwiththesourcetemperature(thisshouldmostoftenbe
outdoor temperature so that the system is correctly represented when heat demand exceeds the
availableheatextractedfromzonesthatareincoolingmode).TheDXcoolingusingthepartloadcurve
chillermodelhasCOPvaryingwithloadandoutdoor(condenser)conditions.WhiletheCOPatanygiven
timestepfortheDXcoolingwillbeafunctionofoutdoorconditionsandloadratherthanstrictlyindoor
conditions,aswouldbethe casewhentransferringheatfrom onelocation toanotherincommonloop
VRF/VRV system operation, this method should provide a reasonable approximation of the system
performance.
If desired, postprocessing of heating energy consumption results can provide an added degree of
accuracy
AlthoughtheCHRfacilitydoesallowformodelingenergyconsumptionaccordingtoaCOPassociatedwith
upgradingheatfromacondenserlooptoaheatingloop(e.g.,asinaWSHP),thisisnotnecessaryinthis
case,astheheatingcoilswilleffectivelyoperateasthecondenserfortheDXcoolingwhenheatisbeing
transferredviaCHR.Thereisalsoaninputwithinthepartloadcurvechillerdialogforthepercentageof
condenser heat available for recovery. Because there is no heat exchanger required, and thus no
exchangereffectivenesstomodel,andnoalternatemeansofrejectingcondenserheatwhenitisbeing
routed to condenser coils that are directly heating spaces, the available CHR percentage ought to be
approaching 100%. The compressor COP should account for losses associated with compressor heat
rejection directly to the surrounding air. As a small amount of heat will be lost in the distribution of
refrigerant to coils in heat rejection (heating) mode, an appropriate value for available CHR percentage
mightbe95%,dependingonthesystemcomponents,configuration,andinstallation.
Thegraphbelowshowstherecoveredheatfromthecoolingside(greenline)takingprecedenceoverthe
ASHP.Italsoshowsthatthecoolingsystemisaccountingfortheenergyrequiredtoextractthisheatfrom
anevaporatorcoilinzoneswherecoolingistakingplaceandthenprovidingittotheheatingside.Thus
theelectricalenergyconsumptionforthisextractionofheatfromzonesincoolingmodedoesnotneedto
becountedseparatelyontheheatingside.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
253
Inworkingoutthethesemethods,ourobservationisthatformanybuildingtypesandconfigurations,if
the systems are suitably controlled, there should be very little temporal overlap of heating and cooling
modes in a building effectively served by a large number of singlezone systems sharing a common
outdoor component. It would therefore appear that, in many applications, much of the efficiency (or
perhapsbetterreferredtoasefficacy)ofVRV/VRFsystemsstemsfromtheiravoidanceoftheonesize
fitsallplusreheatoutcometypicalofamultizonepackagedVAVsystem.Inotherwords,thecommon
loopaspectoftheconfigurationoftenseemstobesecondarytootheraspectsofVRV,suchasobviating
theneedforreheat,intermsofprovidingreducedenergyconsumption.
AsofVE6.1.1,therewillbeadedicatedDXCoolingmodelusingperformancecurvesandaccountingfor
theenteringairWBTattheDXevaporatorcoils.However,thiswillinitiallybesetuptorunonlywithone
DXevaporatorcoilperDXcoolingsourceandwithoutanyformofCHRtobepassedtoanASHP.
VE6.3
ApacheHVAC
254

Apachehvac

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apachehvac

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ApacheHVACUserGuide

3.2 Controlleroperation......................................................................................................... 153

3.4 Controlsincombination................................................................................................... 158

3.5 Airflowcontrollers............................................................................................................ 159

3.7 ControllerAlgorithm......................................................................................................... 164

4.2 ChilledCeilingControl...................................................................................................... 184

4.3 DirectActingRoomHeaterController............................................................................... 186

6.2 CreateMultiplex............................................................................................................... 197

6.3 EditMultiplex................................................................................................................... 202

6.4 EditingComponentsandControllersinmultiplex............................................................. 203

6.5 TabularEditing................................................................................................................. 204

6.6 NodeNumbering.............................................................................................................. 208

8.4 Commonelementsusedinpredefineprototypesystems................................................ 233

8.5 Prototypesystems:Systemspecificdescriptionsandguidance........................................ 237

fEpt(p,Tlbt)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C30p +C01tlbt+C02tlbt +C03tlbt

+C11ptlbt+C21p tlbt+C12ptlbt )/Cnorm

fPv(v)=(C0+C1v+C2v +C3v )/Cnorm

Condenser water loop

Chilled water loop

fPv(v)=(C0+C1v+C2v +C3v )/Cnorm

fEIRpt(p,t)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C01t+C02t +C11pt)/Cnorm

Thedesignchilledwater supplytemperature(leavingevaporatorwatertemperature)isspecifiedin the

fEIRpt(p,t)=(C00+C10p+C20p +C01t+C02t +C11pt)/Cnorm

Thedesignchilledwater supplytemperature(leavingevaporatorwatertemperature)isspecifiedin the

However,thetemperaturecanstillbeeditedfrom theautosizedvalues(thevalueswillreturn toblack

Theflowfromtheleftbranchwillbelessthanthe setminimumwhenthe totaldemandfor

The Radiators(types)dialogsupports definingradiatortypesforplacement inthe building.Eachtime a

Divergent T junctions One of two downstream branches for a flowsplitting T junction

Heat recovery The heatrecovery/exchange component is unusual in that is has two

Drybulb Relative Wetbulb Dewpoint %

Drybulb Relative Wetbulb Dewpoint %

therequired changeina physicalquantity.In this respect,ApacheHVAC proportionalcontrolisactually

Does the sensed variable in conjunction

Are there any referenced OR controllers

YES (or no Set Point)

Does the current time fall within the

Are there any referenced AND

Step4:Onceamultiplex hasbeen created,thenetworkcomponentsandcontrollerscan bepopulatedwith

Wheneditingacontroller orcomponentin Global edit mode,doubleclicking inanyvariableinputfield

Toselect multiplevariablesfortabularediting,holdtheShiftkeyandselectthe desired variables;then

Amultiplex canbedemultiplexed (collapsedtojustthe currentdisplaylayer)ordeletedbyselecting

System parameters: Systemlevel parameters, such as coil leavingairtemperature settings,

AtthetopofcolumnAA,indicatethe Totalsystem population (maximumnumberofpeople

Indirectdirect evaporative cooling version of VAVreheat system 5 above with backup DX

You might also like